JP7416125B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known that are equipped with a variable display means that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner (for example, see Patent Document 1). This gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts displaying a changing pattern when a game ball enters an operating port (starting ball entry means). For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, it finally stops displaying a specific combination of symbols, etc. on the variable display means, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.
In addition, the game machine is equipped with a flow path such as a stage that temporarily rolls and drops the game balls flowing down the game area, and the starting ball entry means allows the game balls that have fallen from this stage to enter the ball. .

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-074175

However, if a subsequent game ball comes into contact with a game ball rolling in a channel such as a stage, the game ball rolling on the stage may move disadvantageously for the player. Gaming machines have a problem in that they do not allow players to play games comfortably.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows players to play games comfortably.

The game machine of the present invention includes a firing means for firing a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area that can enter the game ball, and based on the input of the game ball. a starting ball entry means that triggers a predetermined lottery to be executed; a variable display device that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner based on the execution of a predetermined lottery; and a variable display device that displays a predetermined number of symbols on the variable display device. A game machine comprising: a performance execution means for executing a performance including a reach display performance in which a variable display is performed with are displayed in a predetermined combination, the starting ball entering means being a first starting ball entering means. and a second starting ball entering means different from the first starting ball entering means, which is capable of switching between a permissible state in which entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted. This gaming machine includes a hold display that displays a number of performance hold images corresponding to the number of hold rights for variable display held up to a predetermined upper limit when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means. The first variable display is executed when the game ball enters the first starting ball entering means, and the variable display is executed when the gaming ball enters the second starting ball entering means. a second variable display to be executed; In a situation where a predetermined suggestion information image is displayed with a predetermined display content on the variable display means based on the ball entering the starting ball entry means, a second variable display is displayed that overlaps with the predetermined suggestion information image. specific effect display means capable of displaying a specific effect image; the specific effect display means is configured to display specific effect information executed by the variable display means in a situation where a predetermined suggestion information image is displayed with a predetermined display content on the variable display means; The predetermined suggestion information image is configured such that the display content of the predetermined suggestion information image can change until the display of the specific effect image is finished, and The gaming machine is capable of viewing a predetermined suggestion information image and a specific effect image at the same time, and the predetermined suggestion information image and the specific effect image are respectively drawn so as to have different priorities to be displayed on the variable display means. The suggestive information display means can display a plurality of types of suggestive information images as the display content of a predetermined suggestive information image, and when displaying a predetermined suggestive information image overlapping with a specific effect image, a predetermined The period includes means for maintaining the display content of the predetermined suggestion information image without changing, and means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information image at the position where it was displayed at the start of display of the specific effect image. , the specific effect image can be displayed continuously over a plurality of game rounds based on execution of the permissible state.

According to the present invention, the gaming machine allows players to play games comfortably.

A front view of a pachinko machine according to a reference embodiment of the present invention Front view of game board Diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine Diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery Diagram showing a win/fail table that stores the values of random numbers that will win the jackpot Diagram showing a distribution table that stores random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types Diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing A diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the actuation port. Diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing Diagram showing a flowchart of main processing Diagram showing a flowchart of game time control processing Diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing Diagram showing a flowchart of fluctuation start processing Diagram showing a flowchart of gaming state transition processing Diagram showing a flowchart of the grand prize opening opening/closing process Diagram showing a flowchart of the big prize opening opening process Diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when opening/closing execution mode ends Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device Diagram showing the contents of the sub-side pending information storage area Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device A diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the audio emission control device. Diagram showing a flowchart of suspension determination processing Diagram showing a flowchart of hold occurrence processing Diagram showing a flowchart of pending shift processing A diagram showing the preview pending symbols, normal pending symbols, and special pending symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device. Diagram showing a flowchart of production determination processing Diagram showing the relationship between game results and game status, etc. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device according to Reference Embodiment A of the present invention Diagram showing a flowchart of hold occurrence processing A diagram showing the preview pending symbols, normal pending symbols, and special pending symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device. Diagram showing a flowchart of production determination processing Diagram showing a flowchart of production pattern determination processing Diagram showing the flow of look-ahead production A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is specified that advance notice reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. The display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the first hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side hold area. Diagram showing The display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the second hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the advance notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side hold area. Diagram showing After it is specified that advance notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side holding area, the first hold shift process is executed, and then the special hold is placed in the first area of the second sub-side holding area. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is specified that information is stored. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. A diagram showing a flowchart of a production pattern determination process according to reference form B of the present invention. A diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. The display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the second hold shift process is executed after it is specified that special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. Diagram showing A diagram showing a flowchart of a production pattern determination process according to reference form C of the present invention. After it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area, the pattern display when the special hold extinguishing effect is ended and the notice hold extinguishing effect is executed. Diagram showing the display screen of the device and each layer of the frame buffer A front view of the game board according to the first embodiment of the present invention An enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage A diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate. Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member Diagram showing game balls sorted into routes to enter the guideway Diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the revolving door Diagram showing game balls sorted into routes falling into the game area A front view of a game board according to a second embodiment of the present invention An enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage A diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate. Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member Diagram showing game balls sorted into routes to enter the guideway A diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the protruding part Diagram showing game balls sorted into routes falling into the game area A front view of a game board according to a third embodiment of the present invention An enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member A front view of a game board according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention An enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member An enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device Enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member Diagram showing game balls sorted into routes falling into the game area

[Reference form]
Hereinafter, reference embodiments of the present invention will be explained based on the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a reference embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 1 is a pachinko game machine that is a type of gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 1, this pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 1, and a gaming machine main body that is rotatably attached to the front (front side) with respect to the outer frame 11. 12.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame (not shown) that is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right sides as a support side, and an inner frame (not shown) that is arranged in front of the inner frame and has both left and right sides. The front door frame 121 is supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable forward with one of the left and right sides being the support side, and the front door frame 121 is arranged behind the inner frame and has one of the left and right sides as the support side. and a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

Note that the gaming machine main body 12 includes a locking device (not shown) provided at its rotating tip. This locking device has the function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and also has the function of locking the front door frame 121 against the inner frame so that it cannot be opened. have. These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 13 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 using an unlocking key.

The front door frame 121 has a generally elliptical window section 122 provided to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 123 fitted into the window section 122. Note that in this reference embodiment, the window panel 123 is made of glass and is transparent and colorless, but may be made of synthetic resin or the like so that it is colorless and transparent.
The front door frame 121 also includes an indicator lamp section 124 provided above the window section 122 as part of a light emitting means constituted by various lamp sections provided around the window section 122, and an indicator lamp section. The speaker section 125 is provided on both the left and right sides of the window section 124 and outputs sound effects according to the game situation, and an upper bulge section 14 and a lower bulge section 15 are provided below the window section 122. There is.

The upper bulging portion 14 and the lower bulging portion 15 are arranged vertically in parallel and are provided so as to bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 14 has an upper plate 141 provided inside so as to open upward. The upper tray 141 temporarily stores the game balls put out by the payout device 48 (see FIG. 4) provided in the back pack unit, and arranges them in a line while sending them to the game ball firing mechanism 49 (see FIG. 4). It has the function of guiding.
The lower bulging portion 15 also has a lower plate 151 provided inside so as to open upward. The lower tray 151 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 141.

Further, the front door frame 121 is provided with a firing handle 16 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower plate 151. This firing handle 16 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 1 to fire a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 49 provided below the inner frame toward a gaming area provided above the inner frame. do. The firing handle 16 changes the firing intensity, that is, the firing momentum of the game ball that is fired toward the game area, by changing its rotational operation amount.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 2 has an inner rail portion 21 and an outer rail portion 22 attached to its surface, and is mounted on an inner frame. The aforementioned game area is formed on the game board 2 so as to be divided by an inner rail part 21 and an outer rail part 22. Almost the entire area of this gaming area can be viewed from the front through the window 122.
The inner rail part 21 and the outer rail part 22 constitute a guide rail 23 for guiding the game ball to the game area, and this guide rail 23 is used to fire the game ball from the game ball firing mechanism 49 when the player rotates the firing handle 16. The played game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area.

The guide rail 23 is formed such that its exit portion is disposed on one side of the gaming area and faces toward the upper center of the gaming area. Therefore, as the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 16 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area changes from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side. Shifting to the side. In this reference embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is provided on the left side of the gaming area.

The game board 2 has a plurality of large and small openings in the game area that are formed to penetrate in the front and rear direction by being router-processed. In addition, the game board 2 includes a general winning hole 24 provided at each opening, an upper operating hole (first starting ball entry section) 25, a lower operating opening (second starting ball entering section) 26, a variable winning device 27, and an outlet 28. The game board 2 also includes through gates 31 provided on the left side of the center and on the right side of the center, a main display device 32 provided on the right side of the top, and a variable display unit 33 provided in the center. have. Furthermore, the game board 2 has various members (accessories) such as a large number of nails NL and a windmill installed in the game area in order to appropriately disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls. ing.

Each of the general winning opening 24, the upper operating opening 25, the lower operating opening 26, and the various winning openings of the variable winning device 27 is equipped with detection sensors 301 to 304 (see FIG. 4) that detect the entry of game balls. The detection sensors 301 to 304 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2. Specifically, the general winning opening 24 is equipped with a detection sensor 301, the upper operation opening 25 is equipped with a detection sensor 302, the lower operation opening 26 is equipped with a detection sensor 303, and the variable winning device 27 is equipped with a detection sensor 304. It is equipped with The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301 to 304. Note that the detection sensors 301 to 304 may be of any kind as long as they can individually detect winnings of game balls, and for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors may be employed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 24. The pachinko machine 1 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper operating port 25 and when a ball enters the lower operating port 26. The pachinko machine 1 pays out 15 prize balls when a ball enters the variable winning device 27. Note that the number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the number of prize balls for each operating port 25, 26 may be different.

The out port 28 is provided at the bottom of the game area of the game board 2. Game balls that have not entered the various prize openings etc. are discharged from the gaming area through this outlet 28. Further, the out port 28 includes a detection sensor 305 (see FIG. 4) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 305 is arranged on the back side of the game board 2. Note that, when a ball enters the out hole 28, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out the prize ball, unlike when a ball enters any of the various winning holes.

Each through gate 31 includes a detection sensor 306 (see FIG. 4) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 306 is arranged on the back side of the game board 2. Note that when a ball enters each through gate 31, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out the prize ball, unlike when a ball enters any of the various winning holes.

Here, entering the ball refers to the game ball passing through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the gaming area after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the gaming area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow without any changes. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 28, the entry of the game ball into the various winning openings will also be expressed as winning. Furthermore, entering the through gate 31 refers to a ball continuing to flow down the gaming area without being ejected from the gaming area after passing through a gate provided in the gaming area. The ball entering the through gate 31 is also referred to as winning a prize, similar to the ball entering the various prize openings.

The upper operating port 25 and the lower operating port 26 are installed in the game board 2 as a unit as an operating port device. The operating ports 25 and 26 are both opened upward to allow game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter, and the upper operating port 25 is disposed upward and the lower operating port 26 is disposed downward. They are arranged vertically in parallel. The lower operating port 26 has an electric accessory 261 as a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a pair of left and right movable pieces.

The electric accessory 261 is connected to an electric accessory drive section 262 mounted on the back side of the game board 2. This electric accessory 261 is set to either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state) by being driven by the electric accessory drive unit 262. The closed state is a state in which the lower operating port 26 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 261 close to each other in the left-right direction. The open state is a state in which the lower operating port 26 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 261 in the left-right direction.

Here, when the electric accessory 261 is set to the closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 261 and the upper operating opening 25 becomes narrower than the width of one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 261 is set to the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 261 and the upper operating opening 25 is wider than one game ball. Therefore, when the electric accessory 261 is set to the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the lower operating port 26, and when it is set to the open state, the game ball cannot enter the lower operating port 26. can.

In addition, instead of the closed state and the open state described above, the electric accessory 261 has two states: a state in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the lower operating port 26 (a state in which game balls can enter the lower operating port 26, unlike the closed state); It may be configured to switch between a state in which a game ball can easily enter the operating port 26 and a state in which it is easy to win a prize. Further, the lower operating port 26 may be configured such that such switching is not performed by the setting of the electric accessory 261 but by displacement of the lower operating port 26. In this case, the lower operating port 26 26 may not include the electric accessory 261.

The variable winning device 27 drives a grand prize opening 271 that opens upward to allow game balls flowing down the gaming area to enter, an opening/closing door 272 for opening/closing the grand prize opening 271, and an opening/closing door 272. It is equipped with a variable prize winning drive section 273.
In addition, the player sets the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 16 to the maximum, hits the ball to the right, and changes the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game balls can be guided to the variable winning device 27 while avoiding the variable display unit 33 and the like.

Here, the game board 2 includes a cover 29 provided to cover the front side of the variable prize winning device 27. This cover 29 includes a transparent panel 291 that is formed to be transparent (or semi-transparent) so that the variable winning device 27 can be viewed from the front side, and an opaque panel that is provided around this transparent panel 291 and is formed to be opaque. panel 292.
Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable prize winning device 27 from the front through the transparent panel 291 and the window section 122.

The big prize opening 271 is provided in an opening formed in the gaming area so as to pass through in the front-rear direction by being router-processed. As described above, this big prize opening 271 is equipped with a detection sensor 304 that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 1 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The opening/closing door 272 is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 2 so as to close the opening of the big prize opening 271. The opening/closing door 272 can be moved forward toward the window panel 123 and protruded from the game board 2 to close the opening of the big prize opening 271, and can be moved back toward the inside of the game board 2 to close the opening of the game board 2. 2, it has an open state in which the opening of the big prize opening 271 is opened.
The variable prize driving unit 273 sets the opening/closing door 272 to either an open state or a closed state by driving the opening/closing door 272.

Specifically, the opening/closing door 272 is normally set in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won. Then, when the player wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode in the internal lottery and shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, the opening/closing door 272 is set to an open state in which a game ball can be won.
Note that the opening/closing execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the opening/closing door 272 is set to an open state and a game ball can enter the big prize opening 271. Furthermore, in the opening/closing execution mode, the period from when the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again is called one round game.

The main display device 32 has a main display section 34 and an accessory display section 35, and displays a plurality of display devices such as a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting parts are arranged in a predetermined manner, and a dot display. arranged and configured.
The main display device 32 is provided on the game board 2 so as to bulge out toward a window panel 123 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 32 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the window panel 123. Further, the distance between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123 is narrower than the distance of one game ball. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 prevents game balls from falling between the main display device 32 and the window panel 123. In other words, the pachinko machine 1 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the main display device 32.

The main display section 34 includes a first result display section 341 for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on winnings in the upper operating port 25, and a first result display section 341 for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on winnings in the lower operating port 26. It also includes a second result display section 342 for displaying the lottery results (see FIG. 4). The main display section 34 may further include a round display section for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening/closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display unit 341 executes a fluctuating display of the symbols using the winning in the upper operating port 25 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the fluctuating display, the internal lottery conducted based on the winning in the upper operating opening 25. Show results. If the result of this internal lottery is a result corresponding to transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the first result display section 341 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 342 executes a fluctuating display of the symbols using the winning in the lower operating port 26 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the fluctuating display, the internal lottery conducted based on the winning in the lower operating port 26. Show results. If the result of this internal lottery is a result corresponding to transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the second result display section 342 displays a predetermined stop result. After that, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

The accessory display unit 35 executes a fluctuating display of symbols using winnings in each through gate 31 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the fluctuating display, an internal lottery conducted based on winnings in each through gate 31 is displayed. Show results. The accessory display unit 35 displays a predetermined stop result when the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to transition to the electric power release state. After that, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the power release state. In this electric accessory open state, the electric accessory 261 provided in the lower operating port 26 is in the open state in a predetermined manner.

In this reference embodiment, the main display section 34 and the accessory display section 35 are configured by segment displays, but are not limited to this, and may include a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, It may also be configured by other types of display devices such as a dot matrix. In addition, the patterns to be variably displayed on the main display section 34 and the accessory display section 35 include a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, and a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed. , or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed.

The variable display unit 33 includes a symbol display device 36 that variably displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a type of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 33 includes a center frame 37 arranged to surround the symbol display device 36. The upper part of the center frame 37 is provided so as to bulge out toward the window panel 123 provided on the front side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 prevents the game balls from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is reduced due to the falling of the game balls. The structure is as follows.

The symbol display device 36 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 36 starts displaying symbols in a variable manner based on a winning in the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. That is, when the symbol display device 36 executes a variable display on the first result display section 341 of the main display section 34 and when executes a variable display on the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, A variable display is executed accordingly.
Note that the symbol display device 36 is not limited to being a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

The center frame 37 includes a first holding lamp part 371 provided in the lower left area of the symbol display device 36, a second holding lamp part 372 provided in the lower right area of the symbol display device 36, and a symbol display. A third holding lamp section 373 provided in the upper region of the device 36 is provided.

The first holding lamp section 371 is a part that displays the number of held game balls that have entered the upper operating port 25, and lights up according to the number of held game balls. This first holding lamp section 371 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display section 341 and the symbol display device 36.
The second holding lamp section 372 is a part that displays the number of held game balls that have entered the lower operation opening 26, and lights up according to the number of held game balls. This second holding lamp section 372 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display section 342 and the symbol display device 36.
The third holding lamp section 373 is a part that displays the number of held game balls that have won in each through gate 31, and lights up according to the number of held game balls. This third holding lamp section 373 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display section 35.
Note that each of the holding lamp sections 371 to 373 may have another configuration, such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 36, which will be described later.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device.
As shown in FIG. 3, the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 is divided into three rows of display areas, and each display area includes, from left to right, a left symbol row Z1, a middle symbol row Z2, and a right symbol row. Column Z3 is displayed. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 has eight types of symbols consisting of numbers "1" to "8" arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and "1" follows "8". It is composed of In addition, in FIG. 3, the center line of each display area is shown by a chain line.

The symbol display device 36 is configured to periodically scroll the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment) based on winnings in the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. By starting the variable display of the symbols, a game repeat effect is executed on the display screen G. The performance for this game cycle is switched from a variable display to a static display in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line L. End with state.
That is, a game round refers to the period from the start of variable display on the main display section 34 and the symbol display device 36 based on winnings to the respective operating ports 25 and 26 until a predetermined stop result is displayed.

Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 36 is not limited to this and is arbitrary. For example, the number of symbol rows, the scrolling direction of each symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols in each symbol row may be a combination of pictures and numbers, or only pictures, instead of numbers only.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine>
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 4, a sound emission control device 5, and a display control device 6, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes a payout control device 46 and a power supply/launch control device 47, and these devices are mounted on the back pack unit. The payout control device 46 executes payout control that causes the above-described payout device 48 to pay out game balls. The power source/launch control device 47 executes launch control to cause the game ball launch mechanism 49 described above to launch game balls.

The main control device 4 includes a main control board 41 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power outage monitoring board 45 that monitors the power supply. Note that the main control device 4 includes a board box that accommodates the main control board 41 and the like. The substrate box may be provided with a marking means that leaves a mark when opened, and may be provided with a marking structure that leaves a mark when opened. Specifically, the trace means includes a configuration in which a board box is constructed by combining multiple case bodies, and a joint part (crimped part) that requires destruction of a predetermined part when each case body is separated, and It is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing seal that leaves traces of peeling by leaving an adhesive layer on the object to be adhered to is pasted across the boundaries between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which adhesive is applied to the boundaries between these case bodies, etc. can be adopted.

The main control board 41 includes an MPU 42 mounted on the main control board 41, and a ROM 43 and a RAM 44 that constitute the MPU 42. Here, the MPU 42 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 43 and the RAM 44, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator are combined into a chip.
In this reference embodiment, the ROM 43 and the RAM 44 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 42, but they may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 4.

The ROM 43 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a nonvolatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain stored information. This ROM 43 has various areas such as a win/fail table storage area 431, a distribution table storage area 432, and a reach table storage area 433. These areas will be explained in detail later.
The RAM 44 is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control program stored in the ROM 43, and is a volatile storage means that requires an external power supply to retain the stored information. It is. This RAM 44 has various areas such as various counter areas 441, a holding ball storage area 442, and an electric role holding area 443. These areas will be explained in detail later.

MPU 42 includes an input port and an output port. An input port of the MPU 42 is connected to a power outage monitoring board 45 provided in the main controller 4 and a plurality of detection sensors 301 to 306. The output port of the MPU 42 is connected to the power outage monitoring board 45, the payout control device 46, and the sound emission control device 5. In addition, the output port of the MPU 42 is connected to an electric accessory drive unit 262 that opens and closes the electric accessory 261 of the lower operation opening 26, a variable winning drive unit 273 that opens and closes the opening/closing door 272 of the variable winning device 27, and a main display. section 34 and an accessory display section 35.

Note that the main control board 41 has a driver circuit. The MPU 42 executes drive control of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric accessory open state, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 262 to open and close the electric accessory 261. In addition, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 42 executes drive control of the variable winning a prize driving section 273 to open and close the big winning a prize opening 271. Further, in each game round, the MPU 42 executes display control of the main display section 34 to display the results of the internal lottery conducted based on winnings to the respective operating ports 25 and 26. Furthermore, the MPU 42 executes display control of the accessory display section 35 to display the results of the internal lottery conducted based on winnings in each through gate 31.

The power outage monitoring board 45 relays between the main control board 41 and the power supply/launch control device 47 that has the function of supplying operating power, and monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage output from the power supply/launch control device 47. . Therefore, the MPU 42 receives power via the power outage monitoring board 45.
The detection sensors 301 to 306 correspond one-to-one to the general winning opening 24, the upper operating opening 25, the lower operating opening 26, and various winning openings of the variable winning device 27, the out opening 28, and each through gate 31. It is provided. The MPU 42 performs winning determination (ball entry determination) into various winning openings, out opening 28, and each through gate 31 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 301 to 306. Note that the MPU 42 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination at the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26.

The payout control device 46 executes payout control that causes the payout device 48 to pay out prize balls and rental balls (gaming balls lent to players during games) based on commands (control instructions) transmitted from the main control device 4. do.

The power source/launch control device 47 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. The power supply/launch control device 47 generates the necessary operating power for the main control board 41, the payout control device 46, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and also operates the generated power. Supply electricity. Note that the power supply/launch control device 47 includes a power supply section for use during power outage, such as a backup capacitor. This power supply section for power outage supplies power for memory retention to the RAM 44 of the main control device 4 even in the event of a power outage in which the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Further, the power supply/launch control device 47 executes firing control to cause the game ball firing mechanism 49 to fire the game balls. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 49 includes a launch rail that extends toward the guide rail 23 of the game board 2, a ball feeding device that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 141 onto the launch rail, and a ball feeder that supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 141 onto the launch rail. The solenoid is an electric actuator that fires the game balls supplied to the guide rail 23 toward the guide rail 23. The power source/launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal (launch permission signal) to this solenoid to cause the game ball to be fired when predetermined firing conditions are met.

<Electrical configuration for executing internal lottery in MPU of main controller>
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used in the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 5, the MPU 42 executes an internal lottery by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 42 uses a jackpot random number counter C1 for a lottery when a jackpot occurs, and when a jackpot occurs, uses a jackpot type counter C2 for a lottery for the type of jackpot, and draws a lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display. The reach random number counter C3 is used. Further, the MPU 42 uses the random number initial value counter CINI to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the fluctuation type counter CS to determine the display duration time on the main display section 34 and the symbol display device 36. Furthermore, the MPU 42 uses the electric accessory release counter C4 for a lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 261 of the lower operating port 26 should be brought into the electric role release state. Note that the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 441 (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 44.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated regularly, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 44 at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. The information is stored in a reserved ball storage area 442 (see FIG. 4) provided as an acquired information storage means. In addition, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is stored in the electric prize holding area 443 (see FIG. 4) of the RAM 44 at the timing when a game ball enters each through gate 31. be done.

The holding ball storage area 442 includes a holding area Ra for the first result display section, a holding area Rb for the second result display section, and an execution area AE.

The first result display holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 42 sets each value set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as pending information in each area Ra1 to Ra4 in chronological order according to the winning of the game ball to the upper operation opening 25. I will store it. Specifically, when winnings to the upper operating port 25 occur multiple times in succession, the MPU 42 stores the reservation information in the order of first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth area Ra4. Stored in chronological order.

As described above, since the first result display holding area Ra includes four storage areas, up to four game balls can be held in the upper operating port 25. Further, the first result display section reservation area Ra includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4.
Note that the number of items to be held in the upper operating port 25 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, or may be singular. You can.

The second result display holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 42 sets the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as pending information in each area Rb1 to Rb4 in chronological order according to the winning of the game ball to the lower operation opening 26. I will store it. Specifically, when winnings to the lower operating port 26 occur multiple times in succession, the MPU 42 stores the reservation information in the order of first area Rb1 → second area Rb2 → third area Rb3 → fourth area Rb4. Stored in chronological order.

In this way, since the second result display section holding area Rb includes four storage areas, the winning of game balls to the lower operating port 26 can be held up to a maximum of four. Further, the second result display section reservation area Rb includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4.
It should be noted that the number of items to be held in the lower operating port 26 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be any other number such as 2, 3, or 5 or more, or may be a single number. You can.

When starting the variable display of each result display section 341, 342, the execution area AE stores pending information stored in the storage area of the first result display section holding area Ra or the second result display section holding area Rb. This is an area for moving.

The electric role holding area 443 includes four storage areas similarly to the holding area Ra for the first result display section and the holding area Rb for the second result display section. Therefore, the winning of game balls to each through gate 31 is suspended up to a maximum of four.
Note that the number of reservations related to each through gate 31 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more, and may not be singular. You can.

<Detailed explanation of each counter>
The details of each counter will be explained below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be explained. For example, the electric accessory release counter C4 becomes a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 250. ing.
The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the electric role holding area 443 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when a game ball enters each through gate 31. Ru.
Then, based on the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 443, the MPU 42 selects a lottery (electric role opening) as to whether or not the electric accessory 261 of the lower operating port 26 is to be brought into the electric role release state. Execute the property opening lottery).

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of support modes in which the frequency with which a game ball can be won into the lower operation opening 26 is different from each other by setting the electric accessory 261 to an open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 261 to the open state is relatively low, and a low frequency support mode (low frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 261 to the open state is relatively low. It has a relatively high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

In the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric role opening lottery is the same (for example, both are 4/5). However, compared to the low-frequency support mode, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 261 is set to the open state when the electric role open state is won is greater, and the electric accessory 261 is set to the open state. The opening time for each time is also getting longer. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electric accessory 261 to the closed state between each opening in one electric utility open state is shorter than the one opening time. Furthermore, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode has a minimum amount of time secured as the waiting time between the end of the electric accessory lottery and the next electric accessory lottery. The duration of one fluctuating display on the object display section 35 has become shorter.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the game ball is more likely to win a prize in the lower operation opening 26 than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low-frequency support mode, the player sets the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 16 to a medium level and hits the game ball to the left, and the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed so that the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is By shifting from the side to the center, the probability of winning a prize in the upper operating port 25 can be made higher than in the lower operating port 26. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, the player sets the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 16 to the maximum, hits the ball to the right, and moves the arrival position of the game ball at the top of the game area to the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 23 is formed. By shifting from one side to the opposite side, the probability of winning a prize in the lower operating port 26 can be made higher than in the upper operating port 25.
Then, when it is detected that a prize has entered the lower operating port 26, a predetermined number of prize balls will be paid out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of game balls too much. It can be carried out.

As described above, in this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 uses the left-handed hitting route (the left-handed route) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the upper operating port 25 and less likely to cause game balls to enter the lower operating port 26. 1 route) and a right-handed hitting route (second route) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the lower operating port 26 and less likely to cause the game ball to enter the upper operating port 25. There is.

Note that the configurations of the low-frequency support mode and high-frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role opening state in the electric role-playing object opening lottery compared to the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, for example, multiple types of secured time may be prepared, and the high-frequency support mode may be configured so that it is easier to select a short secured time compared to the low-frequency support mode, and the average of the selected secured times may be It may be configured to shorten. Furthermore, by combining the conditions of the number of times the electric accessory 261 is set to the open state, the opening time, and the secured time, the high-frequency support mode can change the frequency of setting the electric accessory 261 to the open state to the low-frequency support mode. It may be configured to be relatively high compared to .

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 599. . Moreover, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every time it loops once. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 similarly to the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is transferred to the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. is stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display section of the RAM 44 at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 25, and when the gaming ball enters the lower operating port 26. The result is stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb of the RAM 44 at the appropriate timing.
Then, the MPU 42 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery (win/fail lottery) based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a win/fail table that stores values of random numbers for winning a jackpot.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the random number value for winning the jackpot is stored in a win/fail table in the win/fail table storage area 431 (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 43 provided as a win/fail information group storage means, as shown in FIG. (Acceptance information group).

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has two winning/failure lottery modes: a low probability mode (low probability state) in which it is difficult to win the jackpot occurrence and a high probability mode (high probability state) in which it is easy to win the jackpot occurrence. . In addition, the success/failure tables include the low probability mode win/fail table (low probability win/fail information group) shown in FIG. 6(a), and the high probability mode win/fail table (high probability win/fail information group) shown in FIG. 6(b). group).
The MPU 42 performs a jackpot lottery by comparing these win/fail tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

These win/fail tables have lottery results (win/fail results) of a plurality of jackpot occurrences, such as "big hit win,""special loser result," and "normal loser result."
Specifically, under the gaming state in which the winning/failure table for the low probability mode is referred to when drawing a lottery to generate a jackpot, as shown in FIG. It is.
On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the high-probability mode win/fail table is referred to when drawing a lottery to generate a jackpot, the number of random numbers that result in a "jackpot win" is 21, as shown in Figure 6(b). It is. Here, the value of the random number that results in a jackpot win stored in the win/fail table for the low probability mode is included in the value of the random number that results in a "big win" stored in the win/fail table for the high probability mode.

Note that the value and number of random numbers stored in each win/fail table are arbitrary, and it is sufficient that the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a "big hit" than the low probability mode. In addition, the random number values that result in a "jackpot win" stored in the high probability mode win/fail table do not include the random number values that result in a "jackpot win" stored in the low probability mode win/fail table. It may also include a part of the random number value that is a "big hit" stored in the win/fail table for the low probability mode.

Further, in each win/fail lottery mode, if the random number value does not result in a "big hit", the result is a loss without winning the jackpot.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of winning results: "special winning results (small winning results)" and "normal winning results." These lose results have in common that they do not trigger a transition to the win/fail lottery mode or the support mode. However, the difference is that the "special failure result" is a trigger for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, whereas the "normal failure result" is not a trigger for transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. For example, the jackpot type counter C2 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 29. .
The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and the updated value is transferred to the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. is stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display part of the RAM 44 at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 25, and when the gaming ball enters the lower operating port 26. The result is stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb of the RAM 44 at the appropriate timing.
Then, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442, the MPU 42 executes a lottery (allocation lottery) for the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a distribution table that stores random number values related to distribution destinations of jackpot types.
As shown in FIG. 7, the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the type of jackpot is stored in the distribution table (distribution table) in the distribution table storage area 432 (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 43 provided as distribution information group storage means. information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 7(a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 7(b). ing.
The MPU 42 performs a jackpot type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

The first distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the holding area Ra for the first result display section to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning in the upper operation opening 25. This table is referred to when performing a jackpot type lottery.
The first distribution table, as shown in FIG. ), ``Explicit low round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to small round)'', and ``Most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability)'' are the allocation destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 14" are distributed to "unspecified low results". ``15-19'' are categorized as ``highly certain round results'', ``15-19'' are categorized as ``clearly low round high-certain results,'' and ``20-29'' are categorized as ``most favorable results.''

The second distribution table is based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been shifted from the second result display holding area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on winnings to the lower operation opening 26. This is a table that is referred to when performing a jackpot type lottery.
As shown in FIG. 7(b), the second distribution table has two distribution results, "low probability result" and "most advantageous result", as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" are distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 29" are distributed to "most advantageous results". ”.

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends (2) Support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends (3) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 27 in the opening/closing execution mode

First, the difference in the winning/failure lottery mode (1) will be explained.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the winning/losing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning/losing lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This low probability mode continues at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.
"Highly accurate result of few unspecified rounds", "Highly certain result of few explicitly stated rounds", and "Most advantageous result" have a high probability of winning lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the winning lottery mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This is the distribution result set in the mode. This high probability mode continues at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

Next, the difference in support modes (2) will be explained.
The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode shifts to a low-frequency support mode when the number of games played reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times).

The "highly accurate result of a small number of unspecified rounds" is a distribution result that maintains the support mode as it was before the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the win/fail lottery.
The "highly accurate result with few rounds" and the "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, regardless of the support mode before the opening/closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

Note that the difference in the manner of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 27 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 238. .
The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 of the RAM 44 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. is stored in Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display section of the RAM 44 at the timing when a game ball enters the upper operating port 25, and when the gaming ball enters the lower operating port 26. The result is stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb of the RAM 44 at the appropriate timing.
Then, the MPU 42 executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach display (a reach occurrence lottery) based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when a winning lottery results in a ``normal result'' without a ``big hit winning'' result.
Specifically, the MPU 42 uses the reach table and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442 when the winning lottery results in a "normal loss result" without a "big hit win". By comparing the above, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a reach display, and when it is decided to generate a reach display in this lottery, a reach display is generated. The reach table is a table that stores random number values related to the occurrence of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area 433 (see FIG. 4) of the ROM 43.

Here, if the winning lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution lottery results in the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 36 displays the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. A combination of symbols having numbers of is stopped and displayed on the active line L. In addition, if the winning lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution lottery results in a "low-probability result," the symbol display device 36 displays a combination of symbols having the same even number as a stop result. is stopped and displayed on the effective line L. In addition, if you win a jackpot in a lottery and are sorted into a ``non-disclosed small round high probability result'' or ``a clear small round high probability result'' in a distribution lottery, or if you win a ``big hit'' in a lottery. If the result is a "special winning result" without any difference, the symbol display device 36 selects as a stop result not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a "normal winning result" in the lottery. A combination of special symbols having mutually different numbers (for example, "3, 4, 1") that will never be displayed is stopped and displayed on the active line L.

Reach display is when a combination of symbols with the same number is finally displayed in a fixed manner (a ``big hit'' in a winning/failure lottery, which is sorted into a ``most advantageous result'' or a ``low probability result'' in a distribution lottery). ), this occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display can be used when a special combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed (when it becomes a "big hit" in the winning/failure lottery, and "non-disclosed low round high accuracy result" or "explicit low round high result" in the distribution lottery. In the case where the winning result is sorted into a "certain result" or when the winning lottery results in a "special losing result" without becoming a "big hit winning"), it does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The reach display mode is such that some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 (for example, symbol row Z1 and symbol row Z3) are placed on the active line L. By displaying the symbols in a stopped state, a combination of the same symbols is displayed to suggest a stopping result, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows (for example, symbol row Z2) are displayed in a variable manner.
Therefore, by generating the reach display, the pachinko machine 1 generates a "big hit" in the winning lottery after the variable display starts on the symbol display device 36 and before displaying the predetermined stop result. It is possible to make the players expect that they have been sorted into the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" in the sorting lottery.

Note that the mode of reach display is not limited to this, and some symbol rows may be stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol rows may be displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image in the background. Alternatively, predetermined characters or the like may be displayed on substantially the entire display screen G as a moving image after each symbol row is displayed in a reduced size or hidden.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has an expected performance as a type of variable display on the symbol display device 36. The expected performance is such that after the variable display starts on the symbol display device 36, but before the predetermined stop result is displayed, the player is made to expect that he or she has won the jackpot in the lottery. Refers to performance. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of expected performances: the above-mentioned reach display and a preview display.

The preview display will be displayed in the event that you win a jackpot in a lottery, or if you do not win a jackpot in a lottery and get a special negative result, you will not win a jackpot in a lottery. This is an expected performance that makes the performance more likely to occur than in the case of an ``out-of-normal result''. Instead of making effects more likely to occur, this preview display may make it easier to select effects with a low appearance rate, or a combination of these may be used.
It should be noted that while the lottery to decide whether to generate the reach display was executed by the main control device 4, the lottery to decide whether to generate the preview display or not is executed by the audio light emission control device 5. .

The mode of advance notice display is a partial symbol row (for example, all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner among a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36). In a situation where the symbol row Z1) is stopped and displayed on the active line L and multiple symbol rows (for example, symbol rows Z2 and Z3) are displayed in a variable manner, or a reach display is generated, a predetermined character etc. is displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This preview display occurs both when the reach display occurs and when the reach display does not occur, but it is set so that it occurs more often when the reach display occurs than when the reach display does not occur. has been done.
Note that the preview display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed and the form of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed and displayed.

Finally, the variation type counter CS will be explained. For example, the variation type counter CS is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value of 198. .
The variation type counter CS is updated at least once each time normal processing is executed, which will be described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time it is updated.
Then, the MPU 42 determines the symbol display duration time on the main display section 34 and the symbol display duration time on the symbol display device 36 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. Note that these display duration times will be explained in detail later.

<About various processes executed by the main controller>
The MPU 42 of the main control device 4 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing that advance the game, and main processing that is activated upon power-on. Hereinafter, timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be explained in order.
Note that, in addition to timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, the MPU 42 executes NMI interrupt processing that is activated by inputting a power outage signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but a description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 42 periodically executes steps S101 to S105 (for example, every 2 msec), as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 42 executes a process of reading the plurality of detection sensors 301 to 306. In this reading process, the MPU 42 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 301 to 306, determines the states, and stores the results in the RAM 44 as winning detection information. When the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensors 301 to 304 corresponding to the various winning holes have detected winning of game balls, the MPU 42 sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of prize balls, and The command is sent to the payout control device 46. For example, when the MPU 42 determines that the detection sensor 304 corresponding to the variable winning device 27 has detected winning of game balls, the MPU 42 issues a prize ball command for instructing a specific unit number of 15 prize balls. is transmitted to the payout control device 46.
Note that the payout control device 46 performs payout control to cause the payout device 48 to execute payout of prize balls based on the prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 42.

In step S102, the MPU 42 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. do. Note that, if the maximum value has been reached when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the MPU 42 returns the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it.

In step S103, the MPU 42 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 adds 1 to the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, respectively, and updates them. The latter value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. Note that if the MPU 42 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of each counter C1 to C4, the MPU 42 returns the value of each counter C1 to C4 to 0 and clears it.

In step S104, the MPU 42 executes a through winning process. In this winning process for through, if the detection sensor 306 corresponding to each through gate 31 detects the winning of the game ball, the MPU 42 sets the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103. The value of is stored in the power reserve area 443. Further, the MPU 42 sets a command for lighting the third hold lamp section 373 and transmits the set command to the audio light emission control device 5.
Note that the audio emission control device 5 turns on the third hold lamp section 373 based on a command transmitted from the MPU 42. Further, the number of game balls that have won in each through gate 31 can be held at a maximum of four, as described above, and the third holding lamp section 373 lights up in a number corresponding to this number of held game balls.

In step S105, the MPU 42 executes the winning process for the operating port.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the operating port will be explained in detail.

<Winning process for actuation port>
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the operating port.
In the winning process for the operating opening, the MPU 42 executes steps S201 to S208, as shown in FIG.

In step S201, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the upper operating port 25 (starting winning) by determining whether or not the detection sensor 302 corresponding to the upper operating port 25 has detected a winning of a game ball. Determine whether When the MPU 42 determines in step S201 that a game ball has entered the upper operating port 25, in step S202, the MPU 42 grasps the number of pending balls stored in the first result display holding area Ra, and displays the pending number. The number is set as the first start hold storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the hold area Ra for the first result display section. After that, the MPU 42 executes the processing from step S205 onwards.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S201 that no game ball has won in the upper operating port 25, in step S203, the detection sensor 303 corresponding to the lower operating port 26 detects that the game ball has entered the prize. By determining whether or not is detected, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the lower operation opening 26.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S203 that no game ball has won in the lower operating port 26, it ends the winning process for the operating port. Furthermore, when it is determined in step S203 that a game ball has entered the lower operating port 26, the MPU 42 grasps the number of reserved balls stored in the second result display reservation area Rb in step S204, The number of pending items is set as the second starting pending storage number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the second result display section holding area Rb. After that, the MPU 42 executes the processing from step S205 onwards.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 42 determines in step S205 that the start hold memory number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this reference embodiment). Determine whether it exists or not.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S205 that the start pending memory number N is not less than the upper limit value, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the actuation port. Furthermore, if the MPU 42 determines in step S205 that the number N of start pending memories is less than the upper limit value, the MPU 42 updates the start pending memory number N by adding 1 to the value in step S206.

In step S207, the MPU 42 stores the set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process out of the free storage area of the result display section holding area. The suspension information is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start suspension storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the first start pending memory number RaN is set in step S202, the MPU 42 sets each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. The set of values is stored as pending information in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first result display section holding area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when the MPU 42 sets the first start pending memory number RaN to "3" in step S202, the MPU 42 sets the memory area corresponding to "4" of the first start pending memory number RaN updated in step S206. Pending information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

For example, when the MPU 42 sets the second start pending storage number RbN in step S204, the MPU 42 sets the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. A set of each value is stored as pending information in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second result display section holding area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start pending storage number RbN updated in step S206. do. For example, when the MPU 42 sets the second start pending memory number RbN to "3" in step S204, the MPU 42 sets the memory area corresponding to "4" of the second start pending memory number RbN updated in step S206. Pending information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

In step S208, when the first start pending storage number RaN is set in step S202, the MPU 42 sets the number of pending storage numbers RaN to recognize that the pending information has been stored in the storage area of the first result display section holding area Ra. A first hold generation command is set, and the set first hold generation command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 5. After that, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the actuation port.
This first hold generation command is used to make the audio emission control device 5 recognize that the hold information has been stored in the storage area of the first result display holding area Ra based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 25. Contains information on. Further, the first suspension generation command includes information regarding the current support mode.
Note that the audio emission control device 5 executes predetermined processing in addition to lighting the first hold lamp section 371 based on the first hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42 . This process will be explained in detail later. Further, the number of game balls that have won in the upper operation opening 25 can be held at a maximum of four, as described above, and the first holding lamp section 371 lights up by the number corresponding to this number of held game balls.

Furthermore, in step S208, when the second start pending storage number RbN is set in step S204, the MPU 42 causes the MPU 42 to recognize that the pending information has been stored in the storage area of the second result display section holding area Rb. A second hold generation command is set, and the set second hold generation command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 5. After that, the MPU 42 ends the winning process for the actuation port.
This second hold generation command is used to make the audio emission control device 5 recognize that the hold information has been stored in the storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display section based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 26. Contains information on. Further, the second suspension generation command includes information regarding the current support mode.
Note that the audio emission control device 5 not only turns on the second hold lamp section 372 but also executes predetermined processing based on the second hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42 . This process will be explained in detail later. Further, the number of game balls that have been won in the lower operation opening 26 can be held at a maximum of 4, as described above, and the second holding lamp section 372 is lit by the number corresponding to this number of held game balls.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 42 executes a main process, which will be described later, which is activated when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process, which is a main process for advancing the game. In this normal processing, the MPU 42 executes steps S301 to S314, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 42 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 at a 4 msec cycle, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when the remaining time occurs, and executes steps S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Execute.

In step S301, the MPU 42 executes a timer interrupt process, a prize winning process for the operating port, or an external output process for transmitting the command set in the previous normal process to each sub-side control device. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a prize ball command has been set, and if it is determined that a prize ball command has been set, the MPU 42 transmits the prize ball command to the payout control device 46. Send. Further, for example, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a command for performance, such as a command corresponding to a performance for a game round or a command corresponding to a performance for an opening/closing execution mode, is set, and the command for performance is set. If it is determined that it has been set, a command for the effect is sent to the audio emission control device 5.

In step S302, the MPU 42 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 42 updates the previous value of the variation type counter CS by adding 1, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 44. . Note that if the MPU 42 has reached the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the MPU 42 returns the value of the variation type counter CS to 0 and clears it.

In step S303, the MPU 42 executes a game round control process for advancing the game round. In the game round control process, the MPU 42 executes a win/fail lottery and a distribution lottery, determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 36, and determines information related to the symbols to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 34. Decide on information related to etc.
In step S304, the MPU 42 executes a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state. In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 42 executes transition processing to each gaming state such as opening/closing execution mode, high probability mode, and high frequency support mode.
Note that the gaming cycle control process in step S303 and the gaming state transition process in step S304 will be explained in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 42 executes a demonstration display execution determination process. In this demonstration display execution determination process, the MPU 42 determines whether a predetermined start waiting period for starting a demonstration (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. However, if it is determined that the start waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is set. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the demo command set in step S305 to the audio emission control device 5.
Note that the audio emission control device 5 starts the demonstration display execution process based on the demonstration command transmitted from the MPU 42.

Here, the MPU 42 determines whether the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 30 seconds and the interval at which the process of step S305 is repeatedly executed is 4 msec, the MPU 42 counts the number of executions of the process of step S305 and when it reaches 7500 times, the start waiting period starts. It is determined that the period has passed. Note that the configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary; for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock. Furthermore, if a new game round is started while counting the number of executions of the process in step S305, the MPU 42 resets the count value.

In step S<b>306 , the MPU 42 executes an electric support process for controlling the drive of the electric accessory 261 provided in the lower operating port 26 . In this electric role support process, the MPU 42 executes an electric role item opening lottery based on the value of the electric role item opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 443 of the RAM 44, and also performs an electric role game opening lottery. In the case of winning, opening/closing processing of the electric accessory 261 is executed. Furthermore, the MPU 42 executes display control of the accessory display unit 35 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 42 executes a game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 42 causes the power source/launch control device 47 to execute launch control to launch the game ball based on the player's rotational operation of the launch handle 16. Specifically, the power supply/launch control device 47 causes the game ball firing mechanism 49 to fire the game ball by energizing the solenoid of the game ball firing mechanism 49 at a predetermined period (0.6 seconds in this reference form). . Note that the solenoid is energized so as to fire the game ball with a firing intensity that corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 16. Further, the power supply/launch control device 47 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball firing mechanism 49 to fire the game ball when predetermined firing conditions are met.

In step S308, the MPU 42 determines whether a power outage flag is set in a power outage flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 44. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 44 by inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring board 45 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 42. The power outage monitoring board 45 outputs this power outage signal when it is confirmed that a power outage has occurred. Note that this power outage flag is cleared when the next main process is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 sets various flags by assigning 1 to a predetermined area such as the RAM 44, and clears the various flags by assigning 0. For example, the pachinko machine 1 sets the power outage flag by assigning 1 to the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 44, and clears the power outage flag by assigning 0 to the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S308 that the power outage flag is set, it executes the power outage processing from step S312 onwards, without executing the processing from step S309 onwards. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 42 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 42 calculates and stores a RAM judgment value (checksum of the RAM 44). In step S314, the MPU 42 prohibits access to the RAM 44. Thereafter, the MPU 42 continues an infinite loop until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S308 that the power outage flag is not set, the MPU 42 determines in step S309 whether or not it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, the current normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this reference form) has elapsed since the start.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S309 that it is not time to execute the next normal process, that is, if the remaining time has occurred, the MPU 42 updates the random number initial value counter CINI in step S310, and updates the random number initial value counter CINI in step S311. At , the variation type counter CS is updated. Note that the MPU 42 repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 until it determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S309 that it is time to execute the next normal process, that is, if there is no remaining time, the MPU 42 executes step S301 again to perform the next normal process. Start normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing.
In the main process, the MPU 42 executes steps S401 to S412, as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 42 executes startup processing upon power-on. In this start-up process, the MPU 42 waits for a predetermined period of time (for example, about 500 msec) after the power is turned on in order to wait for the sub-side control board (such as the control board of the audio emission control device 5) to become operational. ) has elapsed.

In step S402, the MPU 42 determines whether the permission prohibition period of 1 sec has elapsed. If the MPU 42 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has not elapsed, it repeatedly executes the process in step S402. Furthermore, when the MPU 42 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, it executes the processes from step S403 onwards.

Here, the MPU 42 determines whether 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, if the interval at which the process in step S402 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 42 counts the number of times the process in step S402 is executed and determines that 1 sec has passed when the count reaches 10,000 times. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission/prohibition period is arbitrary; for example, the permission/prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, the MPU 42 allows access to the RAM 44.
In step S404, the MPU 42 determines whether a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power supply/launch control device 47 is turned on.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is turned on, it executes the processes from step S409 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, it determines in step S405 whether or not a power outage flag is set in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 44. do.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S405 that the power outage flag is not set, it executes the processes from step S409 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S405 that the power outage flag is set, it calculates a RAM determination value in step S406.
In step S407, the MPU 42 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 44 by determining whether the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 42 compares the RAM judgment value calculated in step S406 with the RAM judgment value saved in step S313 (power outage processing) of normal processing, and if they match, , it is determined that the RAM determination value is normal, and if they do not match, it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal, it executes the processes from step S409 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407, it clears the power outage flag stored in the power outage flag storage area of the RAM 44 in step S408.

Note that the validity of the data stored in the RAM 44 may be determined by a method different from the method of confirming the consistency of the RAM judgment value. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 44 may be confirmed by determining in the main process whether this keyword has been written normally.

As described above, if the MPU 42 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is turned on, if it determines in step S405 that the power outage flag is not set, or in step S407, the MPU 42 erases the RAM determination value. If it is determined that this is not normal, the processes from step S409 onwards are executed.
Specifically, the MPU 42 clears the work area of the RAM 44 in step S409, and initializes the RAM 44 in step S410.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the gaming parlor can initialize the data stored in the RAM 44 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the RAM erase switch when the gaming parlor starts business. Further, the pachinko machine 1 initializes the data stored in the RAM 44 when the occurrence of a power outage is not confirmed on the power outage monitoring board 45 or when the RAM judgment value is abnormal.

After executing the process in step S408 or step S410, the MPU 42 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (control board of the audio emission control device 5, etc.) in step S411, and in step S412, sends a timer interrupt Allow the process to occur and proceed to the normal process described above.
Note that by receiving the initial command sent in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 41 is being performed normally, and executes its own initialization. do.

<Game time control processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game time control process.
In the game time control process, the MPU 42 executes steps S501 to S509, as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. When the MPU 42 determines in step S501 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 42 ends the game cycle control process without executing the processes after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 42 does not start the game round regardless of whether winning of a game ball into each operating port 25, 26 is detected.
Note that the MPU 42 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress by referring to the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 44 . The same applies to each of the following processes. The MPU 42 sets the opening/closing execution mode flag when transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode, and clears the opening/closing execution mode flag when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that the MPU 42 is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 42 determines in step S502 whether or not the main display section 34 is in the variable display mode, that is, whether the game round is in progress. Determine whether or not.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S502 that the main display section 34 is not in the variable display mode, it executes the game round start processing in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S502 that the main display section 34 is displaying a variable display, it executes the game progress processing of steps S506 to S509.

First, the processing for starting the game round in steps S503 to S505 will be explained.
In step S503, the MPU 42 grasps the number of pending items stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display section and the number of pending items stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display section, and sets these pending numbers. It is determined whether the total number CRN is less than or equal to "0". If the MPU 42 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is less than or equal to "0", the MPU 42 ends the game time control process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less, in step S504, the MPU 42 selects the first result display section holding area Ra or the second result display section holding area Ra. A data setting process is executed to set the hold information stored in Rb for use in playing the game. After that, in step S505, the MPU 42 executes a variation start process for starting a variable display on the main display section 34 and the symbol display device 36 to complete the game cycle, and ends the game cycle control process.
The data setting process in step S504 and the variation start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of data setting processing.
In the data setting process, the MPU 42 executes steps S601 to S611, as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the second start pending storage number RbN of the second result display section holding area Rb set in step S204 of the winning process for the actuation opening is "0" or less. do. If the MPU 42 determines in step S601 that the second start pending memory number RbN is "0" or less, it executes the data setting process for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606, and returns to step S601. If it is determined that the second start pending storage number RbN is not less than "0", data setting processing for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

In this way, the data setting process includes a data setting process for the first result display section that sets the reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section for use in a game round, and a data setting process for the second result display section. and a data setting process for the second result display section that sets the reservation information stored in the storage reservation area Rb for use in the game round.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the MPU 42 displays the second result display section without executing the data setting process for the first result display section. Execute the data setting process for In other words, when the MPU 42 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb based on the winning of a game ball to the lower operation port 26, the MPU 42 determines that there is reservation information stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb. Based on the winning of the game ball, the reservation information stored in the reservation area Rb for the second result display section is played preferentially regardless of whether there is reservation information stored in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section. Set for one-time digestion.

First, the data setting process for the first result display section in steps S602 to S606 will be explained.
In step S602, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start pending storage number RaN of the first result display section holding area Ra to update it.
In step S603, the MPU 42 moves the reservation information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display section reservation area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 42 executes a data shift process to shift the reservation information stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the pending information stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 42 shifts the reservation information in the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the reservation information in the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the reservation information in the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra1. Shift to area Ra3.

In step S605, the MPU 42 clears the second result display section flag stored in the RAM 44. This second result display section flag is a flag for specifying which of the main display sections 34 of the first result display section 341 and the second result display section 342 starts variable display when a game round is completed. It is. In this step S605, the MPU 42 clears the second result display section flag, so when the game round ends, a variable display is displayed on the first result display section 341 based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 25. This indicates that the

In step S606, the MPU 42 sets a first shift command to recognize that the pending information has been shifted. After that, the MPU 42 ends the data setting process. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the first shift command set in step S606 to the audio emission control device 5. This command at the time of the first shift is based on the winning of a game ball to the upper operating port 25, and emits a sound to indicate that the shift of the pending information has been executed for the pending information stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display section. It includes information for the control device 5 to recognize.
Note that the audio emission control device 5 executes predetermined processing in addition to changing the lighting state of the first hold lamp section 371 based on the first shift command transmitted from the MPU 42. This process will be explained in detail later. Specifically, the sound emission control device 5 decreases the number of lit game balls of the first holding lamp section 371 as the number of game balls that are held in the upper operating port 25 decreases.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display section in steps S607 to S611 will be explained.
In step S607, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start pending storage number RbN in the second result display section pending area Rb to update it.
In step S608, the MPU 42 moves the reservation information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display section reservation area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 42 executes a data shift process to shift the reservation information stored in the storage area of the second result display section reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reservation information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 42 shifts the reservation information in the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the reservation information in the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the reservation information in the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb2. Shift to area Rb3.

In step S610, the MPU 42 sets a second result display section flag in the RAM 44. In this step S610, the MPU 42 sets the second result display section flag, so when the game round ends, a variable display is displayed on the second result display section 342 based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 26. This indicates that the

In step S611, the MPU 42 sets a second shift command to recognize that the pending information has been shifted. After that, the MPU 42 ends the data setting process. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the second shift command set in step S611 to the audio emission control device 5. This command at the time of the second shift is a sound emission that indicates that the shift of the pending information has been executed for the pending information stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display section based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating port 26. It includes information for the control device 5 to recognize.
Note that the audio emission control device 5 executes predetermined processing in addition to changing the lighting state of the second hold lamp section 372 based on the second shift command transmitted from the MPU 42. This process will be explained in detail later. Specifically, the sound emission control device 5 decreases the number of lit game balls in the second holding lamp section 372 as the number of game balls held in the lower operating port 26 decreases.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In the variation start process, the MPU 42 executes steps S701 to S718, as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S701 that the win/fail lottery mode is not the high probability mode, the MPU 42 stores the win/fail table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 6(a)) from the win/fail table storage area 431 of the ROM 43 in step S702. If it is determined in step S701 that the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode, the win/fail table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 6(b)) is read out from the win/fail table storage area 431 of the ROM 43 in step S703. read out.

After executing the process in step S702 or step S703, the MPU 42 executes a validity determination process in step S704. In this win/fail determination process, the MPU 42 determines the result of the win/fail lottery (win/fail result) by comparing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the win/fail table read out in step S702 or step S703. Determine. As mentioned above, the winning/failure result is one of "jackpot winning", "special winning result", and "normal winning result", and even if the winning/failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, it is not the high probability mode. The same applies.

In step S705, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the result determined in step S704 is a "big hit win." If the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the result is a "big hit", it executes the processes from step S706 onwards, and if it determines in step S705 that the result is not a "big hit", it executes the process. , executes the processing from step S712 onwards.

First, the process (processing after step S706) when the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the win/fail result is a "big hit win" will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 42 determines whether the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S706 that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 44, it starts a variable display on the first result display section 341 based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 25. Therefore, in step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 7(a)) is read from the distribution table storage area 432 of the ROM 43.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 44 in step S706, the second result display section 342 based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 26 Since this indicates that the variable display is to be started in step S708, the second distribution table (see FIG. 7(b)) is read from the distribution table storage area 432 of the ROM 43.

After executing the process in step S707 or step S708, the MPU 42 executes a distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 42 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708, thereby determining the result of the distribution lottery ( Judging the distribution result).

In step S710, the MPU 42 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In this stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 42 determines in step S709 the information related to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34. It is determined according to the distribution result, and the determined information is stored in the RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 34 by comparing the distribution result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for jackpot results stored in advance in the ROM 43. Determine such information. This stop result table for jackpot results defines the mode of the picture to be stopped and displayed on the main display section 34 in a different manner for each sorting result.

In step S711, the MPU 42 sets a flag in the RAM 44 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 42 specifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", it sets a low probability result flag and specifies that it is a "high probability result for an undisclosed small round". In this case, set the unstated low round high probability result flag, and if it is specified that it is an "explicit low round high probability result", set the explicit low round high probability result flag, and select the "best result". If it is determined that this is the case, the most advantageous result flag is set. After that, the MPU 42 executes the processing from step S716 onwards.
In addition, in each of the following processes, the MPU 42 executes the determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, a process (processing after step S712) when the MPU 42 determines in step S705 that the win/fail result is not a "big hit win" will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 42 determines whether the success or failure result determined in step S704 is a "special failure result."
If the MPU 42 determines in step S712 that the pass/fail result is a "specially unsuccessful result", the MPU 42 executes the processes from step S713 onwards, and if it determines in step S712 that the pass/fail result is not a "special fail result" In this case, the process from step S715 onwards is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 42 executes a stop result setting process for a special failure result. In this stop result setting process for special missing results, the MPU 42 determines information related to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines the information related to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 34 by referring to the stop result table for the special winning result stored in advance in the ROM 43. The pattern of the symbols set in the stop result table for the special winning result is different from the pattern of the symbols set in the stop result table for the jackpot result.
In step S714, the MPU 42 sets a special failure flag in the RAM 44.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 42 refers to this special lose flag to determine whether the win/fail result is a "special lose result."

On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 42 executes a stop result setting process for a normal result. In this stop result setting process for normal outlier results, the MPU 42 determines information related to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display section 341 or the second result display section 342 of the main display section 34, and The information obtained is stored in the RAM 44. Here, the MPU 42 determines information related to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 34 by referring to a stop result table for normal out-of-order results stored in the ROM 43 in advance. The mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the normal winning result is different from the mode of the symbols set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special lose result.

After executing any one of the processes in step S711, step S714, and step S715, the MPU 42 executes a display continuation time (display continuation period) setting process in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 42 acquires the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 44.

In addition, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a ready-to-reach display occurs on the symbol display device 36. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines that if the sorting result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or "most advantageous result," and if the correctness result determined in step S704 is a "normally unsuccessful result." In addition, when winning the reach occurrence lottery, it is determined that the reach display will occur. In addition, as mentioned above, the MPU 42 compares the reach table stored in advance in the reach table storage area 433 of the ROM 43 and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442. Execute the reach occurrence lottery.

When the MPU 42 determines that a ready-to-reach display will occur, the MPU 42 displays the variation type counter acquired from the variation type counter buffer by referring to the display continuation time table for ready-to-reach occurrence stored in the ready-to-reach table storage area 433 of the ROM 43. The display duration time corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display duration time is set in the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 42 refers to the display continuation time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the reach table storage area 433 of the ROM 43. The display duration time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the buffer is determined, and the determined display duration time is set in the display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44.

Specifically, the display duration table for non-reach occurrence is set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the number of pending items increases. Therefore, the display duration time when the pending information related to the upper operating port 25 is consumed is set to become shorter as the number of pending information related to the upper operating port 25 increases. The display duration time when the pending information related to the lower operating port 26 is consumed is set to become shorter as the number of pending information related to the lower operating port 26 increases. Furthermore, the display duration table for non-reach occurrence is set so that when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the display duration is shorter than when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of pending items is the same, the display duration in the high-frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low-frequency support mode.
Furthermore, the display duration determined by referring to the display duration table for reach occurrence is different from the display duration determined by referring to the display duration table for non-reach occurrence.

Note that the display duration table for non-reach occurrence may be set in a relationship opposite to the above-mentioned relationship, such as the longer the display duration becomes as the number of items on hold increases, depending on the number of items on hold and the support mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which it does not change. Further, display duration tables may be set individually for each of the success/failure results and the sorting results.

In step S717, the MPU 42 sets a variation command and a type command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the variation command and type command set in step S717 to the audio emission control device 5.
Note that the audio emission control device 5 executes predetermined processing based on the variation command and type command transmitted from the MPU 42. This process will be explained in detail later.

The variation command includes information regarding the display duration time. Further, the variation command does not include information as to whether or not a reach display occurs.
Here, as mentioned above, the display duration determined by referring to the display duration table for reach occurrence and the display duration determined by referring to the display duration table for non-reach occurrence are mutually exclusive. It's different.
Therefore, even if information regarding whether or not a ready-to-reach display occurs is not included in the variation command, the ready-to-reach display is performed by the audio emission control device 5, which is a sub-side control device, based on the information regarding the display duration. It is possible to determine whether or not this occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the variation command indirectly includes information on whether or not the reach display occurs. Note that the variation command may directly include information as to whether the reach display occurs or not.

The type command includes information regarding the validity result. In other words, the type command includes information related to "big hit winning", "special losing result", and "normal losing result" as information related to the win/fail result. Further, the type command includes information related to the distribution result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the distribution results such as "low probability result", "unspecified low round high probability result", "explicit low round high probability result", and "most advantageous result". Contains information.
In addition, in the following explanation, the win/fail result and the allocation result will be collectively referred to as the game result. In other words, the type command includes information related to game results.

In step S718, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 44, and causes the main display section 34 to start variable display based on the determination result. After that, the MPU 42 ends the fluctuation start process.
Specifically, when it is determined that the second result display section flag is not set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 determines that the first result display section flag is not set in the RAM 44 based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation opening 25 when the game round ends. Since this indicates that the result display section 341 is to start variable display, the first result display section 341 is caused to start variable display.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines that the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 44, the second Since this indicates that the result display section 342 is to start variable display, the second result display section 342 is caused to start variable display.

Returning to the explanation of the game round control process, the game round progression process of steps S506 to S509 will be explained with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the main display section 34 is displaying a variable display, and if it is determined that the main display section 34 is displaying a variable display, the MPU 42 performs a process for game progress in steps S506 to S509. Execute processing.

In step S506, the MPU 42 determines whether the display duration set in step S716 of the variation start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 44 has become "0" or less. Note that the value of this display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S506 that the display duration time has not elapsed, the MPU 42 executes a variable display process in step S507. In this process for variable display, the MPU 42 updates the display on the main display section 34 during the variable display. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game time control process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S506 that the display duration time has elapsed, it executes a variation end process in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 42 stores the information (main (information related to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 34) is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 42 executes display control of the main display section 34 so that the main display section 34, which is currently being displayed in a variable manner, displays a pattern corresponding to the specified information.

Here, the picture finally stopped and displayed on the main display section 34 differs depending on the type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game parlor or the like can check the game results by visually checking the main display section 34 at the end of the game round. According to this, game hall managers can easily check whether or not fraudulent activity is being carried out, such as trying to make the pachinko machine 1 perform the same behavior as if it had won a jackpot lottery. It can be done in a specific manner.
Further, the main display section 34 has a narrower display area than the display screen G of the symbol display device 36, and the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display section 34 are the symbol rows that are stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for players to recognize. Therefore, at the end of a game round, the player checks the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 instead of the main display section 34 to determine whether or not he or she has won a jackpot. The degree of attention to screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 42 sets a variation end command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the variation end command set in step S509 to the audio emission control device 5. After that, the MPU 42 ends the game time control process.
Note that the sound emission control device 5 executes processing for ending the production of the game round based on the variation end command transmitted from the MPU 42. Here, the sound emission control device 5 may be configured to independently end the performance of the game round without requiring reception of the variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the gaming state transition process.
In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 42 executes steps S801 to S814, as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
When the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress, the MPU 42 executes the processes from step S802 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, it executes the processes from step S811 onwards.

First, a description will be given of the processing (processing after step S802) when it is determined in step S801 that the MPU 42 is not in the opening/closing execution mode.
In step S802, the MPU 42 determines whether the variable display on the main display section 34 has ended. If the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display section 34 has not ended, it ends the gaming state transition process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display section 34 has ended, in step S803, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the result corresponds to transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Determine whether Specifically, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/fail result is a "big hit win" or a "special loss result."

When the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the result corresponds to transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 42 sets an in-opening/closing execution mode flag in the RAM 44, and then executes the processes from step S804 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result does not correspond to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (if the MPU 42 determines that the win/fail result is a "normal lose result"), the game End the state transition process.

In step S804, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/fail result is a "special lose result" or not.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the pass/fail result is a "special failure result", in step S805 it sets "2" to the opening/closing counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44. This opening/closing counter SOC is a counter for the MPU 42 to specify the total number of times that the big prize opening 271 of the variable winning device 27 is opened and closed when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S804 that the win/fail result is not a "special winning result", that is, if it determines that the win/fail result is a "big hit win", the MPU 42 determines the sorting result in step S806. It is determined whether or not is a high-certainty result for a few rounds (“an unspecified high-certainty result for a few rounds” or “an explicit high-certainty result for a few rounds”).

When the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is a small round high certainty result, in step S807 it sets the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 to "2". Further, if the MPU 42 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not a high probability result for a few rounds, that is, if it determines that the distribution result is a "low probability result" or "most advantageous result", the MPU 42 In S808, a round counter RC is set to "15". This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 42 when shifting to the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of opening/closing execution modes with different termination conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has two opening/closing execution modes: a round number regulation mode to which it shifts when the win/fail result is a "big hit", and a round number regulation mode to which it shifts when the win/fail result is a "special winning result". It has a standard mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on the condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening/closing number regulation mode ends on condition that the grand prize opening 271 has been opened and closed a predetermined total number of times, or that a predetermined number of game balls have entered the grand prize opening 271. Here, the total number of openings and closings of the big winning opening 271 corresponds to the value set in the opening/closing counter SOC. This opening/closing number regulation mode does not end under the condition of the number of executions of the round game.

Note that the pachinko machine 1 opens and closes the big prize opening 271 once for each round game. Further, one round game continues until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after setting the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again by satisfying either of the following two conditions.
(1) The predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration period) has elapsed (2) The total number of winning game balls into the grand prize opening 271 has reached the predetermined upper limit number.

After executing any one of the processes in step S805, step S807, and step S808, the MPU 42, in step S809, sets the opening standby time (standby period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 seconds. Note that the waiting time for opening is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In this way, if the MPU 42 determines in step S803 that the win/fail result corresponds to transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 42 sets the waiting time for opening in the timer counter T regardless of the type of game result. set. In other words, the opening waiting time is the same regardless of the type of game result.
Note that the waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result, for example, to the extent that it is recognized as the same by the player. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening may differ greatly depending on the game result of "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" and the case of other game results. It is also possible to have a configuration that varies greatly depending on the type.

In step S810, the MPU 42 sets an opening command. After that, the MPU 42 ends the gaming state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the audio emission control device 5.
Note that the audio light emission control device 5 recognizes the transition to the opening/closing execution mode based on the opening command sent from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be explained in detail later.

Next, a description will be given of the processing (processing after step S811) when the MPU 42 determines in step S801 that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.
In step S811, the MPU 42 executes a grand prize opening opening/closing process.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing process.
In the grand prize opening/closing process, the MPU 42 executes steps S901 to S924, as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the big prize opening 271 is open.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is not open, it executes the processes from step S902 onwards.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S901 that the big prize opening 271 is open, it executes the processes from step S906 onwards.

First, in step S901, the process (processing after step S902) when it is determined by the MPU 42 that the big prize opening 271 is not open will be explained.
In step S902, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is less than or equal to "0" and the value of the round counter RC is less than or equal to "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S902 that both the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less, the MPU 42 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S902 that at least one of the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", the MPU 42 determines that the value of the timer counter T in step S903. Determine whether the value is less than or equal to "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not less than "0", it ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is less than or equal to "0", the MPU 42 executes a big winning opening opening process in step S904.
Hereinafter, the big winning opening opening process in step S904 will be explained in detail.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the big winning opening opening process.
In the big winning opening opening process, the MPU 42 executes steps S1001 to S1007, as shown in FIG.
In step S1001, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/fail result is a "special lose result" or not.

When the MPU 42 determines in step S1001 that the win/fail result is a "special losing result", in step S1002, the MPU 42 sets "8" to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44, and then returns to step S1002. In S1003, timer counter T is set to "85". As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 seconds.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1001 that the win/fail result is not a "special losing result", in step S1004 the MPU 42 sets the winning counter PC to "8", and in step S1005, the distribution result It is determined whether or not is a high-certainty result for a few rounds (“an unspecified high-certainty result for a few rounds” or “an explicit high-certainty result for a few rounds”).

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is a small round high certainty result, it sets the timer counter T to "85" in step S1003 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is not a high probability result for a few rounds, it sets the timer counter T to "15000" in step S1006. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

After executing the process of step S1003 or step S1006, the MPU 42 executes the opening execution process of the big prize opening 271 in step S1007. In this opening execution process, the MPU 42 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the open state by executing drive control of the variable prize driving unit 273. After that, the MPU 42 ends the big winning opening opening process.

Note that the value set in the winning counter PC in step S1002 or step S1004 defines the upper limit of the total winning number of game balls that enter the big winning hole 271. Here, in this reference embodiment, the MPU 42 sets the same value (in this embodiment, Although "8") is set in the prize winning counter PC, different values may be set in the winning prize counter PC.

Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 defines the upper limit duration time after the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 42 sets two different upper limit duration times by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 42 operates in a long-term mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec, and in a short-term mode (short-term mode) in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-term mode. aspect) is set.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 causes the game ball firing mechanism 49 to fire the game balls by exciting the solenoid of the game ball firing mechanism 49 at a cycle of 0.6 seconds. Furthermore, as described above, the MPU 42 sets the upper limit of the total number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 271 to 8 by setting the winning counter PC to "8".
Therefore, the upper limit duration of the long time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning game balls to the big winning hole 271 and the firing cycle of the game balls, so the upper limit of 8 game balls It is easy to enter the big winning slot 271.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning game balls into the big winning hole 271 and the firing cycle of the game balls (more specifically, the firing period of the game balls (shorter than the period), it is difficult to enter the game ball into the big winning hole 271. Note that depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball into the grand prize opening 271.

Returning to the explanation of the grand prize opening opening/closing process, the processes after step S905 will be explained with reference to FIG.
After executing the big prize opening opening process in step S904, the MPU 42 sets an opening command in step S905. Further, in step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the release command set in step S905 to the audio emission control device 5. After that, the MPU 42 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Note that the audio emission control device 5 recognizes that the opening/closing door 272 has been set to the open state based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, in step S901, the process (processing after step S906) when the MPU 42 determines that the big prize opening 271 is open will be explained.
In step S906, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the timer counter T is less than or equal to "0". That is, the MPU 42 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1006 of the big winning opening opening process has elapsed.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not less than "0", it executes the processes from step S907 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, it executes the processes from step S918 onwards.

First, a description will be given of the processing (processing after step S907) when the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not less than "0".
In step S907, the MPU 42 determines whether or not a win to the big winning hole 271 has occurred. Note that the determination as to whether or not a winning has occurred in the big winning hole 271 is performed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 304 corresponding to the big winning hole 271.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S907 that no winning has occurred in the big winning hole 271, it ends the big winning hole opening/closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 42 determines in step S907 that a winning has occurred in the big winning opening 271, in step S908, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the winning counter PC and updates it.

In step S909, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the winning counter PC is less than or equal to "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S909 that the value of the winning counter PC is not less than "0", the MPU 42 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S909 that the value of the prize winning counter PC is "0" or less, it executes a closing execution process in step S910. In this closing execution process, the MPU 42 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state by executing drive control of the variable prize winning drive section 273.

In step S911, the MPU 42 sets a closing command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the closing command set in step S911 to the audio emission control device 5.
Note that the audio light emission control device 5 recognizes that the opening/closing door 272 is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S912, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/fail result is a "special lose result".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S912 that the win/fail result is a "specially wrong result", it executes the processes from step S923 to be described later.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S912 that the win/fail result is not a "special failure result", it executes the processes from step S913 onwards.
In step S913, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC and updates it.

In step S914, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it sets the value of the timer counter T to "500" in step S915. After that, the MPU 42 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S915 is the opening waiting time from when the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state and from when it is set to the closed state until the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state again. stipulates. Note that in this reference embodiment, the open standby time is 1 sec. This opening waiting time is the same regardless of the type or progress of the opening/closing execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, it executes the processes from step S916 onwards.
In step S916, the MPU 42 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (standby period) for ending. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is 4 seconds. Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

Similar to the waiting time for the opening, the waiting time for the ending is the same regardless of the type of game result. That is, this ending waiting time is the same regardless of the type of opening/closing execution mode.
Note that the waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be configured to be slightly different depending on the type of game result, for example, to the extent that it is recognized as the same by the player. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the ending may differ greatly depending on whether the game result is a "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" or a game result other than these. It is also possible to have a configuration that varies greatly depending on the type.

In step S917, the MPU 42 sets an ending command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 42 transmits the ending command set in step S917 to the audio emission control device 5. After that, the MPU 42 ends the big winning opening opening/closing process.
Note that the audio light emission control device 5 recognizes the end of the opening/closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 42, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, a process (processing after step S918) when the MPU 42 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is less than or equal to "0" will be described.
In step S918, the MPU 42 executes the closing execution process in the same manner as in step S910 described above.
In step S919, the MPU 42 sets a closing command similarly to step S911 described above.

In step S920, the MPU 42 determines whether the win/fail result is a "special lose result" or not.
If the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the win/fail result is not a "special winning result", that is, if it determines that the win/fail result is a "big hit win", it executes the processes from step S921 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the win/fail result is a "special failure result", it executes the processes from step S923 onwards.

First, the process (processing after step S921) when the MPU 42 determines in step S920 that the win/fail result is not a "specially wrong result" will be described.
In step S921, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC to update it.

In step S922, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the round counter RC is less than or equal to "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", it executes the processes from step S915 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less, it executes the processes from S916 described above.

Next, a description will be given of the processing (processing after step S923) when the MPU 42 determines in step S912 or step S920 that the win/fail result is a "specially unsuccessful result".
In step S923, the MPU 42 subtracts 1 from the value of the opening/closing counter SOC to update it.

In step S924, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the open/close counter SOC is less than or equal to "0".
If the MPU 42 determines in step S924 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is not less than "0", it executes the processes from step S915 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S924 that the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less, it executes the processes from S916 described above.

Returning to the explanation of the gaming state transition process, the processes after step S812 will be explained with reference to FIG.
After executing the big prize opening opening/closing process in step S811, the MPU 42 determines whether the value of the opening/closing counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less in step S812. judge.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that at least one of the value of the opening/closing counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not less than "0", the MPU 42 ends the gaming state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S812 that both the value of the open/close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less, the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less in step S813. 0" or less.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not less than "0", the MPU 42 ends the gaming state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less, in step S814, after clearing the opening/closing execution mode flag stored in the RAM 44, Execute the transition process when the opening/closing execution mode ends. After that, the MPU 42 ends the gaming state transition process.
The transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail below.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of transition processing when the opening/closing execution mode ends.
In the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 42 executes steps S1101 to S1112, as shown in FIG.
In step S1101, the MPU 42 determines whether the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "clearly less round highly certain result."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "clearly fewer round high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1102 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "clearly less round high probability result", it executes the processing from step S1105 onwards.

First, the processing (processing after step S1102) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or "clearly less round high probability result" will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 42 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 44. If the high frequency support flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the high-frequency support mode.

In step S1103, the MPU 42 clears the number of times limit flag stored in the RAM 44.
Here, if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44 and the number of times limit flag is not set, the high frequency support mode continues at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the win/fail lottery.

In step S1104, the MPU 42 sets a high probability mode flag in the RAM 44. If the high probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high probability mode continues at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, when ending the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 42 uses the flags (low certainty result flag, non-indication low round high certainty result flag, explicit low round high Clear the most likely result flag, most favorable result flag) and special outlier flag. In addition, in step S701 of the above-mentioned fluctuation start process, the MPU 42 determines whether the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 44. There is.

Next, a description will be given of the process (processing after step S1105) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "clearly less round high probability result".
In step S1105, the MPU 42 determines whether the distribution result is a "highly certain result of a small number of unspecified rounds."

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is a "highly certain result of a few rounds with no explicit information," it executes the processes from step S1106 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is not a "highly certain result for a few rounds that is not explicitly stated", it executes the processes from step S1108 onwards.

First, a description will be given of the processing (processing after step S1106) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is a "highly certain result of a few rounds that is not explicitly stated."
In step S1106, the MPU 42 determines whether the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1106 that the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44, it executes the processes from step S1103 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 44, it sets a high probability mode flag in the RAM 44 in step S1107. If the high probability mode flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high probability mode continues at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Next, a process (processing after step S1108) when the MPU 42 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is not a "highly certain result of a few unspecified rounds" will be described.
In step S1108, the MPU 42 determines whether the distribution result is a "low probability result" or not.

If the MPU 42 determines in step S1108 that the sorting result is not a "low-probability result" (if the result is determined to be a "specially unsuccessful result"), the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode. do.
On the other hand, if the MPU 42 determines in step S1108 that the sorting result is a "low probability result", it executes the processes from step S1109 onwards.

In step S1109, the MPU 42 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 42 sets the win/fail lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low probability mode continues at least until the lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result is other than a "low probability result."

In step S1110, the MPU 42 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 44. If the high frequency support flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. Thereby, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the high-frequency support mode.
In step S1111, the MPU 42 sets the value of the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 to "100".
In step S1112, the MPU 42 sets a number limit flag in the RAM 44. If the number of times limit flag has already been set in the RAM 44, the MPU 42 maintains it. Thereafter, the MPU 42 ends the transition process at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, if the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 44 and the number of times limit flag is set, the number of games that are the end reference number set in the number of games counter is 100 times. Continue until the number of times is digested. When the MPU 42 has played the game 100 times, it clears the high frequency support flag and the number limit flag. Thereby, the MPU 42 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
In addition, although MPU42 performs these processes as a process for electric role support in step S306 of a normal process, detailed description is abbreviate|omitted.

In this way, if you win a jackpot in the lottery, and the distribution result in the distribution lottery is the most advantageous result or the most certain result for the clearest round, the gaming state will change to the current state. Regardless of the gaming state, after the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and also shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

In addition, if the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode and you win a "big hit" in the lottery, and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes a "high probability result for a small number of undisclosed rounds," After the opening/closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the gaming state shifts to the high probability mode and also shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode continue at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

On the other hand, if the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode and you win a "big hit" in the lottery, and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes "high probability result for a small number of undisclosed rounds." After the opening/closing execution mode (namely, the round number regulation mode) ends, the gaming state shifts to the high probability mode and also shifts to the low frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the low frequency support mode continue at least until a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery.

In addition, if you win a jackpot in the win/fail lottery and the distribution result in the distribution lottery becomes a "low probability result", the gaming state will be set to the open/close execution mode (i.e., After finishing the round number regulation mode), the mode shifts to the low probability mode and also shifts to the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues at least until a jackpot is won in the lottery, and the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the lottery, and the high-frequency support mode continues if the game is played 100 times without winning a jackpot in the lottery. Enter frequency support mode.

In addition, if a "big win" is not achieved in the winning/failure lottery, that is, if the winning/failing result in the winning/failure lottery becomes a "special winning result" or a "normal winning result", the game state does not shift.

<Electrical configuration of audio light emission control device>
FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device.
As shown in FIG. 19, the audio emission control device 5 includes an audio emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the audio emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 that constitute the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 53 and the RAM 54, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip.

The ROM 53 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a nonvolatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain stored information.
The RAM 54 is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 53, and is a volatile storage means that requires external power supply to retain the stored information. It is. This RAM 54 has various areas such as a command list storage area 541, various counter areas 542, and a sub-side pending information storage area 543. These areas will be explained in detail later.

MPU52 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main controller 4 as described above. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to the various lamp sections 124, 371 to 373, the speaker section 125, and the display control device 6.
The MPU 52 executes driving control of the various lamp sections 124, 371 to 373 and the speaker section 125 based on commands sent from the main control device 4.
Furthermore, the MPU 52 transmits commands resulting from analysis of these commands to the display control device 6. Note that the audio light emission control device 5 is electrically connected to the display control device 6 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the contents of the sub-side reservation information storage area.
As shown in FIG. 20, the sub-side reservation information storage area 543 includes a first sub-side reservation area SRa, a second sub-side reservation area SRb, and an execution area SAE.

The first sub-side reservation area SRa provided as the first sub-side acquired information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area SRa1 to a fourth area SRa4. Each area SRa1 to SRa4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing normal hold information for generating normal hold and advance notice hold information for generating advance notice hold. The normal suspension information for generating normal suspension and the advance notice suspension information for generating advance notice suspension will be explained in detail later.

The MPU 52 stores the normal hold information or advance notice hold information as sub-side hold information in each area SRa1 to SRa4 in chronological order in accordance with the reception of the first hold generation command. Specifically, when receiving the first hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42, the MPU 52 sends sub-side hold information in the order of first area SRa1 → second area SRa2 → third area SRa3 → fourth area SRa4. Stored in chronological order.

As described above, since the first sub-side reservation area SRa includes four storage areas, up to four pieces of sub-side reservation information based on the first reservation generation command can be held. Further, the first sub-side reservation area SRa includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each area SRa1 to SRa4.

The second sub-side reservation area SRb provided as the second sub-side acquired information storage means includes four storage areas, first area SRb1 to fourth area SRb4. Each area SRb1 to SRb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing normal hold information for generating normal hold and advance notice hold information for generating advance notice hold. The normal suspension information for generating normal suspension and the advance notice suspension information for generating advance notice suspension will be explained in detail later.

The MPU 52 stores the normal hold information or advance notice hold information as sub-side hold information in each area SRb1 to SRb4 in chronological order in accordance with the reception of the second hold generation command. Specifically, when receiving the second hold generation command transmitted from the MPU 42, the MPU 52 sends sub-side hold information in the order of first area SRb1 → second area SRb2 → third area SRb3 → fourth area SRb4. Stored in chronological order.

In this way, since the second sub-side reservation area SRb includes four storage areas, up to four pieces of sub-side reservation information based on the second reservation generation command can be held. Further, the second sub-side reservation area SRb includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each area SRb1 to SRb4.

The execution area SAE is for moving the sub-side holding information stored in the storage area of the first sub-side holding area SRa or the second sub-side holding area SRb when starting the variable display of the symbol display device 36. area.

<Electrical configuration of display control device>
FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device.
As shown in FIG. 21, the display control device 6 includes a display control board 61, an MPU 62, a program ROM 63 and a work RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62, a video display processor (VDP) 65, a character ROM 66, and a video display processor (VDP) 65. It is equipped with RAM67. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a program ROM 63, a work RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are combined into a chip. Note that the MPU 62, VDP 65, character ROM 66, and video RAM 67 are mounted on the display control board 61.

The MPU 62 analyzes the command sent from the audio emission control device 5, performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command, and controls the VDP 65. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes control of the VDP 65 by generating commands for the VDP 65 .

The program ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a nonvolatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain stored information.
The work RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 63, and is a volatile memory that requires external power supply to retain the stored information. It is a storage means.

The VDP 65 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 36. Since the VDP 65 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and in reality, it can be said to be a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the video RAM 67.

The character ROM 66 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 36. This character ROM 66 holds bitmap format image data of various symbols, a color palette table, etc. that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 67 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 36, and the display contents of the symbol display device 36 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 67.

This video RAM 67 includes an expansion buffer 68 and a frame buffer 69.
As described above, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 69. Note that one frame of drawing data refers to the data necessary to display the image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say something.

Here, the frame buffer 69 includes a plurality of frame areas 691 and 692. Specifically, the frame buffer 69 includes a first frame area 691 and a second frame area 692.

Each frame area 691, 692 is set to have a capacity capable of storing one frame's worth of drawing data. Specifically, each frame area 691, 692 includes a large number of unit areas that correspond to dots (pixels) on the display screen G at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, each unit area employs a full-color system, and it is possible to set 256 colors for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). In other words, each unit area has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) for each color of RGB, and has a total storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

In a situation where drawing data created in one frame area (for example, the first frame area 691) is being used to draw data on the symbol display device 36, the VDP 65 is configured to display data in another frame area (for example, the second frame area 692). ) to create the next drawing data to be used. In other words, the frame buffer 69 employs a double buffer system.

Further, the VDP 65 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 691 or the second frame area 692, and sends the image signal to the pattern display device 36. Output. More specifically, the VDP 65 transfers the drawing data to the frame areas 691 and 692 to be output. The VDP 65 adjusts the resolution of this drawing data using a scaler (not shown) and converts it into gradation data so that it corresponds to the resolution of the pattern display device 36. Then, the VDP 65 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on this gradation data, and outputs the image signal to the pattern display device 36.

<About timer interrupt processing executed by the audio emission control device>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the audio emission control device.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes timer interrupt processing to advance the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 52 periodically executes steps S2001 to S2006 (eg, every 2 msec), as shown in FIG.

In step S2001, the MPU 52 executes command storage processing. In this command storage process, when the MPU 52 receives a command from the MPU 42, the MPU 52 stores the command in the RAM 54. Specifically, the RAM 54 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands transmitted from the MPU 42, and the MPU 52 stores commands in the ring buffer in the order in which they are transmitted from the MPU 42. Note that the MPU 52 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order in which they are stored in the ring buffer.

In step S2002, the MPU 52 executes a suspension determination process based on the command sent from the MPU 42. In the suspension determination process, the MPU 52 determines the occurrence of a suspended symbol, the shift of a suspended symbol, and the like. This suspension determination process will be explained in detail later.
In step S2003, the MPU 52 executes an effect determination process based on the command sent from the MPU 42. In the performance determination process, the MPU 52 determines the performance for the game round, the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. This effect determination process will be explained in detail later.
In step S2004, the MPU 52 executes a performance execution process based on the contents of the suspension determination process of step S2002 and the performance determination process of step S2003. Specifically, in the performance execution process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the various lamp units 124, 371 to 373, and executes audio control of the speaker unit 125.

In step S2005, the MPU 52 executes a demo display execution process based on the demo command sent from the MPU 42. In the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 52 executes the demonstration display when a predetermined start waiting period for starting the demonstration (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. . Specifically, in the demonstration display execution process, the MPU 52 controls the light emission of the various lamp sections 124 and controls the sound of the speaker section 125.

In step S2006, a command transmission process is executed to transmit the command set in the hold determination process of step S2002 and the effect determination process of step S2003 to the display control device 6. In this command transmission process, the MPU 52 determines whether the timing has arrived to transmit various commands stored as a command list in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54 to the display control device 6, and transmits the various commands to the display control device 6. If it is determined that the timing to send the command has arrived, the command is sent to the display control device 6. After that, the MPU 52 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<About the hold determination process executed by the audio emission control device>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the reservation determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes a suspension determination process in order to generate a suspended symbol, shift a suspended symbol, and the like. In this hold determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2101 to S2104, as shown in FIG.

In step S2101, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a hold generation command (first hold generation command or second hold generation command) transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2101 that the hold generation command has not been received, it executes the processes from step S2103 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2101 that a hold generation command has been received, it executes a hold generation process in step S2102. In this suspension generation process, the MPU 52 stores sub-side suspension information in the sub-side suspension information storage area 543 based on the content of the suspension generation command. This hold generation process will be explained in detail later.

After the MPU 52 executes the process in step S2102, or if it is determined in step S2101 that the hold generation command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the process from step S2103 onwards.
In step S2103, the MPU 52 determines whether the pending shift command (first shift command or second shift command) transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2103 that the hold shift command has not been received, the MPU 52 ends the hold determination process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2103 that a pending shift command has been received, it executes pending shift processing in step S2104. In this hold shift process, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 based on the contents of the hold shift command. This pending shift process will be explained in detail later. Thereafter, the MPU 52 ends the hold generation process.

<Pending occurrence processing>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hold generation process.
In the hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2201 to S2209, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 52 stores sub-side suspension information in the sub-side suspension information storage area 543 based on the content of the suspension generation command.

In step S2201, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first suspension generation command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that the first hold generation command has been received, in step S2202, the MPU 52 grasps the number of held items stored in the first sub-side holding area SRa, and determines the number of held items. The first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN is set in a predetermined storage area in the first sub-side hold area SRa. After that, the MPU 52 executes the processing from step S2204 onwards.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that the first suspension generation command has not been received (that is, it has determined that the second suspension generation command has been received), then in step S2203, the MPU 52 The number of pending items stored in the second sub-side holding area SRb is grasped, and the number of pending items is set as the second sub-side starting pending storage number SRbN in a predetermined storage area in the second sub-side holding area SRb. After that, the MPU 52 executes the processing from step S2204 onwards.

After executing the process of step S2202 or step S2203, the MPU 52 updates the sub-side start pending storage number SN (SRaN or SRbN) by adding 1 to the value in step S2204.

In step S2205, the MPU 52 executes a lottery process for pending notice. In this advance notice suspension lottery process, the MPU 52 performs a lottery to determine whether or not advance notice suspension will occur.
Specifically, the MPU 52 uses the value of the notice suspension occurrence counter to perform a lottery to determine whether or not notice suspension is to be generated. Note that the advance notice pending occurrence counter is provided in various counter areas 542 of the RAM 54.

Here, the notice hold uses a notice display that changes the type of hold symbol, etc. to inform the player of the expectation level of the hold, and the effect of a game round based on the hold that expires before the hold. This is a hold that executes a notice display that generates a look-ahead effect that informs the player of the expectation level of the hold.

The advance notice suspension occurrence counter is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The advance notice suspension occurrence counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the advance notice suspension occurrence counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54.
Then, the MPU 52 executes a lottery (notice suspension occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a notice suspension based on the value of the notice suspension occurrence counter stored in the notice suspension occurrence counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer, and compares this value with the notice hold occurrence table to determine whether or not to cause notice hold. Execute the lottery. Note that the table for occurrence of advance notice suspension is a table that stores random number values related to occurrence of advance notice reservation, and is stored in the ROM 53.

In step S2206, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the lottery for generating notice suspension was won in step S2205 (whether or not notice suspension is to be generated).
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that notice suspension is to be generated, it executes notice suspension generation processing in step S2207. In this advance notice suspension generation process, the MPU 52 executes processing for generating advance notice suspension. Furthermore, based on the contents of this notice suspension generation process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice suspension information in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the sub-side suspension area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start suspension storage number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start pending storage number SRaN in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first sub-side pending area SRa, that is, the updated number in step S2204. The advance notice suspension information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first sub-side start suspension storage number SRaN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it corresponds to "4" of the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. The preview pending information is stored in a fourth area SRa4, which is a storage area for storing advance notices.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, the MPU 52 selects the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second sub-side pending area SRb, that is, in step S2204. The advance notice suspension information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the updated second sub-side start suspension storage number SRbN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it corresponds to "4" of the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. The preview pending information is stored in the fourth area SRb4, which is a storage area for storing the advance notice.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that advance notice suspension is not to be generated, it executes normal suspension generation processing in step S2208. In this normal hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes processing for generating normal hold. Furthermore, based on the content of this normal hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the sub-side hold area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold storage number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start pending storage number SRaN in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first sub-side pending area SRa, that is, the updated number in step S2204. Normal suspension information is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first sub-side startup suspension storage number SRaN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it corresponds to "4" of the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. The normal hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4, which is a storage area for storage.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, the MPU 52 selects the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second sub-side pending area SRb, that is, in step S2204. Normal suspension information is stored in a storage area corresponding to the updated second sub-side start suspension storage number SRbN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it corresponds to "4" of the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. Normal pending information is stored in the fourth area SRb4, which is a storage area for storing the information.

After executing the notice hold generation process in step S2207 or the normal hold generation process in step S2208, the MPU 52 sets a hold display generation command in step S2209. Then, the MPU 52 stores the pending display generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This hold display generation command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads, from the program ROM 63, a data table for causing the symbol display device 36 to generate advance notice suspension or normal suspension based on the suspension display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the frame buffer 69. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the advance notice pending symbol or the normal reserve symbol on the display screen G to notify the player of the occurrence of the advance notice pending symbol or the normal reserve symbol.

<Pending shift processing>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the pending shift process.
As described above, the MPU 52 of the audio emission control device 5 executes the hold shift process in step S2104 of the hold determination process. In this pending shift process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2301 to S2308, as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold area based on the contents of the hold shift command.

In step S2301, the MPU 52 determines whether the first shift command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2301 that the first shift command has been received, it executes the data setting process for the first sub-side holding area SRa in steps S2302 to S2304, and in step S2301 If it is determined that the shift command has not been received (if it is determined that the second shift command has been received), the data setting process for the second sub-side holding area SRb in steps S2305 to S2307 is executed. .

First, the data setting process for the first sub-side reservation area SRa in steps S2302 to S2304 will be explained.
In step S2302, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN of the first sub-side hold area SRa and updates it.
In step S2303, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side reservation information stored in the first area SRa1 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa to the execution area SAE.
In step S2304, the MPU 52 executes a data shift process to shift the sub-side reservation information stored in the storage area of the first sub-side reservation area SRa. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the sub-side pending information stored in each area SRa1 to SRa4 to the first area SRa1 side. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side reservation information in the second area SRa2 to the first area SRa1, shifts the sub-side reservation information in the third area SRa3 to the second area SRa2, and shifts the sub-side reservation information in the fourth area SRa4 to the first area SRa1. The side reservation information is shifted to the third area SRa3.

Next, the data setting process for the second sub-side reservation area SRb in steps S2305 to S2307 will be explained.
In step S2305, the MPU 52 subtracts 1 from the value of the second sub-side start hold storage number SRbN of the second sub-side hold area SRb and updates it.
In step S2306, the MPU 52 moves the sub-side reservation information stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb to the execution area SAE.
In step S2307, the MPU 52 executes a data shift process to shift the sub-side reservation information stored in the storage area of the second sub-side reservation area SRb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the sub-side pending information stored in each area SRb1 to SRb4 to the first area SRb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side reservation information in the second area SRb2 to the first area SRb1, shifts the sub-side reservation information in the third area SRb3 to the second area SRb2, and shifts the sub-side reservation information in the fourth area SRb4 to the first area SRb1. The side reservation information is shifted to the third area SRb3.

After executing the process in step S2304 or step S2307, the MPU 52 sets a hold display shift command in step S2308. Then, the MPU 52 stores the pending display shift command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the hold display shift command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This pending display shift command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads, from the program ROM 63, a data table for executing normal hold and advance notice hold shifts on the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the frame buffer 69. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays and executes the normal hold and advance notice hold shifts on the display screen G.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing advance notice pending symbols and normal pending symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device.
As shown in FIG. 26, the MPU 62 has pedestals B11 to B14 provided corresponding to four storage areas, first area SRa1 to fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and a second sub-side holding area SRa. Pedestals B21 to B24 provided corresponding to four storage areas, first area SRb1 to fourth area SRb4 of area SRb, and an execution pedestal provided between pedestals B11 and B21 corresponding to execution area SAE. AB and A are displayed on the display screen G.

Note that the first holding lamp section 371 is provided corresponding to four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa from the left side to the right side. On the other hand, the pedestals B11 to B14 are provided corresponding to four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, from the right side to the left side.
Further, the second holding lamp section 372 is provided corresponding to four storage areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side holding area SRb from the left side to the right side. Similarly, the pedestals B21 to B24 are provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb from the left side to the right side.

The pedestals B11 to B14, the pedestals B21 to B24, and the execution pedestal AB notify the player of the occurrence of a notice hold or normal hold by placing a notice hold symbol or a normal hold symbol thereon.
Specifically, the MPU 62 specifies that the normal hold information is stored in the storage area of the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the content of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. In this case, a white spherical picture, which is normally a reserved picture, is placed on the pedestals B11 to B14.
When the MPU 62 specifies that advance notice suspension information is stored in the storage area of the first sub-side suspension area SRa based on the contents of the suspension display generation command or the suspension display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, A blinking white sphere pattern, which is a preview pending pattern, is placed on the pedestals B11 to B14.

In addition, when the MPU 62 specifies that the normal hold information is stored in the storage area of the second sub-side hold area SRb based on the content of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, places a white spherical picture, which is a normally reserved picture, on the pedestals B21 to B24.
When the MPU 62 specifies that advance notice reservation information is stored in the storage area of the second sub-side reservation area SRb based on the contents of the reservation display generation command or the reservation display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, On the pedestals B21 to B24, a blinking white sphere pattern, which is a preview pending pattern, is placed.

Furthermore, when the MPU 62 specifies that the normal hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the normally held picture on the execution pedestal AB. Place a white sphere pattern.
When the MPU 62 determines that advance notice suspension information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the content of the command at the time of shift display of reservation transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays a notice suspension symbol on the execution pedestal AB. Place a blinking white sphere pattern.

Here, in the example of FIG. 26, the MPU 62 places the normally reserved symbols on the pedestals B11 and B12, places the advance notice pending symbol on the pedestal B13, and places the normally reserved symbol on the execution pedestal AB. is listed. Further, in this example, the MPU 62 places a normally reserved symbol on the pedestal B21. Furthermore, in this example, the MPU 62 does not place any designs on the pedestals B14, B22 to B24.
In addition, in this reference form, although the pictures of the normal hold and the notice hold are different from each other, they may be the same. Further, in this reference embodiment, the MPU 62 displays the pedestals B11 to B14, the pedestals B21 to B24, and the execution pedestal AB on the display screen G, but it is not necessary to display each pedestal on the display screen G.

<About the effect determination process executed by the audio emission control device>
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the production determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes a production determination process in order to execute a production for the game round, a production for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this performance determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413, as shown in FIG.

In step S2401, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the variation command and type command transmitted from the MPU 42 have been received.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that each command has not been received, it executes the processes from step S2409 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2401 that each command has been received, the MPU 52 determines whether the gaming result is "most advantageous result" or "low probability result" based on the content of the type command in step S2402. result.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the gaming result is the "most advantageous result" or "low probability result", in step S2403, it executes symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of gaming result. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 52 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 52 selects the same odd number or the same even number as the final stop result to be stopped and displayed on the active line L. If the information related to the combination of symbols with numbers is determined and the game result is determined to be a "low probability result", the same even number is displayed as the final stop result on the active line L. The information related to the combination of symbols is determined. Note that the odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2402 that the gaming result is not "most advantageous result" or "low probability result", in step S2404, based on the content of the type command, the gaming result is " It is determined whether the result is "out of the ordinary".
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the gaming result is not a "normally losing result," that is, the gaming result is a "specially losing result,""an unspecified low round high probability result," or "an explicit low round high probability result." If it is either, a common symbol determination process is executed in step S2405. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 52 determines information regarding a special combination of symbols as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the active line L. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects not a combination of symbols having the same numbers, but a special combination of symbols having mutually different numbers (for example, "3.4.1") is determined. Note that this special combination of symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2404 that the game result is a "normal winning result", in step S2406, it executes a symbol determination process for normal winning. In this normal out symbol determination process, the MPU 52 determines whether or not a ready-to-win display will occur based on the content of the variation command.

When the MPU 52 determines that the ready-to-reach display occurs, the MPU 52 determines information regarding the combination of symbols for the ready-to-reach display as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the active line L. Note that the combination of symbols in the reach display is randomly determined by a lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 52 provides information regarding a combination of symbols different from the combinations of symbols described above as a stop result to be finally displayed on the active line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 52 randomly determines, by lottery or the like, a combination of symbols that is different from any of the combinations of symbols having the same numbers, a special combination of symbols, and the combination of symbols in the reach display.

After executing any one of the processes in step S2403, step S2405, and step S2406, the MPU 52 executes a production pattern determination process in step S2407. In this performance pattern determination process, the MPU 52 selects a performance pattern corresponding to the variation command and type command by referring to the performance table stored in the ROM 53 in advance. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the performance duration time (performance duration period) and the content of the performance as the performance pattern. Note that in step S2407, the MPU 52 also performs a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display.

Furthermore, based on the selected performance pattern, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above.

In step S2408, the MPU 52 sets a fluctuation start command and a stop result command that includes information regarding the stop result determined in any one of steps S2403, S2405, and S2406. Then, the MPU 52 stores the fluctuation start command and the stop result command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. These fluctuation start commands and stop result commands are transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 generates a data table from the program ROM 63 for starting the fluctuation display and displaying the stop result on the symbol display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command and stop result command sent from the MPU 52. read out. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the frame buffer 69. As a result, the symbol display device 36 finally stops and displays the stop result determined by the MPU 52 on the active line L after starting the variable display.

After the MPU 52 executes the process in step S2408, or if it is determined in step S2401 that the variation command and the type command have not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes in and after step S2409.
In step S2409, the MPU 52 determines whether an opening command has been received.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2409 that the opening command has not been received, it executes the processes from step S2413 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2409 that an opening command has been received, in step S2410 the MPU 52 determines the type of game result based on the content of the opening command.

In step S2411, the MPU 52 executes a process for determining a performance for the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S2410. In the process of determining the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2410 that the game result is a "special losing result" or "highly accurate result of a small number of undisclosed rounds," the MPU 52 determines the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Select performance A as the performance. Further, when the MPU 52 determines that the game result is a "clearly small round high certainty result", the MPU 52 selects performance B as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 52 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 52 selects performance C or performance D as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode. Further, when the MPU 52 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 52 selects performance D as the performance for the opening/closing execution mode.
It should be noted that the duration of the performance A and the performance B corresponds to the time when the big prize opening 271 is opened and closed twice in a short time mode in the opening/closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the performance C and the performance D corresponds to the time when opening and closing the big prize opening 271 is performed 15 times in a long time mode in the opening/closing execution mode.

Furthermore, based on the selection results of effects A to D, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution processing of step S2004 described above.

In step S2412, the MPU 52 sets a command for the opening/closing execution mode that includes information related to the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected in step S2411. Then, the MPU 52 stores the opening/closing execution mode command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This opening/closing execution mode command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing an effect for the opening/closing execution mode on the symbol display device 36 based on the command for the opening/closing execution mode transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the frame buffer 69. Thereby, the symbol display device 36 executes the effect for the opening/closing execution mode selected by the MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5.

After the MPU 52 executes the process in step S2412, or if it is determined in step S2409 that an opening command has not been received, the MPU 52 executes the processes in and after step S2413.
In step S2413, the MPU 52 executes other processing. In other processing, the MPU 52 executes processing for advancing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, for example, based on the opening command, closing command, and ending command transmitted from the MPU 42. After that, the MPU 52 ends the performance determination process.

<About the relationship between gaming results and gaming status, etc.>
Hereinafter, the relationship between game results and game states based on execution of various processes will be explained.
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the relationship between game results, game status, etc. Specifically, FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the relationship between gaming results excluding "normally out-of-order results" and gaming states, with gaming results arranged in columns and gaming states etc. arranged in rows.
As shown in FIG. 28, the pachinko machine 1 provides game results other than "normally unsuccessful results" such as "big hit winnings" and "specially unsuccessful results", "non-disclosed low round high accuracy results", "explicitly It has the sorted results of ``few round high probability result'', ``most advantageous result'', and ``low probability result''.

Here, the "special winning result" is a game result that is selected when a "big hit winning" is not achieved in the win/fail lottery (symbol x in the figure), as shown in the second column of the table in FIG. Further, the distribution result is a game result that is selected when a "big hit" is achieved in the lottery (symbol ○ in the figure).
Hereinafter, the relationship between the gaming results excluding the "normal losing results" and the gaming status etc. will be explained. In addition, in this reference form, the pachinko machine 1 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state etc. as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state etc., the content of the game result, The contents such as the gaming state are arbitrary.

In the "special winning result", the opening/closing execution mode is not the round number regulation mode but the opening/closing number regulation mode, and the opening/closing of the big prize opening 271 is executed twice in a short time manner. In addition, in the case of a "special winning result", the winning lottery mode does not shift.
In "Undisclosed Small Round High Accurate Results", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which a round game is played with the upper limit of two times, and the opening/closing of the big prize opening 271 is executed twice in a short time mode. be done. Furthermore, in the case of the "high probability result of a small number of undisclosed rounds", the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.
In this way, the "special losing result" and the "non-disclosed small round high accuracy result" differ in the type of opening/closing execution mode, but they are common in that the opening and closing of the big winning opening 271 is executed twice in a short time mode. are doing.

Furthermore, in the case of the "Special Missing Result" and the "Highly Accurate Result of an Unspecified Low Round", the stop result is a special combination of symbols, and the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is the performance A. Furthermore, the support mode does not shift in the case of "specially out-of-order results" and "unspecified low-round high-precision results." Further, in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 36 does not display an image clearly indicating that the high probability mode is on the display screen G.

Therefore, it is impossible for a player to understand whether the gaming result is a "specially unsuccessful result" or "a highly accurate result with a small number of undisclosed rounds" by checking the stop result or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. Can not. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in a "high probability result for a small number of undisclosed rounds" and shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 36 will not display the winning lottery in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. The mode is disguised as if it had not been changed.
Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying predicting whether or not the win/fail lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

In the "clear small round high accurate result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which a round game is played with two times as the upper limit, and the opening/closing of the big prize opening 271 is executed twice in a short period of time. Ru. Furthermore, in the case of "clear low round high certainty result", the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Furthermore, in the case of the "highly accurate result of a small number of rounds", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is performance B. In addition, in the case of "highly certain result of clear few rounds", the support mode shifts to high frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 36 displays on the display screen G an image clearly indicating that the high probability mode is selected.
Therefore, the player can understand that the game result is a "clear low round high certainty result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and "low probability result", the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which a round game is played with the upper limit of 15 times, and the opening/closing of the big prize opening 271 is performed in a long-time manner for 15 times. Executed times.
Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stopping result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode, and the opening/closing execution mode The performance will be performance C or performance D. Specifically, if the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode will be effect C, and the stop result will be a combination of symbols having the same even number. In this case, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode becomes effect D.
In addition, in the "low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, and the production for the opening/closing execution mode is the production D. Become. Further, in the "most favorable result" and the "low probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode.

Therefore, if the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is effect C, the player must understand that the gaming result is the "most advantageous result". can be understood. However, if the stop result is a combination of symbols with the same even number, the player can confirm that the game result is the "most advantageous result" by checking the stop result and the effect for the opening/closing execution mode. It is not possible to determine whether the result is a low-probability result or a low-probability result.

Then, in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends, if the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is finally the performance D, the symbol display device 36 displays an image on the display screen G that clearly indicates that the high probability mode is selected. do not.

Specifically, the symbol display device 36 does not display on the display screen G an image clearly indicating that it is the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode is set after the standard number of times the game ends (specifically, 100 times), an image is displayed on the display screen G notifying the transition to the low-frequency support mode. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in the "most advantageous result," the symbol display device 36 will show that the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is ultimately the performance D in the game round after the opening/closing execution mode ends. If so, the game result is disguised as if it were a "low-probability result."

Then, when the distribution result is the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 36 is in the high probability mode after playing 100 games without becoming a "big hit" in the lottery. An image clearly indicating this is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 36 cancels the disguise that has been applied to make the game result appear to be a "low-probability result."

[Modified example of reference form]
Note that the reference embodiment of the present invention is not limited to the reference embodiment described above, but includes modifications, improvements, etc. within a range that can achieve the object of the present invention.
(1) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 opens and closes the grand prize opening 271 once for each round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 may open and close the big prize opening 271 a plurality of times for one round game.
(2) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is configured such that after the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state, a predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration period) has elapsed, or the game ball enters the big prize opening 271. When the total number of prizes won reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the opening/closing door 272 is set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may vary depending on the upper limit duration time, and the conditions for setting the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again are arbitrary.

(3) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 allows the total number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening 271 to reach eight, which is the predetermined upper limit, after the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state. , the opening/closing door 272 was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set the upper limit to any number other than eight. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set different upper limit numbers depending on the distribution results. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may set a different upper limit number for each round during one opening/closing execution mode.

(4) In this reference embodiment, after the opening/closing door 272 is set to the open state, the pachinko machine 1 opens the opening/closing door by setting the opening/closing door 272 to the open state and then opening/closing the opening/closing door when the total number of winning game balls to the grand prize opening 271 reaches a predetermined upper limit number. 272 was set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a termination trigger port that sets the opening/closing door 272 to a closed state when a game ball enters the game ball, and the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a termination trigger port that sets the opening/closing door 272 to a closed state when a game ball enters the game ball. The ball may be configured to allow the ball to enter the opening.
(5) In this reference embodiment, after setting the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again when a predetermined upper limit duration time (upper limit duration) elapses. It was set. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the open state and then opens the opening/closing door 272 after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since a winning in the big prize opening 271 occurred. It may be set to the closed state again.

(6) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 sets the opening/closing door 272 to the open state, and then sets the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may move to the next round game without setting the opening/closing door 272 to the closed state again after setting the opening/closing door 272 to the open state.
(7) In this reference form, the upper limit duration of the short time mode was set shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short time mode is a time longer than the firing cycle of the game ball, and less than or equal to n times the firing cycle of the game ball (n = 1, 2, or 3). It may be set to time.

(8) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 had two types of opening/closing execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 has an open/close execution mode in which a round game is executed twice with an upper limit duration in a short time mode, and an open/close execution mode in which a round game is executed 15 times in an upper limit duration in a long term mode. had. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 may have an opening/closing execution mode that is different from these regarding the aspect of the upper limit duration and the number of times the round game is executed. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 can change the degree of opening of the opening/closing door 272, such as half-open or fully open, by varying the upper limit duration time, instead of setting a plurality of opening/closing execution modes. , a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of opening/closing execution modes are set. Further, although the upper limit duration appears to be the same to the player, the exact upper limit duration may be set to be different.

(9) In this reference embodiment, the game result and the performance for the opening/closing execution mode are set in advance to have a one-to-one correspondence. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening/closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from multiple types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or may be selected from multiple types of effects by lottery etc. The selection rate may be set to be different depending on the game result.

(10) In this reference embodiment, when the game result is one of "special losing result", "non-stated low round high accurate result", and "clear low round high accurate result", the MPU 52 Information regarding a special combination of symbols is determined as a stop result to be finally displayed on L, and this special combination of symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result. On the other hand, the MPU 52 may randomly determine the information related to the stop result so that it is difficult for the player to grasp which game result it is.

(11) In this reference embodiment, the MPU 42 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for drawing when a jackpot occurs, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for drawing for the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs. On the other hand, when a jackpot occurs, the MPU 42 may use the jackpot random number counter C1 for lottery of the jackpot type. In this case, the jackpot type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44.

(12) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has two types of losing results, a "special losing result" and a "normal losing result," and the MPU 42 stores the value of the random number for winning the jackpot occurrence. By comparing the win/fail table and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 442, a lottery for jackpot occurrence was executed. In other words, the MPU 42 used the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute the lottery related to the "special losing result." On the other hand, the MPU 42 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 441 of the RAM 44 in order to execute the lottery related to the "special winning result". A lottery may be conducted based on the results.

(13) In this reference form, under the gaming state in which the winning/failure table for the low probability mode is referred to when drawing a lottery for the occurrence of a jackpot, the value of the random number that becomes a "special winning result" is 2, Under the gaming condition in which the high probability mode win/fail table is referred to during the lottery, the number of random numbers that result in a ``special losing result'' is one. In other words, the probability of a "specially outlier result" was set to be higher in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of a "specially outlier result" may be set lower in low probability mode than in high probability mode, and may be set to be the same in low probability mode and high probability mode. may have been done. Further, the probability of a "specially outlier result" may be set to 0 in at least one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

(14) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 creates a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by setting the win/fail lottery mode and the support mode, but there are other gaming states other than these. By setting , it is possible to create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. For example, the pachinko machine 1 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by varying the number of gaming times in which the high-frequency support mode is continued after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player by varying the number of gaming times in which the high probability mode is continued after the opening/closing execution mode ends. .

(15) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 stores the reservation information related to the upper operation port 25 in the reservation area Ra for the first result display section, and stores the reservation information related to the lower operation port 26 for the second result display section. By storing in the reservation area Rb, the reservation information related to the upper operation port 25 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 26 are stored separately. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 may store the reservation information related to the upper operation port 25 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 26 together.
(16) In this reference embodiment, the MPU 42 preferentially sets the reservation information related to the lower operation port 26 for use in playing the game, regardless of whether or not there is reservation information related to the upper operation port 25. On the other hand, the MPU 42 may set the reservation information related to the upper operation port 25 and the reservation information related to the lower operation port 26 for use in the game round in the winning order of the respective reservation information.

(17) In this reference embodiment, the main control device 4 sends a command to the audio lighting control device 5, and the audio lighting control device 5 analyzes the command and sends a command to the display control device 6. , was controlling the display control device 6. In response, the main control device 4 sends a command to the display control device 6, and the display control device 6 analyzes the command and sends a command to the sound light emission control device 5, thereby controlling the sound light emission. Control of the device 5 may also be executed. Note that the commands sent from the main control device 4 to the audio emission control device 5 and the commands sent from the audio emission control device 5 to the display control device 6 are not limited to the commands described in this reference embodiment, but are arbitrary.
(18) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main controller 4, a sound emission control device 5, and a display control device 6 as separate control devices. On the other hand, for example, the sound light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the sound light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be the main control device. It may be provided as the same control device as the control device 4.

(19) In this reference embodiment, the symbol display device 36 is configured to periodically scroll the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on winnings to the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. By starting the variable display of the symbols, a game replay effect was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effect of the game replay is not limited to the effect described in this reference form, but is arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 1 may perform a game replay by operating a movable decorative member provided on the game board 2 in combination with the symbol display device 36. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may perform a game replay by operating a combination of a light emitting means provided on the game board 2 and the symbol display device 36. Furthermore, for example, the pachinko machine 1 may perform a game round performance by operating these decorative members and light emitting means in combination with the symbol display device 36.

(20) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 executes an internal lottery (win/fail lottery and distribution lottery) based on winnings to the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26, and then the main display section 34 and The symbol display device 36 executes a variable display and, as a result of stopping the variable display, displays the result of an internal lottery conducted based on winnings in the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 34 and the symbol display device 36 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery performed after starting the variable display The results may be displayed. In this case, after starting the fluctuating display and before stopping the fluctuating display, an internal lottery may be executed and settings such as a stop result etc. may be executed.

(21) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main display section 34, and the main display section 34 executes a fluctuating display of symbols and displays the result of an internal lottery as a result of stopping the fluctuating display. was. On the other hand, for example, the main display section 34 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display regardless of the internal lottery result, and by randomly displaying the stop result, the main display section 34 may display the same stop result as the stop result of the variable display. The lottery results may be made indistinguishable. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 1 does not need to include the main display section 34.

(22) In this reference embodiment, the symbol display device 36 is configured to periodically scroll the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on the winning of the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. By starting the variable display of the symbols, a game replay effect was executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 36 may perform a game repeat effect on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (picture) that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery.

For example, the symbol display device 36 may set a predetermined area in at least one of an area narrower than the area for displaying the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and a peripheral area of the area for displaying the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When setting and stopping the variable display of the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, a symbol clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols displayed in this predetermined area may be displayed in a variable manner or may not be displayed during the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Here, the symbols displayed in the predetermined area may be characters, colors, or patterns that are difficult for the player to identify, or may be a combination of these. Furthermore, even if the characters, colors, and patterns are not difficult for the player to identify, mutually similar designs or combinations thereof may be used to make the characters difficult for the player to identify. According to this, for example, the manager of the game hall or the like can visually check the symbol display device 36 without checking the main display section 34 at the end of a game round, in the same way as when winning a jackpot lottery. It is possible to easily check whether or not a fraudulent act is being carried out to cause the pachinko machine 1 to perform the following behavior.

(23) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to operate independently, but it may be configured to transmit and receive information by linking with an external device such as a mobile phone. For example, a gaming machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine, and information on this optical code is transmitted to a camera installed in a mobile phone, etc. The gaming machine may be configured so that information about the gaming machine can be transmitted to a web server by capturing and reading an image and accessing a website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured so that the player can receive information from the web server by inputting the password issued by accessing the website into the gaming machine by operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine. You may.

(24) In this reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example of the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 1. For example, in the gaming machine of the present invention, when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that releases an electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates the right to win a jackpot when a game ball enters a specific area. Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention may be an arrangement ball machine, a mahjong ball machine, or other types of gaming machines.

[Reference form A]
Reference Embodiment A of the present invention will be described below based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration of display control device>
FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a display control device according to Reference Embodiment A of the present invention.
As shown in FIG. 29, the display control device 6 includes a display control board 61, an MPU 62, a program ROM 63 and a work RAM 64 constituting the MPU 62, a video display processor (VDP) 65, a character ROM 66, and a video display processor (VDP) 65. It is equipped with RAM67. Here, the MPU 62 is an element in which a program ROM 63, a work RAM 64, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc. are combined into a chip. Note that the MPU 62, VDP 65, character ROM 66, and video RAM 67 are mounted on the display control board 61.

The MPU 62 analyzes the command sent from the audio emission control device 5, performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on this command, and controls the VDP 65. Specifically, the MPU 62 executes control of the VDP 65 by generating commands for the VDP 65 .

The program ROM 63 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is a nonvolatile storage means that does not require an external power supply to retain stored information.
The work RAM 64 is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control program stored in the program ROM 63, and is a volatile memory that requires external power supply to retain the stored information. It is a storage means.

The VDP 65 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 36. Since the VDP 65 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and in reality, it can be said to be a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the video RAM 67.

The character ROM 66 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 36. This character ROM 66 holds bitmap format image data of various symbols, a color palette table, etc. that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.
The video RAM 67 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 36, and the display contents of the symbol display device 36 are changed by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 67.

This video RAM 67 includes an expansion buffer 68 and a frame buffer 69.
As described above, the VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 69. Note that one frame of drawing data refers to the data necessary to display the image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say something.

Here, the frame buffer 69 includes a plurality of frame areas 691A and 692A. Specifically, the frame buffer 69 includes a first frame area 691A and a second frame area 692A.

The first frame area 691A includes a first layer 691A1, a second layer 691A2 having a lower priority than the first layer 691A1, and a third layer 691A3 having a lower priority than the second layer 691A2. One frame's worth of drawing data is stored by overlapping the layers 691A1 to 691A3 in order of priority.
The second frame area 692 includes a first layer 692A1, a second layer 692A2 having a lower priority than the first layer 692A1, and a third layer 692A3 having a lower priority than the second layer 692A2. One frame's worth of drawing data is stored by overlapping the layers 692A1 to 692A3 in order of priority.
In the following description, the first layers 691A1 and 692A1 are also simply referred to as the first layer L1, the second layers 691A2 and 692A2 are also simply referred to as the second layer L2, and the third layers 691A3 and 692A3 are simply referred to as the third layer L1. Also referred to as layer L3.

Therefore, each of the layers L1 to L3 is set to have a capacity that can store one frame's worth of drawing data. Specifically, each of the layers L1 to L3 includes a large number of unit areas that correspond to dots (pixels) on the display screen G at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, each unit area employs a full-color system, and it is possible to set 256 colors for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). In other words, each unit area has a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) for each color of RGB, and has a total storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

In a situation where drawing data created in one frame area (for example, the first frame area 691) is being used to draw data on the symbol display device 36, the VDP 65 is configured to display data in another frame area (for example, the second frame area 692). ) to create the next drawing data to be used. In other words, the frame buffer 69 employs a double buffer system.

Further, the VDP 65 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 691 or the second frame area 692, and sends the image signal to the pattern display device 36. Output. More specifically, the VDP 65 transfers the drawing data to the frame areas 691 and 692 to be output. The VDP 65 adjusts the resolution of this drawing data using a scaler (not shown) and converts it into gradation data so that it corresponds to the resolution of the pattern display device 36. Then, the VDP 65 generates an image signal corresponding to each dot on the display screen G based on this gradation data, and outputs the image signal to the pattern display device 36.

In this reference embodiment, the audio emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute different processing from those in the reference embodiment. Specifically, in this reference embodiment, the suspension generation process and the production pattern determination process are different from those in the reference embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of the hold generation process and the performance pattern determination process in this reference embodiment will be explained.

<Pending occurrence processing>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hold generation process.
In the hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2201 to S2209 in substantially the same manner as in the reference embodiment. Specifically, the MPU 52 stores sub-side suspension information in the sub-side suspension information storage area 543 based on the content of the suspension generation command. Note that this reference embodiment differs from the reference embodiment in that the MPU 52 executes the processing of steps S2210A to S2212A after executing the processing of step S2204, as shown in FIG. 30.

In step S2201, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the first suspension generation command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that the first hold generation command has been received, in step S2202, the MPU 52 grasps the number of held items stored in the first sub-side holding area SRa, and determines the number of held items. The first sub-side start hold storage number SRaN is set in a predetermined storage area in the first sub-side hold area SRa. After that, the MPU 52 executes the processing from step S2204 onwards.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2201 that the first suspension generation command has not been received (that is, it has determined that the second suspension generation command has been received), then in step S2203, the MPU 52 The number of pending items stored in the second sub-side holding area SRb is grasped, and the number of pending items is set as the second sub-side starting pending storage number SRbN in a predetermined storage area in the second sub-side holding area SRb. After that, the MPU 52 executes the processing from step S2204 onwards.

After executing the process of step S2202 or step S2203, the MPU 52 updates the sub-side start pending storage number SN (SRaN or SRbN) by adding 1 to the value in step S2204.

In step S2210A, the MPU 52 determines whether the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode based on the contents of the hold generation command.
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is not the low-frequency support mode (if it determines that the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode), it executes the processes from step S2205 onwards.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, it executes the processes from step S2211A onwards.

First, a description will be given of the processing (processing after step S2205) when the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is not the low-frequency support mode.
In step S2205, the MPU 52 executes a lottery process for pending notice. In this advance notice suspension lottery process, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to determine whether or not advance notice suspension will occur.
Specifically, the MPU 52 uses the value of the notice suspension occurrence counter to perform a lottery to determine whether or not notice suspension is to be generated. Note that the advance notice pending occurrence counter is provided in various counter areas 542 of the RAM 54.

Here, the notice hold uses a notice display that changes the type of hold symbol, etc. to inform the player of the expectation level of the hold, and the effect of a game round based on the hold that expires before the hold. This is a hold that executes a notice display that generates a look-ahead effect that informs the player of the expectation level of the hold. Note that, in this reference embodiment, a preview suspension that executes a preview display that generates a look-ahead effect will be explained, and a description of a preview suspension that executes other preview displays will be omitted.

The advance notice suspension occurrence counter is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The advance notice suspension occurrence counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the advance notice suspension occurrence counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 54.
Then, the MPU 52 executes a lottery (notice suspension occurrence lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a notice suspension based on the value of the notice suspension occurrence counter stored in the notice suspension occurrence counter buffer. Specifically, the MPU 52 acquires the value of the notice hold occurrence counter stored in the notice hold occurrence counter buffer, and compares this value with the notice hold occurrence table to determine whether or not to cause notice hold. Execute the lottery. Note that the table for occurrence of advance notice suspension is a table that stores random number values related to occurrence of advance notice reservation, and is stored in the ROM 53.

In step S2206, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the lottery for generating notice suspension was won in step S2205 (whether or not notice suspension is to be generated).
If the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that notice suspension is to be generated, it executes notice suspension generation processing in step S2207. In this advance notice suspension generation process, the MPU 52 executes processing for generating advance notice suspension. Furthermore, based on the contents of this notice suspension generation process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the advance notice suspension information in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the sub-side suspension area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start suspension storage number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start pending storage number SRaN in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first sub-side pending area SRa, that is, the updated number in step S2204. The advance notice suspension information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first sub-side start suspension storage number SRaN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it corresponds to "4" of the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. The preview pending information is stored in a fourth area SRa4, which is a storage area for storing advance notices.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, the MPU 52 selects the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second sub-side pending area SRb, that is, in step S2204. The advance notice suspension information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the updated second sub-side start suspension storage number SRbN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it corresponds to "4" of the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. The preview pending information is stored in the fourth area SRb4, which is a storage area for storing the advance notice.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2207 that advance notice suspension is not to be generated, it executes normal suspension generation processing in step S2209. In this normal hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes processing for generating normal hold. Furthermore, based on the content of this normal hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the normal hold information in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the sub-side hold area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start hold storage number SN updated in step S2204.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN in step S2202, the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start pending storage number SRaN in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first sub-side pending area SRa, that is, the updated number in step S2204. Normal suspension information is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first sub-side startup suspension storage number SRaN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN to "3" in step S2202, it corresponds to "4" of the first sub-side start pending memory number SRaN updated in step S2204. The normal hold information is stored in the fourth area SRa4, which is a storage area for storage.

For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN in step S2203, the MPU 52 selects the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second sub-side pending area SRb, that is, in step S2204. Normal suspension information is stored in a storage area corresponding to the updated second sub-side start suspension storage number SRbN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it corresponds to "4" of the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. Normal pending information is stored in the fourth area SRb4, which is a storage area for storing the information.

Next, a description will be given of the processing (processing after step S2211A) when the MPU 52 determines in step S2210A that the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode.
In step S2211A, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the second suspension generation command transmitted from the MPU 42 has been received (whether or not the second sub-side start suspension storage number SRbN has been set in step S2203).

If the MPU 52 determines in step S2211A that the second suspension generation command has not been received, it executes the processes from step S2205 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2211A that the second hold generation command has been received, it executes special hold generation processing in step S2212A. In this special hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes a process for generating special hold. Furthermore, based on the content of this special hold generation process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the effect execution process of step S2004 described above.

Specifically, the MPU 52 stores the special reservation information in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the sub-side reservation area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start reservation storage number SN updated in step S2204.

Here, since the MPU 52 has set the second sub-side start pending storage number SRbN in step S2203, the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second sub-side pending area SRb, that is, updated in step S2204. The special reservation information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second sub-side start reservation storage number SRbN. For example, when the MPU 52 sets the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN to "3" in step S2203, it corresponds to "4" of the second sub-side start pending memory number SRbN updated in step S2204. The special reservation information is stored in the fourth area SRb4, which is a storage area where the special reservation information is stored.

In this way, the MPU 52 stores the special suspension information as sub-side suspension information in each area SRb1 to SRb4 in time series in accordance with the reception of the second suspension generation command. Note that each area SRb1 to SRb4 is set to have a storage capacity capable of storing special reservation information for generating special reservation.

After executing the advance notice hold generation process in step S2207, the normal hold generation process in step S2208, or the special hold generation process in step S2212A, the MPU 52 sets a hold display generation command in step S2209. Then, the MPU 52 stores the pending display generation command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This hold display generation command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

Based on the hold display generation command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out from the program ROM 63 a data table for causing the symbol display device 36 to generate advance notice hold, normal hold, or special hold. . Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays the preview pending symbol, the normal pending symbol, or the special pending symbol on the display screen G to inform the player of the occurrence of the advance notice pending, normal pending symbol, or special pending symbol.

In addition, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 programs a data table for executing normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold shifts on the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Read from ROM63. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays and executes the normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold shifts on the display screen G.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing advance notice pending symbols, normal pending symbols, and special pending symbols displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device.
As shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 62 has pedestals B11 to B14 provided corresponding to four storage areas, first area SRa1 to fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa, and a second sub-side holding area SRa. Pedestals B21 to B24 provided corresponding to four storage areas, first area SRb1 to fourth area SRb4 of area SRb, and an execution pedestal provided between pedestals B11 and B21 corresponding to execution area SAE. AB and A are displayed on the display screen G.

Note that the first holding lamp section 371 is provided corresponding to four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side holding area SRa from the left side to the right side. On the other hand, the pedestals B11 to B14 are provided corresponding to four storage areas, the first area SRa1 to the fourth area SRa4 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa, from the right side to the left side.
Further, the second holding lamp section 372 is provided corresponding to four storage areas, the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side holding area SRb from the left side to the right side. Similarly, the pedestals B21 to B24 are provided corresponding to the four storage areas of the first area SRb1 to the fourth area SRb4 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb from the left side to the right side.

Pedestals B11 to B14, pedestals B21 to B24, and execution pedestal AB can be used to generate a notice hold, normal hold, or special hold by placing a notice hold symbol, a normal hold symbol, or a special hold symbol thereon. Notify the player.
Specifically, the MPU 62 specifies that the normal hold information is stored in the storage area of the first sub-side hold area SRa based on the content of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. In this case, a white spherical picture, which is normally a reserved picture, is placed on the pedestals B11 to B14.
When the MPU 62 specifies that advance notice suspension information is stored in the storage area of the first sub-side suspension area SRa based on the contents of the suspension display generation command or the suspension display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, A flashing white sphere pattern, which is a preview pending pattern, is placed on the pedestals B11 to B14.

In addition, when the MPU 62 specifies that the normal hold information is stored in the storage area of the second sub-side hold area SRb based on the content of the hold display generation command or the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, places a white spherical picture, which is a normally reserved picture, on the pedestals B21 to B24.
When the MPU 62 specifies that advance notice reservation information is stored in the storage area of the second sub-side reservation area SRb based on the contents of the reservation display generation command or the reservation display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, On the pedestals B21 to B24, a blinking white sphere pattern, which is a preview pending pattern, is placed.
When the MPU 62 specifies that special reservation information is stored in the storage area of the second sub-side reservation area SRb based on the contents of the reservation display generation command or the reservation display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, A black sphere pattern, which is a special reserved pattern, is placed on the pedestals B21 to B24.

Furthermore, when the MPU 62 specifies that the normal hold information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays the normally held picture on the execution pedestal AB. Place a white sphere pattern.
When the MPU 62 determines that advance notice suspension information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the content of the command at the time of shift display of reservation transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays a notice suspension symbol on the execution pedestal AB. Place a flashing white sphere pattern.
When the MPU 62 determines that special suspension information is stored in the execution area SAE based on the contents of the suspension display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays a special suspension symbol on the execution pedestal AB. Place a black sphere pattern.

Here, in the example of FIG. 31, the MPU 62 places the normally reserved symbols on the pedestals B11 and B12, places the advance notice pending symbol on the pedestal B13, and places the normally reserved symbol on the execution pedestal AB. is listed. Further, in this example, the MPU 62 places a special reserved symbol on the pedestal B21. In other words, in this example, the support mode is a low frequency support mode. Furthermore, in this example, the MPU 62 does not place any designs on the pedestals B14, B22 to B24.
In addition, in this reference form, the symbols of normal reservation, advance notice reservation, and special reservation are different from each other, but any two of the symbols may be the same, or all the symbols may be the same. Further, in this reference embodiment, the MPU 62 displays the pedestals B11 to B14, the pedestals B21 to B24, and the execution pedestal AB on the display screen G, but it is not necessary to display each pedestal on the display screen G.

<About the effect determination process executed by the audio emission control device>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the production determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes a performance determination process in order to execute a performance for the game round, a performance for the opening/closing execution mode, and the like. In this performance determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S2401 to S2413 in substantially the same manner as in the reference embodiment. Note that this reference embodiment differs from the reference embodiment in that, as shown in FIG. 32, the MPU 52 executes the process of step S2407A after executing any of the processes of step S2403, step S2405, and step S2406. .

In step S2407A, the MPU 52 executes production pattern determination processing. In this performance pattern determination process, the MPU 52 selects a performance pattern corresponding to the variation command and type command by referring to the performance table stored in the ROM 53 in advance. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the performance duration time (performance duration period) and the content of the performance as the performance pattern. Note that in step S2407A, the MPU 52 also performs a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display.

Furthermore, based on the selected performance pattern, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above.
The production pattern determination process will be described in detail below.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the production pattern determination process.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes a performance pattern determination process to select the performance duration time (performance duration period) and the content of the performance as the performance pattern. In this performance pattern determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S3001 to S3011, as shown in FIG. 33.

In step S3001, it is determined whether the sub-side pending information shifted to the execution area SAE in the pending shift process is special pending information.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S3001 that the information is special reservation information, in step S3002, the MPU 52 executes special reservation effect determination processing. In this special hold performance determination process, the MPU 52 determines a performance for extinguishing the special hold. Furthermore, based on the content of this special reserved performance determination process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above.

In step S3003, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special pending performance command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing a special reservation extinguishing performance on the symbol display device 36 based on the special reservation performance command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays and executes an effect for extinguishing the special reservation on the display screen G.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side pending information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not special pending information, in step S3004, it sets a special pending effect end command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special pending performance end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold performance end command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 executes the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 (drawing data related to the effect for extinguishing the special hold) based on the special hold effect end command sent from the MPU 52. Clear.
In addition, in this reference embodiment, when the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side suspension information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not special suspension information, in step S3004, the MPU 52 always sets a special suspension effect end command, The MPU 62 had cleared the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special pending effect end command sent from the MPU 52. On the other hand, the MPU 52 may set the special pending performance end command only when drawing data has been created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69.

In step S3005, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in the hold shift process is advance notice hold information.
When the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is advance notice suspension information, the MPU 52 executes advance notice retention effect determination processing in step S3006. In this notice suspension performance determination process, the MPU 52 determines a performance (pre-reading performance) for extinguishing the notice suspension. Furthermore, based on the content of this preview pending performance determination process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above.

In step S3007, the MPU 52 sets a notice suspension effect command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the notice suspension effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the preview hold effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This notice suspension effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing a performance for extinguishing the preview suspension on the symbol display device 36 based on the preview suspension performance command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays and executes an effect for extinguishing the notice suspension on the display screen G.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the flow of pre-reading effect.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, the MPU 62 causes the pattern display device 36 to display an angel character holding a signboard displaying the word "Mystery" so as to fly around the entire display screen G. By doing so, the pre-read effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead performance is a performance for extinguishing a notice hold that informs the player of the expectation level of the hold by using the play of a game round based on the hold that is completed before the hold. Here, the VDP 65 displays a pre-read effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

The look-ahead effect is to make the angel character fly towards the center position with the upper right position of the display screen G as the flight start position (see Figure 34 (A)), and then fly the angel character from that position towards the upper left position. (See FIG. 34(B)). After that, the look-ahead effect starts the flight of the angel character by making the angel character fly from the upper left position (position shown in Figure 34 (B)) to the upper right position of the display screen G (see Figure 34 (C)). It is designed to be returned to its position. As shown in FIGS. 34(A) to 34(C), the look-ahead effect is such that the angel character is made to fly again in an infinite loop. Here, in this reference embodiment, the time required for one loop of the look-ahead effect is 10 seconds.

Returning to the description of the production pattern determination processing, the processing from step S3008 onwards will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S3008, the MPU 52 executes display duration accumulation processing. In this display continuation time accumulation process, each time the MPU 52 executes the preview pending performance determination process in step S3006, the MPU 52 calculates the cumulative display continuation time based on the contents of the variation command, and stores the cumulative time in the RAM 54. Make me remember. In other words, the cumulative display duration time indicates the time taken from the start to the end of the look-ahead effect. Here, the above-mentioned preview suspension effect command includes information related to the cumulative display duration time. Therefore, by receiving information regarding the cumulative display duration time from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 can grasp the starting point for making the angel character fly and the subsequent movements. Note that the initial value of the cumulative display duration time is "0", and the starting point of the angel character at this time is the flight start position.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is not the preview pending information, in step S3009, the MPU 52 sets a preview pending performance end command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the preview pending performance end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the preview hold performance end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This notice suspension performance end command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 executes the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for extinguishing the pending notice) that had been created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 based on the preview pending effect end command sent from the MPU 52. Clear.

In step S3010, the MPU 52 executes cumulative reset processing for display duration. In this cumulative display duration reset process, the MPU 52 assigns "0" to the cumulative display duration stored in the RAM 54 and resets it.

After executing the process of step S3003, after executing the process of step S3008, or after executing the process of step S3010, the MPU 52 executes other processes in step S3011. After that, the MPU 52 ends the performance pattern determination process. In other processes, the MPU 52 selects the effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and type command by referring to the effect table stored in the ROM 53 in advance. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the performance duration time (performance duration period) and the content of the performance as the performance pattern. In addition, in step S3011, the MPU 52 also performs a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display other than the prefetch effect.

<About the occurrence of look-ahead performance and the subsequent flow>
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when it is specified that advance notice reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area. Specifically, FIG. 35(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. 35(B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 35(C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 35(D) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69. , is a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.
In this example, the MPU 52 specifies that the normal hold information is stored in the first area SRa1 and the second area SRa2 of the first sub-side hold area SRa, and specifies that the normal hold information is stored in the execution area SAE. It has been determined that there are.

As shown in FIG. 35(A), the MPU 62 selects a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the variation start command sent from the MPU 52. By starting to display fluctuations in , a transition is made to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuating display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment). In the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variable start command related to the normal pending information stored in the execution area SAE.

Thereafter, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning lottery by stopping and displaying various symbol combinations on the active line L as the stopping result based on the stopping result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In addition, in this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays a plurality of symbol columns on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 35(B). Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, if the MPU 52 determines in step S2206 that advance notice suspension is to be generated, in step S2207, the MPU 52 executes advance notice retention generation processing, and stores advance notice retention information in the first memory of the free storage area of the sub-side retention area. area, that is, a storage area corresponding to the sub-side start pending storage number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 52 stores advance notice reservation information in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side reservation area SRa.
The MPU 62 displays the preview pending symbol on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the pending display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52 to notify the player of the occurrence of the pending notice.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that advance notice suspension information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side suspension area SRa based on the content of the suspension display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52, , a flashing white sphere pattern, which is a preview pending pattern, is placed on the pedestal B13. Here, the VDP 65 displays the preview pending pattern on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 35(B). .

Note that in the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for extinguishing the special hold, so the VDP 65 stores the drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 35(C). Not created. Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 35, the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for extinguishing the pending notice, so the VDP 65 transfers the drawing data to the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 35(D). Not created.

FIG. 36 shows the display screen of the symbol display device and the frame buffer when the first pending shift process is executed after it is specified that advance notice pending information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side pending area. It is a figure showing each layer of. Specifically, FIG. 36(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Further, FIG. 36(B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 36(C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 36(D) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69. , a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. FIG.

The MPU 62 displays and executes shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36(A), the MPU 62 moves the white sphere, which is a normal pending symbol, placed on the pedestal B11, based on the pending display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Shift and place the picture on the execution pedestal AB, shift and place the white sphere picture, which is a normally reserved picture placed on the pedestal B12, on the pedestal B11, The blinking white sphere picture, which is a notice pending picture placed on the pedestal B13, is shifted and placed on the pedestal B12. Here, as shown in FIG. 36(B), the VDP 65 displays the normally reserved symbols and the preview reserved symbols on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 36(A), the MPU 62 selects a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the variation start command sent from the MPU 52. By starting to display fluctuations in , a transition is made to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuating display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment). In the example of FIG. 36, the MPU 62 starts variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning lottery by stopping and displaying various symbol combinations on the active line L as the stopping result based on the stopping result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays a plurality of symbol columns on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 36(B). Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is advance notice hold information, and when it is determined that it is advance notice hold information in step S3005, In step S3006, executes a notice suspension effect determination process, and in step S3007 sets a notice postponement effect command.
Then, the MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to display and execute a performance for extinguishing the preview suspension based on the preview suspension performance command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 36(A), the MPU 62 controls the symbol display device 36 so that an angel character carrying a signboard displaying the word "monster" flies around the entire display screen G. By displaying this, the pre-read effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 and executed. This pre-read effect is a game based on a hold that is extinguished before the hold (in the example of FIG. 36, a hold related to the normal hold symbols placed on the execution pedestal AB and on the pedestal B11). A system for extinguishing a notice hold that informs the player of the expectation level of the hold (in the example of FIG. 36, the hold related to the notice hold symbol placed on the pedestal B12) by using the effect of the second time. It's a performance. Here, the VDP 65 displays the prefetch effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 36(D).

Further, in the example of FIG. 36, the MPU 62 receives the first preview suspension effect command after it is specified that the preview suspension information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side suspension area SRa. Therefore, the cumulative display duration included in this notice suspension effect command is "0". Therefore, the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly with the upper right position of the display screen G as the flight start position, as shown in FIGS. 36(A) and 36(D).

Note that in the example of FIG. 36, the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for extinguishing the special hold, so the VDP 65 stores the drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 36(C). Not created.

<About the flow when canceling the normal hold after the prefetch effect occurs>
FIG. 37 shows the display screen of the symbol display device and the frame buffer when the second hold shift process is executed after it is specified that advance notice hold information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side hold area. It is a figure showing each layer of. Specifically, FIG. 37(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. 37(B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 37(C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 37(D) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69. , is a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

The MPU 62 displays and executes shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(A), the MPU 62 moves the white sphere, which is a normal pending symbol, placed on the pedestal B11, based on the pending display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Shift and place the picture on the execution pedestal AB, and shift and place the flashing white sphere picture, which is a notice pending picture placed on the pedestal B12, on the pedestal B11. do. Here, as shown in FIG. 37(B), the VDP 65 displays the normally reserved symbols and the advance notice reserved symbols on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 37(A), the MPU 62 selects a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the variation start command sent from the MPU 52. By starting to display fluctuations in , a transition is made to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuating display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment). In the example of FIG. 37, the MPU 62 starts the variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning lottery by stopping and displaying various symbol combinations on the active line L as the stopping result based on the stopping result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In addition, in this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays a plurality of symbol columns on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 37(B). Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is advance notice hold information, and when it is determined that it is advance notice hold information in step S3005, In step S3006, executes a notice suspension effect determination process, and in step S3007 sets a notice postponement effect command.
Then, the MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to display and execute a performance for extinguishing the preview suspension based on the preview suspension performance command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37(A), the MPU 62 controls the symbol display device 36 so that an angel character holding a signboard displaying the word "Mystery" flies around the entire display screen G. By displaying this, the pre-read effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect utilizes the effect of a game round based on a hold that is extinguished before the hold (in the example of FIG. 37, the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on the execution pedestal AB). Accordingly, this is an effect for extinguishing the notice hold that informs the player of the expectation level of the hold (in the example of FIG. 37, the hold related to the notice hold symbol placed on the pedestal B11). Here, the VDP 65 displays the prefetch effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 37(D).

Further, in the example of FIG. 37, the MPU 62 receives the second preview holding effect command after it is specified that the preview holding information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side holding area SRa. Therefore, the cumulative display duration included in this notice suspension performance command is the same as the display duration of the previous game. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 37(A) and 37(D), the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly starting from the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead performance.

Here, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 executes the drawing data created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 (related to the effect for extinguishing the preview pending effect) based on the preview pending effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52. (drawing data). In other words, in the example of FIG. 37, the MPU 62 will receive the preview pending performance end command from the MPU 52 in the next game round, so based on this preview pending performance end command, the third The drawing data created in layer L3 (drawing data related to the performance for extinguishing the pending notice) is cleared.

In the example of FIG. 37, the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for extinguishing the special hold, so the VDP 65 stores the drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 37(C). Not created.

<About the flow when extinguishing the special hold after a look-ahead effect occurs>
FIG. 38 shows that after it is specified that advance notice reservation information is stored in the third area of the first sub-side reservation area, the first reservation shift process is executed, and then It is a figure which shows the display screen of a symbol display device and each layer of a frame buffer when it is specified that special reservation information is memorize|stored in an area. In other words, FIG. 38 shows the display screen of the symbol display device when it is specified that special reservation information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reservation area after the state shown in FIG. , and each layer of a frame buffer. Specifically, FIG. 38(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. 38(B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 38(C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 38(D) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69. , is a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

The MPU 62 displays and executes shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(A), the MPU 62 moves the white sphere, which is a normal pending symbol, placed on the pedestal B11, based on the pending display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Shift and place the picture on the execution pedestal AB, shift and place the white sphere picture, which is a normally reserved picture placed on the pedestal B12, on the pedestal B11, The blinking white sphere picture, which is a notice pending picture placed on the pedestal B13, is shifted and placed on the pedestal B12. Here, as shown in FIG. 38(B), the VDP 65 displays the normally reserved symbols and the preview reserved symbols on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 38(A), the MPU 62 selects a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the variation start command sent from the MPU 52. By starting to display fluctuations in , a transition is made to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuating display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment). In the example of FIG. 38, the MPU 62 starts variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning lottery by stopping and displaying various symbol combinations on the active line L as the stopping result based on the stopping result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays a plurality of symbol columns on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 38(B). Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is advance notice hold information, and when it is determined that it is advance notice hold information in step S3005, In step S3006, executes a notice suspension effect determination process, and in step S3007 sets a notice postponement effect command.
Then, the MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to display and execute a performance for extinguishing the preview suspension based on the preview suspension performance command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(A), the MPU 62 controls the symbol display device 36 so that an angel character holding a signboard displaying the word "Mystery" flies around the entire display screen G. By displaying this, the pre-read effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect is a game based on a hold that is extinguished before the hold (in the example of FIG. 38, a hold related to the normal hold symbols placed on the execution pedestal AB and on the pedestal B11). A system for extinguishing a notice hold that informs the player of the expectation level of the hold (in the example of FIG. 38, the hold related to the notice hold symbol placed on the pedestal B12) by using the effect of the second time. It's a performance. Here, the VDP 65 displays a pre-read effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 38(D).

Further, in the example of FIG. 38, the MPU 62 receives the first preview suspension effect command after it is specified that the preview suspension information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side suspension area SRa. Therefore, the cumulative display duration included in this notice suspension effect command is "0". Therefore, the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly with the upper right position of the display screen G as the flight start position, as shown in FIGS. 38(A) and 38(D).

Further, if the MPU 52 determines that the second hold generation command has been received in step S2211A, it executes special hold generation processing in step S2212A, and stores the special hold information in the free storage area of the sub-side hold area. It is stored in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the sub-side start pending storage number SN updated in step S2204. In the example of FIG. 38, the MPU 52 stores special reservation information in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb.
Based on the hold display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 displays special hold symbols on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to notify the player of the occurrence of the special hold.
Specifically, when the MPU 62 specifies that the special reservation information is stored in the first area SRb1 of the second sub-side reservation area SRb based on the contents of the reservation display generation command transmitted from the MPU 52, , a black spherical picture, which is a special reserved picture, is placed on the pedestal B21. Here, the VDP 65 displays the special reserved symbol on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 38(B). .

Note that in the example of FIG. 38, the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for extinguishing the special hold, so the VDP 65 stores the drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 38(C). Not created.

FIG. 39 shows the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. FIG. Specifically, FIG. 39(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. 39(B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 39(C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 39(D) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69. , a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. FIG.

The MPU 62 displays and executes shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(A), the MPU 62 moves the black sphere, which is a special pending symbol, placed on the pedestal B21, based on the pending display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Shift and place the picture on execution pedestal AB. Here, as shown in FIG. 39(B), the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, so that the normal pending pattern, the preview pending pattern, and the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 are displayed. and special reserved symbols are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 39(A), the MPU 62 selects a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the variation start command sent from the MPU 52. By starting to display fluctuations in , a transition is made to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuating display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment). In the example of FIG. 39, the MPU 62 starts a variable display based on a variable start command related to special pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning lottery by stopping and displaying various symbol combinations on the active line L as the stopping result based on the stopping result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In addition, in this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays a plurality of symbol columns on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 39(B). Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side suspension information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is special suspension information, and if it is determined in step S3001 that it is special suspension information, the MPU 52 performs step S3002. In step S3003, a special pending performance determination process is executed, and a special pending performance command is set.
Then, the MPU 62 displays and executes a performance for extinguishing the special reservation on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the special reservation performance command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(A), the MPU 62 causes the symbol display device 36 to display the words "If you reach, you have a chance!" at the top of the display screen G, and displays a treasure chest and this treasure chest. By displaying the angel character who is about to open at the center of the display screen G, a performance for extinguishing the special reservation is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 and executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 39(C), the VDP 65 creates an effect for extinguishing the special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69. it's shown.

In addition, the VDP 65 causes the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 to store data related to the effect for extinguishing the special hold so as to overwrite the data related to the prefetch effect stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. There is. Specifically, the VDP 65 darkens the background of the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so that the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 cannot be seen by the player. The second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 stores data related to the performance for extinguishing the special hold.

Note that in the example of FIG. 39, the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for extinguishing the pending notice, so the VDP 65 stores the drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 39(D). Not created (the angel character is stationary without flying around). In other words, the position of the angel is in a stationary state at the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead presentation.

Then, the MPU 62 displays and executes shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52. The subsequent flow is similar to the flow when the normal suspension is terminated after the prefetch effect occurs (see FIG. 37).

Here, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 transmits the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 (related to the special pending effect extinguishing effect) based on the special pending effect end command sent from the MPU 52. (drawing data). As a result, each layer L1 to L3 of the frame buffer 69 is in a state similar to that shown in FIG. 37.
In addition, as mentioned above, since the angel's position remains stationary at the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead performance, the MPU 62 performs a special suspension performance end command sent from the MPU 52. By clearing the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 (drawing data related to the effect for extinguishing special suspension), the prefetch effect can be restarted without making the player feel uncomfortable. I can do it.

In this manner, in this reference embodiment, the symbol display device 36 functions as a variable display means that performs a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. Further, in this reference embodiment, the sound emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 function as a performance execution means for causing the symbol display device 36 to perform a performance.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the advance notice suspension performance determination process in step S3006 is performed for a predetermined period (cumulative display duration time) based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25 (establishment of the first opportunity). It functions as a first performance means that causes the symbol display device 36 to perform a pre-read performance (first performance) over the period.
In addition, in this reference form, the special holding effect determination process in step S3002 is performed during a predetermined period based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26 (establishment of a second trigger different from the first trigger). It functions as a second performance means that causes the symbol display device 36 to execute a special reservation extinguishing performance (second performance) that overlaps with the pre-read performance and is different from the pre-read performance.
In this reference embodiment, the advance notice suspension performance determination process continues to execute the pre-read performance after the special suspension extinguishment performance ends.
In addition, in this reference form, continuously executing the first effect is not limited to the state in which the first effect is being operated after the end of the second effect, but also refers to the state in which the first effect is not displayed on the symbol display device 36. For example, it includes a state in which it is not operating (a state in which it is stationary).

According to this, even if the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which the symbol display device 36 executes a pre-reading effect for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, the special hold is After the performance for extinguishing the special hold is finished, the pre-reading performance can be continued to be performed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.

In addition, in this reference form, the advance notice holding performance determination process causes the symbol display device 36 to interrupt the pre-reading performance (Angel (The character is in a stationary state without flying around), when the special hold effect determination process causes the symbol display device 36 to end the effect for extinguishing the special hold, the symbol display device 36 restarts the look-ahead effect. There is.

According to this, the advance notice suspension performance determination process causes the symbol display device 36 to interrupt the look-ahead performance when the symbol display device 36 executes the performance for extinguishing the special suspension in the special suspension performance determination process, and the special suspension performance When the symbol display device 36 ends the performance for extinguishing the special reservation in the determination process, the symbol display device 36 restarts the prefetch performance, so even if the prefetch performance is being executed, the prefetch performance is interrupted. The special reservation extinguishing performance can be executed, and after the special reservation extinguishing performance is finished, the pre-reading performance can be restarted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can reliably allow players to enjoy the look-ahead performance.

Furthermore, in this reference embodiment, the special pending effect determination process in step S3002 is performed by storing data related to the prefetch effect in the third layer L3 (first effect layer) of the frame buffer 69, so that the symbol display device 36 can perform the prefetch effect. The effect (first effect) is executed, and the special pending effect determination process in step S3002 transfers data related to the effect for extinguishing the special hold to the frame buffer 69 that has a higher priority than the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. By storing it in the second layer L2 (second presentation layer), the symbol display device 36 is made to execute a special reservation extinguishment presentation (second presentation).
Further, in this reference embodiment, the frame buffer 69 outputs an image to the pattern display device 36 by overlapping a plurality of layers (each layer L1 to L3) including the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 in order of priority. It functions as an image composition means for display.
Then, in the special pending effect determination process in step S3002, data related to the effect for extinguishing the special pending effect is transferred to the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 so as to overwrite the data related to the prefetch effect stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. 2 layer L2.

According to this, the frame buffer 69 displays an image on the symbol display device 36 by superimposing a plurality of layers including the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 in order of priority, so the advance notice suspension performance determination process On top of the third layer L3 in which data related to the pre-read effect based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25 is stored, the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26 is stored in the special holding effect determination process. An image can be displayed on the symbol display device 36 by superimposing the second layer L2 storing data related to the performance for extinguishing the special reservation based on the above. Then, in the special hold effect determination process, data related to the effect for extinguishing the special hold is stored in the second layer L2 so as to overwrite the data related to the prefetch effect stored in the third layer L3. To overwrite and execute a performance for extinguishing a special reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26 even when a pre-reading performance based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26 is executed. After the performance for extinguishing the special hold is completed, the data related to the performance for extinguishing the special hold stored in the second layer L2 is deleted, so that the preview hold effect determination process in step S3006 is performed as a pre-read effect. can be executed continuously.

In addition, in this reference form, the sub-side holding information storage area 543 is information that stores a plurality of pieces of holding information (sub-side holding information) based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25 or the lower operating port 26. Functions as a memory device.
The sub-side pending information storage area 543 includes an execution area SAE (execution area) for storing pending information while variable display is being executed on the symbol display device 36, and an execution area SAE (execution area) for storing pending information while variable display is being executed on the symbol display device 36; It includes a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb (a plurality of holding areas) that store holding information in a pending state.

Further, the hold determination process in step S2002 is performed as an information storage means for storing hold information (sub-side hold information) in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 in the order in which game balls enter the upper operating port 25 or the lower actuating port 26. Function.
Further, the hold determination process in step S2002 includes the process in step S2202 to store hold information in the first sub-side hold area SRa (first hold area) based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25 ( Based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26, the holding information is stored in the second sub-side holding area SRb (second holding area) which is different from the first sub-side holding area SRa. The process of storing step S2203 (second pending storage means) and the pending shift of step S2104 of shifting the pending information stored in the first sub-side holding area SRa and the second sub-side holding area SRb toward the execution area SAE. processing (hold shift means).
Then, in the suspension shift process in step S2104, the suspension information stored in the second sub-side suspension area SRb is shifted preferentially toward the execution area SAE.

According to this, the hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE, so that the hold shift process is based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25. Even if the prefetch effect is executed based on the reservation information stored in the first sub-side holding area SRa, the second sub-side holding area is An effect for extinguishing special reservations can be executed based on the reservation information stored in area SRb.

Note that in this reference embodiment, the hold shift process in step S2104 preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE; It is not necessary to preferentially shift the reservation information stored in SRb toward the execution area SAE; for example, the reservation information stored in the first sub-side reservation area SRa and the second sub-side reservation area SRb may not be shifted preferentially toward the execution area SAE. They may be shifted toward the execution area SAE in order.

In addition, since the first performance is a look-ahead performance, based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25, a look-ahead performance based on the hold information stored in the first sub-side hold area SRa is executed. In this state, when a game ball enters the lower operating port 26, a pre-read performance is executed to execute a special hold extinguishing effect based on the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb. This will damage the continuity of the According to the present reference embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is able to perform a special hold even when the symbol display device 36 executes a pre-reading performance for a predetermined period based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25. It is possible to execute the performance for extinguishing the special hold, and after the end of the performance for extinguishing the special hold, the pre-reading performance can be continued to be executed, so it is possible to make the player comfortable without losing the continuity of the pre-reading performance. can be played.

In this reference form, the first effect is a look-ahead effect, but other effects may be used, such as a preview display that changes the type of pending symbols, etc., in order to inform the player of the expectation level of the pending effect. There may be.
Further, in this reference form, the second performance is a performance for extinguishing the special hold, but for example, it may be a performance that prompts the player to press a push button, The effect may be such that the image displayed on the display screen G is gradually enlarged. Further, the second performance is not limited to displaying an image on the symbol display device 36, but may be a performance such as driving an accessory, for example. In short, the first performance and the second performance may be any type of performance, and the second performance may be any performance as long as it is performed overlappingly with the first performance. Here, in this reference embodiment, duplication refers to a state in which the execution of the second effect makes it impossible to visually recognize the first effect.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the hold generation process in step S2102 is based on the hold information (sub-side hold information) stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543, and displays the hold symbols associated with this hold information. It functions as an information notification means to be displayed on the device 36.
Then, in the hold generation process of step S2102, the held symbols are displayed on the symbol display device 36 by storing the data related to the held symbols in the first layer L1 (layer for pending symbols), which has a higher priority than the second layer L2. It is displayed.

According to this, the pending occurrence process displays the pending symbols on the symbol display device 36 by storing the data related to the pending symbols in the first layer L1, which has a higher priority than the second layer L2, so that the pending symbols are displayed in advance. And when executing a performance for extinguishing special reservation, the reserved symbols can be surely displayed on the symbol display device 36 without overwriting the reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display device 36.

In addition, in this reference form, the suspension occurrence process causes the symbol display device 36 to display the suspended symbol by storing data related to the suspended symbol in the first layer L1, which has a higher priority than the second layer L2. .
On the other hand, the information notification means may cause the variable display means to display the pending symbols by storing data related to the pending symbols in both the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer.
According to this, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the pending symbol by storing data related to the pending symbol in both the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer, so that the first presentation is And when the second effect is executed, the pending symbols displayed on the variable display means can be reliably displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the pending symbols. Further, the information notification means can reliably display the pending symbol on the variable display means without using a new layer.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the second performance means immediately ends the performance for extinguishing the special reservation on the symbol display device 36 by setting a special reservation performance end command in step S3004.
According to this, the second performance means causes the symbol display device 36 to immediately end the performance for extinguishing the special reservation all at once, so it is possible to quickly end the performance for extinguishing the special reservation.

In addition, in this reference form, the advance notice suspension effect determination process of step S3006 is based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25, and the data related to the prefetch effect (first effect) is stored in the third buffer of the frame buffer 69. By storing the data in layer L3 (first production layer), it functions as a first production means for causing the symbol display device 36 to execute a pre-read production, and the special pending production determination process in step S3002 is a game input to the lower operation opening 26. Based on the entry of the ball, the data related to the special suspension performance (second performance) that is different from the look-ahead performance is transferred to the second layer of the frame buffer 69, which has a higher priority than the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. By storing it in L2 (second presentation layer), it functioned as a second presentation means for causing the symbol display device 36 to execute a presentation for extinguishing the special reservation.

On the other hand, the advance notice reservation performance determination process in step S3006 and the special reservation performance determination process in step S3002 are based on the data related to the pre-read performance (first performance) and the performance for extinguishing the special reservation (second performance). By storing such data in the same layer, the symbol display device 36 may be made to perform a pre-reading effect and a special pending effect.
In addition, in the advance notice holding performance determination process of step S3006 and the special holding performance determination process of step S3002, the prefetch performance and special hold performance are displayed on the symbol display device 36 based on the entry of the game ball into the same starting ball entry means. You may also perform a special performance.

In this way, the first effect means and the second effect means execute a specific effect on the variable display means by storing data related to a specific effect in the specific effect layer based on the establishment of a specific opportunity. It suffices if it functions as a specific production means to
In this reference embodiment, the suspension generation process in step S2102 transfers data related to a common image (the suspended symbol and each symbol row Z1 to Z3) different from the specific rendering to the specific rendering layer (the second layer L2 and the second layer L2). The common image is displayed on the symbol display device 36 by storing it in the common layer (first layer L1) which has a higher priority than the third layer L3).

According to this, the hold generation process in step S2102 transfers data related to a common image (holding symbol and each symbol row Z1 to Z3) different from the look-ahead effect and the effect for extinguishing the special hold to the specific effect layer (the By storing the common image in the common layer (first layer L1) which has a higher priority than the second layer L2 and the third layer L3), the common image is displayed on the symbol display device 36, so that the pre-read effect and the special reservation can be used. When performing a special performance, the common image can be surely displayed on the symbol display device 36 without overwriting the common image displayed on the symbol display device 36.

In addition, in this reference form, the second distribution table that is referred to when a jackpot type is drawn based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winnings to the lower operating port 26 is The value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on winnings is more easily distributed to the "most advantageous result" than the first distribution table that is referred to when a jackpot type is drawn. In other words, the performance for extinguishing the special reservation (second performance) based on the winning of a game ball to the lower operating port 26 is different from the pre-reading performance (first performance) based on the winning of a game ball to the upper operating port 25. ) is more useful to players.

According to this, since the performance for extinguishing the special reservation is more useful for the player than the look-ahead performance, the player pays attention to whether or not the performance for extinguishing the special reservation is executed during the predetermined period. I will do it. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.

In addition, in this reference form, the second effect was more useful for the player than the first effect because it was easier to sort into the "most advantageous result," but the second effect was , any kind of presentation may be employed as the first presentation and the second presentation, as long as the presentation is more useful to the player than the first presentation.
For example, a first game round based on the ball entering the first starting ball entering section and a second game round based on the ball entering the second starting ball entering section are executed in parallel. In the gaming machine, if you win or are likely to win in the second game round, the second performance is executed in the second game round to overlap with the first performance that is being executed in the first game round. By executing the second performance, the second performance may become a performance that is more useful to the player than the first performance.
In addition, for example, in a gaming machine configured to execute an electric prize game round during an opening/closing execution mode related to an electric accessory opening lottery based on a ball entering a through gate, the electric prize game round may be won or won. If this is likely to happen, the second performance is executed in the Denyaku game round overlapping with the first performance during the opening/closing execution mode, so that the second performance is more useful to the player than the first performance. It may be a performance.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the MPU 62 creates a pre-reading effect by displaying on the pattern display device 36 an angel character carrying a signboard displaying the word "Mystery" so as to fly around the entire display screen G. was running. Then, when the MPU 62 continues to execute the look-ahead effect after the end of the effect for extinguishing the special suspension, the MPU 62 displays an angel character holding a signboard displaying the word "monster" over the entire display screen G. A pre-read effect was performed by displaying the symbols on the pattern display device 36 so as to make them fly around. In other words, the look-ahead performance was one type of performance.

On the other hand, the first performance means may cause the variable display means to perform a first performance having a plurality of expectations over a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity. For example, the MPU 62 creates a look-ahead effect with low expectations by displaying on the pattern display device 36 an angel character carrying a signboard displaying the word "Mystery" so as to fly around the entire display screen G. By displaying an angel character holding a signboard displaying the word "heat" on the pattern display device 36 so as to fly around the entire display screen G, a highly anticipated look-ahead effect is executed. You can.

When the variable display means is configured to execute a first effect having a plurality of expectations over a predetermined period, the first effect causes the second effect to execute a second effect. The expectation level of the first performance may be changed during the overlapping period. For example, the MPU 62 executes a pre-reading effect by displaying on the pattern display device 36 an angel character carrying a signboard displaying the word "Mystery" so as to fly around the entire display screen G. When the pre-reading effect is to be continued after the end of the pending performance, an angel character holding a signboard displaying the word "heat" is designed to fly around the entire display screen G. A look-ahead effect may be executed by displaying it on the display device 36.

According to this, even if the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which the symbol display device 36 executes a pre-reading effect for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, the special hold is The expectation level of the pre-read performance can be changed during the overlapping period in which the performance for extinguishing the special reservation is executed in the special reservation performance determination process. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.

According to this embodiment of the present invention, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) Even if the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which the symbol display device 36 executes a pre-reading performance for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operation opening 25, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to The performance can be executed, and the pre-reading performance can be continued to be executed after the performance for extinguishing the special hold is finished. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play comfortably.
(2) The advance notice suspension performance determination process causes the symbol display device 36 to interrupt the pre-read performance when the symbol display device 36 executes the performance for extinguishing the special reservation in the special reservation performance determination process, and the special reservation performance determination process When the symbol display device 36 ends the performance for extinguishing the special reservation, the symbol display device 36 is made to restart the pre-reading performance, so even if the pre-reading performance is being executed, the pre-reading performance can be interrupted. A performance for extinguishing the special reservation can be executed, and after the performance for extinguishing the special reservation is finished, the look-ahead performance can be restarted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can reliably allow players to enjoy the look-ahead performance.

(3) The frame buffer 69 displays an image on the symbol display device 36 by overlapping a plurality of layers including the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 in order of priority, so in the advance notice suspension effect determination process. On the third layer L3 in which data related to the pre-read effect based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operating port 25 is stored, data is stored based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26 in the special holding effect determination process. An image can be displayed on the symbol display device 36 by superimposing the second layer L2 storing data related to the performance for extinguishing the special reservation. Then, in the special hold effect determination process, data related to the effect for extinguishing the special hold is stored in the second layer L2 so as to overwrite the data related to the prefetch effect stored in the third layer L3. To overwrite and execute a performance for extinguishing a special reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the lower operating port 26 even when a pre-reading performance based on the entry of the game ball into the lower operating port 26 is executed. After the performance for extinguishing the special hold is completed, the data related to the performance for extinguishing the special hold stored in the second layer L2 is deleted, so that the preview hold effect determination process in step S3006 is performed as a pre-read effect. can be executed continuously.

(4) The hold shift process preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second sub-side hold area SRb toward the execution area SAE, so based on the entry of the game ball into the upper operation opening 25, Even if the prefetch effect is executed based on the reservation information stored in the first sub-side holding area SRa, the second sub-side holding area SRb It is possible to execute a performance for extinguishing a special hold based on the hold information stored in the.
(5) Even if the pachinko machine 1 is in a state in which the symbol display device 36 executes a pre-reading performance for a predetermined period of time based on the entry of a game ball into the upper operating port 25, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to Since the pre-reading effect can be continued to be executed after the special pending performance has ended, the player can play the game comfortably without losing the continuity of the pre-reading effect. can.

(6) The pending occurrence process displays the pending symbols on the symbol display device 36 by storing the data related to the pending symbols in the first layer L1, which has a higher priority than the second layer L2. When executing the performance for extinguishing the reservation, the reserved symbols can be surely displayed on the symbol display device 36 without overwriting the reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display device 36.
(7) Since the second performance means causes the symbol display device 36 to immediately end the performance for extinguishing the special reservation all at once, it is possible to quickly end the performance for extinguishing the special reservation.

[Reference form B]
Reference Embodiment B of the present invention will be described below based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.
In the above-mentioned reference form A, the advance notice suspension performance determination process causes the symbol display device 36 to interrupt the pre-read performance (the angel's (The character is in a stationary state without flying around), and when the special pending effect determination process causes the symbol display device 36 to end the special pending effect, the pattern display device 36 is made to restart the pre-read effect. .
On the other hand, in this reference embodiment, the advance notice suspension performance determination process continues the prefetch performance during the overlapping period in which the symbol display device 36 is made to execute the special suspension extinguishment performance in the special suspension performance determination process. This embodiment differs from the above-mentioned reference embodiment A in that it is executed using the same method.

In this reference embodiment, the audio light emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute processing different from that in reference embodiment A described above. Specifically, in this reference form, the production pattern determination process is different from the reference form A described above. Hereinafter, the contents of the production pattern determination process in this reference embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the production pattern determination process according to Reference Embodiment B of the present invention.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes a performance pattern determination process to select the performance duration time (performance duration period) and the content of the performance as the performance pattern. In this performance pattern determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S3001 to S3011 similarly to reference form A. Note that this reference embodiment differs from reference embodiment A in that, as shown in FIG. 40, the MPU 52 executes the process of step S3012B after executing the process of step S3003.

In step S3012B, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in the hold shift process is advance notice hold information.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S3012B that the information is advance notice suspension information, it executes the processes from step S3006 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S3012B that the information is not advance notice pending information, it executes the processes from step S3011 described above.
In this way, in this reference embodiment, when it is specified that advance notice hold information is stored in the storage area of the sub-side hold area, the MPU 52 creates a performance for extinguishing the special hold in the special hold performance determination process. At the same time, a pre-reading performance is executed in a notice suspension performance determination process.

<About the flow when extinguishing the special hold after a look-ahead effect occurs>
FIG. 41 shows the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of the frame buffer when the hold shift process is executed after it is specified that the special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. FIG. In other words, FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a case where, after the state shown in FIG. 38 in reference form A is reached, a performance for extinguishing the special hold is executed. Specifically, FIG. 41(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. Further, FIG. 41(B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 41(C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 41(D) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69. , is a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69.

The MPU 62 displays and executes shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41(A), the MPU 62 moves the black sphere, which is a special pending symbol, placed on the pedestal B21, based on the pending display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Shift and place the picture on execution pedestal AB. Here, as shown in FIG. 41(B), the VDP 65 creates drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, so that the normal pending pattern, the preview pending pattern, and the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 are displayed. and special pending symbols are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 41(A), the MPU 62 selects a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the variation start command sent from the MPU 52. By starting to display fluctuations in , a transition is made to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuating display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment). In the example of FIG. 41, the MPU 62 starts a variable display based on a variable start command related to special pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning lottery by stopping and displaying various symbol combinations on the active line L as the stopping result based on the stopping result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays a plurality of symbol columns on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 41(B). Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side suspension information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is special suspension information, and if it is determined in step S3001 that it is special suspension information, the MPU 52 performs step S3002. In step S3003, a special pending performance determination process is executed, and a special pending performance command is set.
Then, the MPU 62 displays and executes a performance for extinguishing the special reservation on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the special reservation performance command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41(A), the MPU 62 causes the symbol display device 36 to display the words "If you reach, you have a chance!" at the top of the display screen G, and displays a treasure chest and this treasure chest. By displaying the angel character who is about to open at the center of the display screen G, a performance for extinguishing the special reservation is displayed on the display screen G of the pattern display device 36 and executed. Here, as shown in FIG. 41(C), the VDP 65 creates an effect for extinguishing the special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69. it's shown.

In addition, the VDP 65 causes the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 to store data related to the effect for extinguishing the special hold so as to overwrite the data related to the prefetch effect stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. There is. Specifically, the VDP 65 darkens the background of the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 so that the data related to the look-ahead effect stored in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 cannot be seen by the player. The second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 stores data related to the performance for extinguishing the special hold.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in step S3012B is advance notice hold information, and when it is determined that it is advance notice hold information in step S3012B, In step S3006, executes a notice suspension effect determination process, and in step S3007 sets a notice postponement effect command.
Then, the MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to display and execute a performance for extinguishing the preview suspension based on the preview suspension performance command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 41(D), the MPU 62 controls the symbol display device 36 so that an angel character holding a signboard displaying the word "Mystery" flies around the entire display screen G. By displaying this, the pre-read effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 and executed. This pre-read effect is a game based on a hold that is extinguished before the hold (in the example of FIG. 41, a hold related to the normal hold symbols placed on the execution pedestal AB and the pedestal B11). A system for extinguishing a notice hold that informs the player of the expectation level of the hold (in the example of FIG. 41, the hold related to the notice hold symbol placed on the pedestal B12) by using the effect of the second time. It's a performance. Here, the VDP 65 displays a prefetch effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 41(D).

Further, in the example of FIG. 41, the MPU 62 receives the second preview hold effect command after it is specified that the preview hold information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side hold area SRa. Therefore, the cumulative display duration included in this notice suspension performance command is the same as the display duration of the previous game. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41(D), the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly starting from the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead performance.

FIG. 42 shows the display screen of the symbol display device and the frame buffer when the second hold shift process is executed after it is specified that special hold information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side hold area. It is a figure showing each layer of. Specifically, FIG. 42(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. 42(B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 42(C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 42(D) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69. , a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. FIG.

The MPU 62 displays and executes shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42(A), the MPU 62 moves the white sphere, which is a normal pending symbol, placed on the pedestal B11, based on the pending display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Shift and place the picture on the execution pedestal AB, and shift and place the flashing white sphere picture, which is a notice pending picture placed on the pedestal B12, on the pedestal B11. do. Here, as shown in FIG. 42(B), the VDP 65 displays the normally reserved symbols and the preview reserved symbols on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 42(A), the MPU 62 selects a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the variation start command sent from the MPU 52. By starting to display fluctuations in , a transition is made to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuating display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment). In the example of FIG. 42, the MPU 62 starts variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning lottery by stopping and displaying various symbol combinations on the active line L as the stopping result based on the stopping result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays a plurality of symbol columns on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 42(B). Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is advance notice hold information, and when it is determined that it is advance notice hold information in step S3005, In step S3006, executes a notice suspension effect determination process, and in step S3007 sets a notice postponement effect command.
Then, the MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to display and execute a performance for extinguishing the preview suspension based on the preview suspension performance command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42(A), the MPU 62 controls the symbol display device 36 so as to cause an angel character carrying a signboard displaying the word "Mystery" to fly around the entire display screen G. By displaying this, the pre-read effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect utilizes the effect of a game round based on a hold that is extinguished before the hold (in the example of FIG. 42, the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on the execution pedestal AB). Accordingly, this is an effect for extinguishing the notice hold that informs the player of the expectation level of the hold (in the example of FIG. 42, the hold related to the notice hold symbol placed on the pedestal B11). Here, the VDP 65 displays a prefetch effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 42(D).

Further, in the example of FIG. 42, the MPU 62 receives the third preview suspension effect command after it is specified that the preview suspension information is stored in the third area SRa3 of the first sub-side suspension area SRa. Therefore, the cumulative display continuation time included in this preview suspension performance command is the same as the total display continuation time of the previous game and the game before the previous game. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 42(A) and 42(D), the MPU 62 causes the angel character to fly starting from the position of the angel at the end of the previous look-ahead performance.

Here, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 executes the drawing data created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 (related to the effect for extinguishing the preview pending effect) based on the preview pending effect end command transmitted from the MPU 52. (drawing data). In other words, in the example of FIG. 42, the MPU 62 will receive the preview pending performance end command from the MPU 52 in the next game round, so based on this preview pending performance end command, the third The drawing data created in layer L3 (drawing data related to the performance for extinguishing the pending notice) is cleared.

In the example of FIG. 42, the MPU 62 does not execute the effect for extinguishing the special hold, so the VDP 65 stores the drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 42(C). Not created.

As described above, in this reference embodiment, the advance notice holding effect determination process continues the prefetch effect during the overlapping period in which the symbol display device 36 is made to execute the special hold extinguishing effect in the special hold effect determination process. I am running it.

According to this, the advance notice suspension performance determination process causes the symbol display device 36 to continue executing the prefetch performance during the overlapping period in which the special suspension performance determination process is causing the symbol display device 36 to execute the performance for extinguishing the special reservation. The pre-read performance can be continuously executed regardless of the performance for extinguishing the special reservation. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to enjoy the flow of the pre-read performance.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same actions and effects as (1), (3) to (7) in reference embodiment A, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(8) The advance notice suspension performance determination process causes the symbol display device 36 to continue executing the pre-read performance during the overlapping period in which the special suspension performance is executed in the special suspension performance determination process. The pre-reading effect can be continuously executed regardless of the effect for digestion. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to enjoy the flow of the pre-read performance.

[Reference form C]
Reference Embodiment C of the present invention will be described below based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the reference form A, if the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side hold information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not special hold information, in step S3004, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect end command and controls the display. The MPU 62 of the device 6 clears the drawing data (drawing data related to the special pending effect) created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special pending effect end command sent from the MPU 52. Was.
In contrast, in this reference embodiment, even if the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side pending information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not special pending information, the MPU 52 shifts the sub-side pending information to the storage area of the sub-side pending area. This embodiment differs from Reference Embodiment A in that, when the sub-side pending information is advance notice pending information, the MPU 62 of the display control device 6 does not immediately clear the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69. .

In this reference embodiment, the audio emission control device 5 and the display control device 6 execute different processing from that in the reference embodiment A described above. Specifically, in this reference form, the process of determining the effect pattern is different from the reference form A described above. Hereinafter, the contents of the production pattern determination process in this reference embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the production pattern determination process according to Reference Embodiment C of the present invention.
The MPU 52 of the sound emission control device 5 executes a production pattern determination process to select the production duration time (production duration period) and the content of the production as the production pattern. In this performance pattern determination process, the MPU 52 executes steps S3001 to S3011, as shown in FIG. 43.

In step S3001, it is determined whether the sub-side pending information shifted to the execution area SAE in the pending shift process is special pending information.

When the MPU 52 determines in step S3001 that the information is special reservation information, in step S3002, the MPU 52 executes special reservation effect determination processing. In this special hold performance determination process, the MPU 52 determines a performance for extinguishing the special hold. Furthermore, based on the content of this special reserved performance determination process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above.

In step S3003, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special pending performance command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing a special reservation extinguishing performance on the symbol display device 36 based on the special reservation performance command sent from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays and executes an effect for extinguishing the special reservation on the display screen G.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines that the sub-side pending information shifted to the execution area SAE in step S3001 is not special pending information, it executes the processes from step S3005 onwards.
In step S3005, the MPU 52 determines whether the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in the hold shift process is advance notice hold information.

If the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is advance notice suspension information, the MPU 52 executes advance notice retention effect determination processing in step S3006. In this preview pending performance determination process, the MPU 52 determines a performance for extinguishing the pending notice (pre-reading performance). Furthermore, based on the content of this preview pending performance determination process, the MPU 52 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 124 and audio control of the speaker unit 125 in the performance execution process of step S2004 described above.

In step S3007, the MPU 52 sets a notice suspension effect command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the notice suspension effect command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the preview hold effect command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This notice suspension effect command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 reads out from the program ROM 63 a data table for executing a performance for extinguishing the preview suspension on the symbol display device 36 based on the preview suspension performance command transmitted from the MPU 52. Then, the MPU 62 outputs a command to the VDP 65 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (eg, 20 msec cycle) occurs. The VDP 65 reads image data from the character ROM 66 based on the contents of the command generated by the MPU 62, and stores this image data in the expansion buffer 68. Further, the VDP 65 uses (or processes) the image data stored in the expansion buffer 68 to create drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. As a result, the symbol display device 36 displays and executes an effect for extinguishing the notice suspension on the display screen G.

In step S3008, the MPU 52 executes display duration accumulation processing. In this display continuation time accumulation process, each time the MPU 52 executes the preview pending effect determination process in step S3006, the MPU 52 calculates the cumulative display continuation time based on the contents of the variation command, and stores the cumulative time in the RAM 54. Make me remember. In other words, the cumulative display duration time indicates the time taken from the start to the end of the look-ahead effect. Here, the above-mentioned preview suspension effect command includes information related to the cumulative display duration time. Therefore, by receiving information regarding the cumulative display duration time from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 can grasp the starting point for making the angel character fly and the subsequent movements. Note that the initial value of the cumulative display duration time is "0", and the starting point of the angel character at this time is the flight start position.

In step S3013C, the MPU 52 sets a special hold effect fade out command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special pending effect fade-out command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect fade-out command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold effect fade-out command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 draws the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for extinguishing the special hold) created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 based on the special hold effect fade-out command sent from the MPU 52. is cleared so as to fade out from the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 toward the periphery.

On the other hand, if the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is not the preview pending information, in step S3009, the MPU 52 sets a preview pending performance end command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the preview pending performance end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side pending information stored in the sub-side pending information storage area 543 is included in the preview pending performance end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This notice suspension performance end command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the command transmission process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 executes the drawing data (drawing data related to the effect for extinguishing the pending notice) that had been created in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69 based on the preview pending effect end command sent from the MPU 52. Clear.

In step S3010, the MPU 52 executes cumulative reset processing for display duration. In this cumulative display duration reset process, the MPU 52 assigns "0" to the cumulative display duration stored in the RAM 54 and resets it.

In step S3004C, the MPU 52 sets a special hold performance end command. Then, the MPU 52 stores the special pending performance end command in the command list stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. Here, the sub-side hold information stored in the sub-side hold information storage area 543 is included in the special hold effect end command stored in the command list storage area 541 of the RAM 54. This special hold performance end command is sent to the display control device 6 in the command sending process of step S2006 described above.

The MPU 62 of the display control device 6 executes the drawing data created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69 (drawing data related to the effect for extinguishing the special hold) based on the special hold effect end command sent from the MPU 52. Clear.

After executing the process of step S3003, after executing the process of step S3013C, or after executing the process of step S3004C, the MPU 52 executes other processes in step S3011. After that, the MPU 52 ends the performance pattern determination process. In other processes, the MPU 52 selects the effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and type command by referring to the effect table stored in the ROM 53 in advance. Specifically, the MPU 52 selects the performance duration time (performance duration period) and the content of the performance as the performance pattern. In addition, in step S3011, the MPU 52 also performs a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a preview display other than the prefetch effect.

<About the flow when extinguishing the special hold after a look-ahead effect occurs>
In FIG. 44, after it is specified that the special reservation information is stored in the first area of the second sub-side reservation area, the special reservation extinguishing performance is finished, and the notice suspension extinguishing performance is executed. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device and each layer of a frame buffer in case. In other words, FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a case where, after the state shown in FIG. 39 in reference form A is reached, the performance for extinguishing the special hold is ended and the performance for extinguishing the notice hold is executed. Specifically, FIG. 44(A) is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 36. 44(B) is a diagram showing the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, FIG. 44(C) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, and FIG. 44(D) is a diagram showing the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69. , a diagram showing the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69. FIG.

The MPU 62 displays and executes shifts of normal hold, advance notice hold, and special hold on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the hold display shift command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(A), the MPU 62 moves the white sphere, which is a normal pending symbol, placed on the pedestal B11, based on the pending display shift command sent from the MPU 52. Shift and place the picture on the execution pedestal AB, and shift and place the flashing white sphere picture, which is a notice pending picture placed on the pedestal B12, on the pedestal B11. do. Here, as shown in FIG. 44(B), the VDP 65 displays the normally reserved symbols and the advance notice reserved symbols on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69. it's shown.

As shown in FIG. 44(A), the MPU 62 selects a plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 3) displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 based on the fluctuation start command sent from the MPU 52. By starting to display fluctuations in , a transition is made to a high-speed fluctuation period. In this high-speed fluctuation period, the MPU 62 starts the fluctuating display of the symbols by periodically scrolling the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in this reference embodiment). In the example of FIG. 44, the MPU 62 starts variable display based on the variation start command related to the normal pending information newly stored in the execution area SAE by executing the pending shift process.

Thereafter, the MPU 62 notifies the result of the winning lottery by stopping and displaying various symbol combinations on the active line L as the stopping result based on the stopping result command transmitted from the MPU 52 (not shown).
In this reference embodiment, the VDP 65 displays a plurality of symbol columns on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the first layer L1 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 44(B). Z1 to Z3 are displayed.

Further, the MPU 52 determines whether or not the sub-side hold information shifted to the storage area of the sub-side hold area in step S3005 is advance notice hold information, and when it is determined that it is advance notice hold information in step S3005, In step S3006, executes a notice suspension effect determination process, and in step S3007 sets a notice postponement effect command.
Then, the MPU 62 causes the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 to display and execute a performance for extinguishing the preview suspension based on the preview suspension performance command transmitted from the MPU 52.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(A), the MPU 62 controls the symbol display device 36 so that an angel character carrying a signboard displaying the word "Mystery" flies around the entire display screen G. By displaying this, the pre-read effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 and executed. This look-ahead effect uses the effect of a game round based on a hold that is extinguished before the hold (in the example of FIG. 44, the hold related to the normal hold symbol placed on the execution pedestal AB). Accordingly, this is an effect for extinguishing the notice hold that informs the player of the expectation level of the hold (in the example of FIG. 44, the hold related to the notice hold symbol placed on the pedestal B11). Here, the VDP 65 displays a prefetch effect on the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 by creating drawing data in the third layer L3 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 44(D).

After that, when the MPU 52 determines in step S3005 that the information is advance notice suspension information, in step S3013C, the MPU 52 sets a special suspension effect fade-out command.
Then, based on the special pending effect fade-out command sent from the MPU 52, the MPU 62 outputs the drawing data (for extinguishing the special pending effect) created in the second layer L2 of the frame buffer 69, as shown in FIG. 44(C). (drawing data related to the effect) is cleared so as to fade out from the center of the display screen G of the symbol display device 36 toward the periphery.

In this manner, in this reference embodiment, the process of step S3013C functions as a second effect means for causing the symbol display device 36 to finish the effect for extinguishing the special reservation by fading out.
According to this, the processing in step S3013C causes the symbol display device 36 to finish the performance for extinguishing the special reservation by fading out, so the performance for extinguishing the special reservation is ended without making the player feel uncomfortable. can be done.

In addition, in this reference embodiment, the process of step S3013C causes the symbol display device 36 to perform a pre-reading performance in the notice reservation performance determination process, and then causes the symbol display device 36 to finish the performance for extinguishing the special reservation. .
According to this, the process of step S3013C causes the symbol display device 36 to execute the pre-reading effect in the advance notice holding effect determination process, and then causes the symbol display device 36 to finish the effect for extinguishing the special hold. The images on the second layer L2 and the third layer L3 can be changed at the same time without making the player see the angel character in the state, and the special suspension can be cleared without making the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to finish the presentation and execute the pre-reading presentation.

According to the present reference form, in addition to the same actions and effects as (1) to (6) in reference form A, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(9) The processing in step S3013C causes the symbol display device 36 to finish the special hold extinguishing effect so as to fade out, so that the special hold extinguishing effect can be ended without making the player feel uncomfortable. I can do it.
(10) The process of step S3013C causes the symbol display device 36 to execute the pre-reading effect in the notice holding effect determination process, and then causes the symbol display device 36 to finish the effect for extinguishing the special hold, so the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to finish the performance for extinguishing the special reservation and execute the look-ahead performance without having to remember.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 45 is a front view of the game board according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
This embodiment differs from the reference embodiment in that the center frame 37 includes a two-stage stage 7 provided in the lower region of the symbol display device 36, as shown in FIG.
The two-stage stage 7 includes an upper stage 71 arranged on the vertically upper side (on the display screen G side of the symbol display device 36) and a lower stage 72 arranged on the vertically lower side of the upper stage 71, and flows down the gaming area. It is provided with a stage distribution mechanism 73 that distributes game balls to either an upper stage 71 or a lower stage 72.

FIG. 46 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage. FIG. 47 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage.
As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the upper stage 71 includes a rolling surface 74 that rolls the game balls flowing down the gaming area, and a rolling surface 74 that rolls the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 74 toward the rear of the game board 2. A guide path 75 is provided for guiding the game ball toward the front of the game board 2 after guiding the game ball.

The rolling surface 74 is provided so as to have a depth between the gaming area and the symbol display device 36. The game ball passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided on the left side of the center frame 37, reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73 (see arrow A in FIG. 45), and is transferred to the upper stage by the stage distribution mechanism 73. 71 and reaches the rolling surface 74.

Further, the rolling surface 74 is formed to have a lowermost position vertically above the upper operating port 25 and to be gently curved so as to rise toward both horizontally left and right sides. The rolling surface 74 includes a concave portion 741 located above the upper operating port 25 and depressed gently, and two concave portions 741 located adjacent to the concave portion 741 on both left and right sides of the concave portion 741 and depressed gently. It has a concave portion 742.

The concave portion 741 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear of the game board 2. The lower end of this inclined surface is connected to the guide path 75.
Each concave portion 742 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front of the game board 2. The lower end of each slope is connected to the gaming area.
Therefore, by moving back and forth horizontally, the game ball rolls on the rolling surface 74 and then enters the guide path 75 along the slope of the concave portion 741, and the slope of the concave portion 742. The game area is discharged through either of two routes: the route where the game machine travels along the road and falls into the game area. Specifically, by setting the inclination angle of the rolling surface 74 and the inclination angle of the recessed portion 741 and each recessed portion 742, the upper stage 71 controls approximately 100% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74. It is configured such that 40% of the game balls are distributed to the route of entering the guide path 75, and about 60% of the game balls are distributed to the route of falling into the game area.

The guide path 75 includes an upper introduction part 751 into which game balls rolling on the rolling surface 74 can enter, and an ejection part 752 which discharges the game balls entered from the upper introduction part 751 into the game area and drops them. It is equipped with Here, the upper stage 71 is made of a transparent (or semi-transparent) synthetic resin so that the game balls that have entered the guide path 75 can be visually recognized.

The guide path 75 also includes a left guide section 753 that guides the game ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then horizontally to the left; After the game ball guided horizontally to the left falls downwards on the game board 2 and is guided, the right guide part 754 guides it horizontally to the right, and the right guide part 754 moves the ball to the horizontal right. The game ball is provided with a front guide part 755 that guides the game balls guided toward the front of the game board 2 and then discharges and drops them from a discharge part 752 provided in the game area.
Here, since the ejection part 752 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operating port 25, the game ball discharged to the gaming area through the route of entering the guide path 75 enters the upper operating port 25. It becomes easier to do.

The lower stage 72 includes a rolling surface 76 that rolls the game ball flowing down the gaming area, and after guiding the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 76 toward the rear of the game board 2, the game ball is played. A guide path 77 that guides the board 2 toward the front is provided.

The rolling surface 76 is provided so as to have a depth between the gaming area and the symbol display device 36. The game ball passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided on the left side of the center frame 37, reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73 (see arrow A in FIG. 45), and is transferred to the lower stage by the stage distribution mechanism 73. By being distributed to the rolling surface 72, the rolling surface 76 is reached.

The rolling surface 76 also includes a mountain-like portion located above the upper operating port 25 and protruding vertically upward, and two valley-like portions located on both left and right sides of the mountain-like portion and sinking vertically downward. The rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 is largely curved compared to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. The rolling surface 76 includes a concave portion 761 that is located above the upper operating port 25 (the top of the mountain portion) and is gently depressed, and two concave portions that are located at the bottom of the valley portion and are gently depressed. 762.

The concave portion 761 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear of the game board 2. The lower end of this slope is connected to the guide path 77.
Each concave portion 762 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front of the game board 2. The lower end of each slope is connected to the gaming area.
Therefore, by moving back and forth in the horizontal left and right directions, the game ball rolls on the rolling surface 76 and then enters the guide path 77 along the slope of the concave portion 761, and the slope of the concave portion 762. It is discharged into the gaming area through either route, or falling into the gaming area. Specifically, by setting the inclination angle of the rolling surface 76, the inclination angle of the recessed portion 761 and each recessed portion 762, etc., the lower stage 72 controls approximately 100% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76. It is configured such that 10% of the game balls are distributed to the route of entering the guide path 77, and approximately 90% of the game balls are distributed to the route of falling into the game area.

The guide path 77 includes a lower introduction part 771 into which game balls rolling on the rolling surface 76 can enter, and an ejection part 772 which discharges the game balls entered from the lower introduction part 771 into the game area and drops them. (discharge part 752). In this embodiment, the discharge section 772 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the discharge section 752 of the upper stage 71. Here, the lower stage 72 is made of transparent (or semi-transparent) synthetic resin so that the game ball entering the guide path 77 can be visually recognized. In addition, in this embodiment, the discharge part 772 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the discharge part 752 of the upper stage 71, but it does not have to be shared.

The guide path 77 also includes a rear guide section 773 that guides the game ball that has entered the lower introduction section 771 toward the rear of the game board 2 and then drops it toward the bottom of the game board 2. After guiding the game balls that are dropped and guided toward the bottom of the game board 2 by the direction guide section 773 toward the front of the game board 2, they are discharged from the discharge section 772 (discharge section 752) provided in the game area. A front guide section 774 (front guide section 755) is provided. In this embodiment, the front guide section 774 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the front guide section 755 of the upper stage 71. In other words, the front guide section 774 of the lower stage 72 communicates with the right guide section 754 of the upper stage 71, and allows the game ball guided horizontally to the right by the right guide section 754 to enter inside. It has become. In addition, in this embodiment, the front guide part 774 of the lower stage 72 is shared with the front guide part 755 of the upper stage 71, but it does not have to be shared.
Here, since the ejection part 772 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operating port 25, the game ball discharged to the gaming area through the route of entering the guide path 77 enters the upper operating port 25. It becomes easier to do.

The stage distribution mechanism 73 includes a rotating member 78 provided on the left side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 and a door member 79 provided on the left guide portion 753 of the upper stage 71.

The rotating member 78 includes a rotating shaft 781 rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal front-rear direction as the axial direction, and a rotating shaft 781 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 (on the rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71). 1 plate 782, a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the first plate 782, and a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the first plate 782; A third plate 784 is fixed to the horizontal rear side (the left guide portion 753 side of the upper stage 71).

The first plate 782 is formed into a rectangular plate shape and is fixed to the rotating shaft 781 so as to pass through the rotating shaft 781 along the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782 includes a first plate portion 785 extending diagonally upward to the right from the rotation shaft 781 and a second plate portion 786 extending diagonally downward to the left from the rotation shaft 781. . This first plate-shaped portion 785 has an end surface that is inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781.
The second plate 783 is formed into a rectangular plate shape, and has one end on the right side in the horizontal direction fixed to the rotating shaft 781. This second plate 783 has an end surface that is inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781.
The third plate 784 is formed into a rectangular plate shape, and has one vertically downward end fixed to the rotating shaft 781. This third plate 784 includes a permanent magnet 787 fixed to the right side plate surface in the horizontal direction.

The door member 79 is fixed to a rotating shaft 791 rotatably attached to the left guide part 753 of the upper stage 71 with the horizontal front-rear direction as the axial direction, and to the rotating shaft 791 so as to close the inside of the left guide part 753. It is equipped with a revolving door 792.
The revolving door 792 is formed into a rectangular plate shape, and has one vertically upper end fixed to the rotating shaft 791. This revolving door 792 is equipped with a permanent magnet 793 fixed to the left side plate surface in the horizontal direction.

Hereinafter, a flow will be described in which the game balls flowing down the game area are distributed to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73.
In the state of FIG. 47, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state, so the game ball BA1 that has reached the stage distribution mechanism 73 can be rolled.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left side area of the center frame 37 to reach the stage distribution mechanism 73 (see arrow A in FIG. 45), and as shown in FIG. The plate surface of the second plate 783 is rolled horizontally to the right.
The game ball BA1 rolling horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the second plate 783 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate. Specifically, FIG. 48(A) shows the state immediately before the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782, and FIG. This is the state immediately after the game ball BA1 collides with the plate-shaped portion 785.
When the game ball BA1 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, so the rotation member 78 rotates as shown in FIG. 48(A). It rotates around a rotating shaft 781 (see clockwise direction arrow in the figure). Further, each plate 783, 784 rotates as the rotating shaft 781 rotates.
Thereafter, the game ball BA1 will roll horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, as shown in FIG. 48(B).

FIG. 49 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after the rotating member has rotated.
As shown in FIG. 49, when the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the collision of the game ball BA1 with the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782, the first plate of the first plate 782 rotates. The end surface of the shaped portion 785 on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781 and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 on the rotating member 78 side are engaged to stop the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 corresponds to the end surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and the end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74 faces the rotating member 78. has.
Therefore, since the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is moved horizontally to the right. The game ball BA1 that has been rolling will be distributed to the upper stage 71.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, so that it reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73. It becomes impossible to roll the subsequent game ball BA2. Further, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the engagement of the first plate portion 785 and the rolling surface 74. Therefore, the subsequent game balls BA2 will not be distributed to the upper stage 71. Specifically, the subsequent game balls BA2 are distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. It turns out.
Further, the plate surface of the third plate 784 is close to the left guide portion 753 of the guide path 75, and the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 is inserted into the left guide portion 753 through an opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753. will be exposed inside.

Here, as described above, the upper stage 71 distributes about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to the route that enters the guide path 75, and distributes about 60% of the game balls to the route that enters the guide path 75. It is configured to be distributed to the route of falling into the game area.
In addition, as described above, the lower stage 72 distributes approximately 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 to the route that enters the guide path 77, and distributes approximately 90% of the game balls to the route that enters the guide path 77. It is configured to distribute the fall routes into the area.
The flow of game balls distributed to each route on the upper stage 71 will be explained below. Note that a description of the flow of game balls distributed to each route on the lower stage 72 will be omitted.

FIG. 50 is a diagram showing game balls sorted into routes that enter the guide path.
The game ball BA1, which has been sorted to the route of entering the guide path 75, passes along the slope of the concave portion 741 and enters the upper introduction portion 751. As shown in FIG. 50, the game ball BA1 that has entered the upper introduction section 751 is guided toward the rear of the game board 2 by the left guide section 753, and then guided toward the horizontal left direction. Become. The game ball BA1 guided horizontally to the left by the left guide portion 753 collides with the revolving door 792.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the revolving door. Specifically, FIG. 51(A) shows the state immediately before the game ball BA1 collides with the revolving door 792, and FIG. 51(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball BA1 collides with the revolving door 792. .
When the game ball BA1 collides with the rotating door 792, the door member 79 rotates about the rotating shaft 791 as shown in FIG. 51(A) (see clockwise direction arrow in the figure). When the door member 79 rotates about the rotating shaft 791 due to the game ball BA1 colliding with the revolving door 792, the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 passes through the opening 756 formed in the left guide part 753 to the third It will be close to the permanent magnet 787 of the plate 784.
Here, the permanent magnets 793 of the revolving door 792 are attached to the revolving door 792 so that when they approach the permanent magnets 787 of the third plate 784 as the door member 79 rotates, they repel each other.

Therefore, when the game ball BA1 collides with the revolving door 792, the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 approaches the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in the left guide part 753, and the third plate 784 rotates around the rotating shaft 781 due to the repulsive force of the permanent magnet 787, the rotating member 78 rotates around the rotating shaft 781 as shown in FIG. 51(B) (counterclockwise direction in the figure). (see arrow). Further, each plate 782, 783 rotates as the rotating shaft 781 rotates.
When the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the collision of the game ball BA1 with the rotating door 792, the rotating member 78 rotates between the end surface of the second plate 783 on the opposite side to the rotating shaft 781 and the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72. engages and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78 returns to the state shown in FIG. 47.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing game balls sorted into routes falling into the game area.
As shown in FIG. 52, the game ball BA1 that has been sorted to the route of falling into the game area will fall into the game area along the slope of the concave portion 742. In this case, the game ball BA1 does not collide with the revolving door 792, so the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 is connected to the permanent magnet of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in the left guide part 753. 787, and the rotating member 78 will not rotate.

Here, when the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 is in a state of protruding toward the left side in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the subsequent game balls BA2 distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 are , may collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. The length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is such that the proportion of game balls colliding with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 among the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 is approximately 20. %, but it may be set to a different percentage.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, so the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotation shaft 781 (see FIG. (see center-counterclockwise direction arrow). Further, each plate 783, 784 rotates as the rotating shaft 781 rotates.
When the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the collision of the game ball BA2 with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78 rotates between the end face of the second plate 783 on the opposite side to the rotating shaft 781, It engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78 returns to the state shown in FIG. 47.

As described above, in this embodiment, the two-stage stage 7 includes guiding means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) for guiding a game ball to the upper stage 71, and a guiding means for guiding one game ball to the upper stage. It is equipped with a blocking means (second plate 783) that prevents the guiding means from guiding subsequent game balls to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 when the balls are guided to the rolling surface 74 of the stage 71. .
According to this, when the guiding means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the blocking means guides the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. Therefore, the game balls guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being hindered by subsequent game balls. . Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play games comfortably.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 serves as both the guiding means and the blocking means, but the second plate 783 does not have to serve as both, and the guiding means and the blocking means may be separate bodies.
Further, in this embodiment, when the guiding means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the preventing means prevents the subsequent game ball from rolling on the upper stage 71. However, when two or more game balls are guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the guiding means prevents the subsequent game balls from rolling on the upper stage 71. The guide to the moving surface 74 may be prevented.
Further, in this embodiment, when the guiding means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the preventing means prevents the subsequent game ball from rolling on the upper stage 71. Although guiding to the surface 74 is prevented, the guiding means may guide subsequent game balls to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 based on other conditions such as that a predetermined time has elapsed. You may be prevented from doing so.

Further, in this embodiment, the two-stage stage 7 includes an upper stage 71 (first stage) and a lower stage 72 (second stage) different from the upper stage 71. The guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. The blocking means guides the game balls to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, thereby preventing the guiding means from guiding subsequent game balls to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71.
According to this, the guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and the blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72, so that the guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the lower stage 72. The player is prevented from guiding subsequent game balls to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the blocking means. Even in this case, the player can enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball guided to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72.

In this embodiment, the blocking means prevents the guiding means from guiding subsequent game balls to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by guiding the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72. However, for example, by guiding the game ball to the game area, the guiding means may prevent the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. In short, the blocking means only needs to be able to prevent the guiding means from guiding subsequent game balls to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and the stage does not need to include the lower stage 72.

In addition, as described above, the upper stage 71 distributes approximately 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to the route that enters the guide path 75, and distributes approximately 60% of the game balls to the route that enters the guide path 75. It is configured to distribute the fall routes into the area. As mentioned above, the lower stage 72 distributes about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 to the route that enters the guide path 77, and sends about 90% of the game balls to the game area. It is configured to be distributed according to the falling route. In other words, in this embodiment, the upper stage 71 is a stage more advantageous for the player than the lower stage 72.
According to this, the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being hindered by subsequent game balls, and the upper stage 71 is a stage more advantageous for the player than the lower stage 72, so the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided by the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 with peace of mind.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the upper stage 71 distributes about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to the route in which the balls enter the guide path 75, and approximately 60% of the game balls that have arrived at the rolling surface 74 The lower stage 72 is configured to distribute approximately 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 into the guide path 77, as described above. Although it is configured to distribute approximately 90% of the game balls to the route in which the balls enter the game area, the distribution rate may be set to a different rate from this.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the upper stage 71 is set to be a stage that is advantageous for the player compared to the lower stage 72, but is set to be a stage that is disadvantageous for the player compared to the lower stage 72. Alternatively, the distribution rate may be set to be the same as that of the lower stage 72.

Further, in this embodiment, the blocking means has a blocking state (a state in which the second plate 783 is upright) in which the guiding means prevents the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and It has a non-blocking state (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the following game ball is not prevented from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by means. The two-stage stage 7 includes a stage distribution mechanism 73 (switching means) that switches the blocking means to either a blocking state or a non-blocking state. This stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the blocking state when the guiding device guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71.
According to this, the two-stage stage 7 includes a stage distribution mechanism 73 that switches the blocking means to either the blocking state or the non-blocking state, and the stage distributing mechanism 73 controls one game ball by the guiding device. When guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the blocking means is switched to the blocking state, so the player pays attention to the state of the blocking means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the blocking state when the guiding device guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. When a plurality of game balls of 1 or more are guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the blocking means may be switched to the blocking state.
Further, in the present embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the blocking state when the guiding device guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. , the blocking means may be switched to the blocking state based on other conditions, such as that a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Further, in this embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game balls guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. Specifically, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state when the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means collides with the revolving door 792.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game balls guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, so the player can use the guiding means to switch the blocking means to the non-blocking state. The movement of the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 can be further enjoyed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state when the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means collides with the revolving door 792. For example, the blocking means may be switched to a non-blocking state by using game balls that have been sorted into falling routes into the gaming area. In short, the stage distribution mechanism 73 may switch the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game balls guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means.

Moreover, in this embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. . Specifically, the stage sorting mechanism 73 causes the following game ball BA2, which is different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, to collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, The blocking means is switched to a non-blocking state.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball that is different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, so that the player The player can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball that is different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 includes a first plate that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. 782 second plate-like portions 786 (contact means). This contacting means is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with some of the game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means. Specifically, the length of the second plate-like part 786 of the first plate 782 is determined by the proportion of game balls that collide with the second plate-like part 786 of the first plate 782 among the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72. is set to be approximately 20%.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73 includes a contact means that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, The contact means is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with a portion (approximately 20%) of the subsequent game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, so that the player Attention is paid to whether or not a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means comes into contact with the contact means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the stage sorting mechanism 73 moves the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 to the left guide part 753 when the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means collides with the revolving door 792. The blocking means is switched to a non-blocking state by being brought close to the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 through an opening 756 formed in the third plate 784 .
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73 can reliably switch the blocking means to the non-blocking state by adjusting the repulsive force of the permanent magnets 793 and 787, so the player can play the game with peace of mind. can do.

Further, in this embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are in a first guiding state (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the game ball is guided only to the upper stage 71, and in a first guiding state (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783), and in a state where the game ball is guided only to the lower stage 72. It has a second guiding state (a state in which the second plate 783 stands up) for guiding the game ball, and functions as a stage guiding means for guiding the game ball to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72. This stage guiding means includes a stage distribution mechanism 73 (switching means) that switches the stage guiding means to either a first guiding state or a second guiding state.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are provided with the stage distribution mechanism 73 that switches the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to either the first guiding state or the second guiding state, Since the stage sorting mechanism 73 switches between a first guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the upper stage 71 and a second guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the lower stage 72, the player can: Attention will be paid to the states of the first plate 782 and the second plate 783. In addition, by switching the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to the second guiding state (first guiding state), the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 move the subsequent game ball to the upper stage 71 ( Since the ball is prevented from being guided to the rolling surface of the lower stage 72), the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 is inhibited by the following game ball. It is possible to roll on the rolling surface of the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) without being affected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the channel through which the game balls flowing down the gaming area flows is a two-stage channel including an upper stage 71 (first channel) and a lower stage 72 (second channel). Although stage 7 has been described as an example, the present invention may be applied to other channels. For example, the first flow path and the second flow path may be an accessory such as a croon, or may be a flow path leading to a large winning opening, a V winning opening, or the like.

According to this embodiment, the following actions and effects can be achieved.
(1) The blocking means is such that when the guiding means guides one game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, the guiding means guides a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. Therefore, the game balls guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being hindered by the following game balls. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to play games comfortably.
(2) The guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, and the blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72. Since the ball is prevented from being guided to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71, even if the player is prevented from guiding a subsequent game ball to the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 by the blocking means. Even if there is, the player can enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball guided by the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72.

(3) The game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 without being hindered by subsequent game balls, and the upper stage 71 Since this stage is more advantageous for the player than the lower stage 72, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided by the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 with peace of mind.
(4) The two-stage stage 7 includes a stage distribution mechanism 73 that switches the blocking means to either a blocking state or a non-blocking state. When the ball is guided to the rolling surface 74 of 71, the blocking means is switched to the blocking state, so the player pays attention to the state of the blocking means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.

(5) The stage distribution mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, so the player can move the ball to the upper stage by using the guiding means. You can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided by 71.
(6) The stage sorting mechanism 73 switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball that is different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, so the player can: It is possible to further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball that is different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means.

(7) The stage distribution mechanism 73 includes a contact means that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, and the contact means is placed in a position where it comes into contact with a portion (approximately 20%) of the subsequent game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means, so the player can: Attention is paid to whether or not a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means comes into contact with the contact means. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.
(8) The stage distribution mechanism 73 can reliably switch the blocking means to the non-blocking state by adjusting the repulsive forces of the permanent magnets 793 and 787, so the player can play the game with peace of mind. I can do it.

(9) The first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are provided with a stage distribution mechanism 73 that switches the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to either the first guidance state or the second guidance state, and The separating mechanism 73 switches between a first guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the upper stage 71 and a second guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the lower stage 72. Attention will be paid to the states of the plate 782 and the second plate 783. In addition, by switching the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to the second guiding state (first guiding state), the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 move the subsequent game ball to the upper stage 71 ( Since the ball is prevented from being guided to the rolling surface of the lower stage 72), the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 is inhibited by the following game ball. It is possible to roll on the rolling surface of the upper stage 71 (lower stage 72) without being affected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the game ball existing on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 can enter the upper stage introduction part 751 of the guide path 75. A state in which a game ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as a first gaming state, and a game ball is present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71. If the state is a second game state, the second game state is such that only game balls existing in a specific area (upper stage 71) in the game area enter the first ball entry area (upper stage introduction section 751). It is possible. The pachinko machine 1 has a guide means (guide path 75) that guides the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that provides a profit to the player. We are prepared.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between the first gaming state and the second gaming state that provides a profit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
Note that in this embodiment, the second gaming state is a gaming state that provides a profit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, but it is a gaming state that does not provide a profit to the player. It may be a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state, or it may be a gaming state that provides the same benefit to the player as the first gaming state.

Considering the invention according to this embodiment from such a point of view, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are capable of handling the first game ball ( It functions as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the game ball BA1) passing through a predetermined area (area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area. .
In addition, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is a second game ball (game ball BA2) that is fired by the firing handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state. functions as a first game state generating means that generates a first game state when a specific condition is satisfied (when the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786).
Then, the second plate 783 is activated by the second game state generating means based on the fact that the second game ball (game ball BA2) passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. It functions as a restriction means for restricting the occurrence of the second game state.

According to this, while the second gaming state is occurring, only game balls existing in a specific area in the gaming area can enter the upper introduction section 751, and the guide path 75 is designed to provide profits to the player. Since the game ball that has entered the upper introduction part 751 is guided to the operating port 25, the player can enjoy the benefit when the second game state occurs. Further, the second plate 783 allows the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to perform a second game based on the fact that the second game ball passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. Since generation of the game state is restricted, the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Further, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 moves the second game ball (game ball BA2) to a predetermined area (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. (area) and another area (area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782).

According to this, since the second plate 783 passes through another area different from the predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the second gaming state, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 It is possible to reliably limit the occurrence of the condition.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 is in a restricted state (a state in which the second plate 783 is erected) that restricts the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second gaming state. ), and a non-limiting state (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are not restricted from generating the second gaming state. Then, when the second gaming state is generated in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the state is switched to the restricted state, and when the first gaming state is generated in the second plate-shaped portion 786, the state is switched to the non-restricted state. switching to the state.

According to this, the second plate 783 switches to the restricted state when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and the second plate part 786 switches the first game state to the restricted state. Since the state is switched to the non-restricted state when the state is generated, the second game state is switched to the non-restricted state without restricting the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state while the first game state is occurring. During the occurrence of the second gaming state, it is possible to reliably restrict the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second gaming state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 only hits some of the second game balls (the game ball BA2 that collided with the second plate-shaped portion 786) that satisfies a predetermined condition. Based on this, certain conditions are established.

According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 establishes the specific condition based only on some of the second game balls that satisfy the predetermined condition, so the player can Attention is paid to whether or not the game ball No. 2 satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 in the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state.

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the first game ball to generate the second game state, so the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 Also, the configuration of the second plate 783 can be simplified.

Further, in this embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 in the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state. In other words, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 were displaced by the propulsive force of the game ball BA1.
On the other hand, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced by the driving force of a motor or the like. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the sensor detects the game ball, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate a second gaming state. Also, for example, if a sensor that detects a game ball is attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and the sensor detects a game ball, whether or not to generate the second game state is determined. A lottery may be executed, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate a second gaming state. At this time, if the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the second gaming state is not won, the game balls existing in the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are moved to the lower stage 72. It may be guided or discharged into the gaming area.

In this way, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are arranged so that the game ball BA1 fired with the firing handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state can reach a predetermined area in the game area (the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the area between nails NL1 and nails NL2 provided in the left side area of the center frame 37, etc.). If a game state is generated and the state generation lottery is not won, the second game state may not be generated.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is not won. Since the state occurrence lottery does not occur, the player pays attention to the result of the state occurrence lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 in the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state.

According to this, the second plate-like part 786 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the second game ball to generate the first game state, so the second plate-like part 786 The configuration can be simplified.

Further, in this embodiment, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 causes the first game state to occur by displacing the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 in the game ball BA2. In other words, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 was displacing the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA2.
On the other hand, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be displaced by the driving force of a motor or the like. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to a gap region formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and this sensor When a game ball is detected, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Furthermore, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and this sensor may be used to play the game. When a ball is detected, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate the first gaming state, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced to generate the first gaming state. may be generated. At this time, if the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the first game state is not won, the The game balls existing in the area of the gap may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be discharged to the game area.

In this way, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is configured to prevent the game ball BA2 fired by the firing handle 16 during the second game state from occurring in a predetermined area in the game area (rolling of the lower stage 72). (such as the area of the gap formed between the surface 76 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left side area of the center frame 37). The first game state may be caused to occur if the state generation lottery executed based on passing is won, and the first game state may not be generated if the state generation lottery is not won. .
According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first gaming state when winning the state generating lottery, and does not generate the first gaming state when not winning the state generating lottery. Therefore, the player will pay attention to the result of the state occurrence lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.
Note that the first game state generation means may determine that a state generation lottery is won when a specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, the specific condition may be established when a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be established when a predetermined number of game balls enter the big prize opening, V prize opening, etc. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the state in which the game balls can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first gaming state, and the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 The state in which the game balls are present, in other words, the state in which the game balls can flow down the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. The upper stage 71 and the lower stage 72 formed a flow path leading to the upper operating port 25.
On the other hand, the configuration for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be different from the configuration for switching each flow path of the upper stage 71 and the lower stage 72. For example, the configuration may be such that the flow path leading to the big winning hole, the flow path leading to the V winning hole, the flow path leading to the general winning hole, the flow path leading to each operating hole, the flow path leading to the through gate, etc. , the configuration may be such that each channel leading to the two types of V winning ports is switched, or the channel leading to the upper operating port and the channel leading to the lower operating port may be switched, and any channel may be used. It may be configured to switch between the two. Further, these channels may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside an accessory. Furthermore, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state; for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and the specific The control state (opening/closing execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

Further, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 moves the second game ball (game ball BA2) to a predetermined area (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. It functions as a game ball guiding means for guiding the game ball to another area (the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped part 786 of the first plate 782). do.

According to this, the second plate 783 guides the player to another area different from the predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the second gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind. can.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the second plate 783 operates in a game ball guiding state (a second game ball guidance state) in which the second game ball is guided to another region different from a predetermined region in the game region during the occurrence of the second game state. 2 plate 783 in an upright state) and a game ball non-guidance state (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first game ball is guided to a predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the first game state. have. Then, when the second game state is generated in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, it is switched to the game ball guiding state, and when the first game state is generated in the second plate-shaped portion 786, Switching to game ball non-guidance state.

According to this, the second plate 783 switches to the game ball guiding state when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and the second plate 786 switches to the game ball guiding state. Since the game ball non-guidance state is switched when the game state occurs, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are prevented from generating the second game state while the first game state is occurring. It is possible to reliably restrict the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state while the second game state is occurring.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 is used as the game ball guide means, but during the occurrence of the second game state, the second game ball is moved to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area. It may be of any type as long as it can be induced. For example, the game ball guide means may employ various members (accessories) such as nails and windmills, a center frame, and a valve that switches the flow path of the game ball. Further, the game ball guiding means may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside the accessory.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are arranged so that the first game ball (game ball BA1) fired with the firing handle 16 during the first game state is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. A second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on passing through the region (the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) and being displaced by contacting the first game ball. It is functioning as.
Further, the stage distribution mechanism 73 is configured such that the second game ball (game ball BA2) fired by the firing handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state is placed in a predetermined area in the game area. (the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped part 786 of the first plate 782), and comes into contact with the second game ball and is displaced. Based on this, it functions as a first game state generating means that generates a first game state.
Then, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 send the first game ball that has generated the second game state to the player, giving the player a first profit (approximately 40% of the game ball enters the guide path 75). The stage distribution mechanism 73 directs the player to the first profit giving area (upper stage 71) where the second game ball that has caused the first gaming state is given to the player. The player is guided to a second benefit giving area (lower stage 72) that gives a second profit different from the profit (approximately 10% of the game balls are distributed to the route that enters the guide path 77).

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that has caused the second game state to the upper stage 71 that gives the first profit to the player, and the stage shaker. The separating mechanism 73 guides the second game ball that has generated the first game state to the lower stage 72 that gives the player a second profit different from the first profit. The focus will be on where they are directed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 satisfies the first condition (the ball enters the upper introduction part 751), , the second game ball that enters the first profit ball entry area (upper introduction part 751) that gives the first profit and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73 is If a second condition different from the above conditions (ball entering the lower introduction section 771) is met, the ball enters the second profit entry area (lower introduction section 771) that provides a second profit.

According to this, the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 is moved to the upper stage introducing part that gives the first profit when the first condition is satisfied. The second game ball that enters the ball 751 and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73 will be given a second profit if it satisfies a second condition different from the first condition. Since the ball enters the lower introduction section 771, the player pays attention to whether or not the first condition and the second condition are satisfied.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are placed in both areas of the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771. It is discharged to another area (gaming area) different from that of the game area.

According to this, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are different from the areas of both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771. Since the balls are ejected to another area, the player pays attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball are ejected to the other area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state in which the game ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first gaming state, and the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 The state in which the game balls are present, in other words, the state in which the game balls can be caused to flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. Then, the upper stage 71 receives the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71 by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 when the first condition (ball entering the upper introduction part 751) is satisfied. The lower stage 72 functions as a first profit entry region (upper introduction section 751) that provides a first profit, and the lower stage 72 functions as a first profit entry region (upper introduction section 751) that provides a first profit. When the second game ball is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73, it enters the second profit ball entry area (lower introduction part 771) that gives the second profit. It functioned as a second profit-giving area.
On the other hand, the first profit giving area and the second profit giving area may have different configurations from the upper stage 71 and the lower stage 72. For example, it may be a large winning opening, a V winning opening, a general winning opening, each operating opening, a through gate, etc., and may be any area as long as it can provide profits to the player. . Furthermore, these areas may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside an accessory. Furthermore, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state; for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and the specific The control state (opening/closing execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 53 is a front view of a game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the center frame 37 was provided with the two-stage stage 7 provided in the area below the symbol display device 36.
In contrast, in the present embodiment, the center frame 37 is provided with a two-stage stage 7E provided in the area below the symbol display device 36, as shown in FIG. different from.

The two-stage stage 7E includes an upper stage 71E arranged vertically above (on the display screen G side of the symbol display device 36) and a lower stage 72 arranged vertically below the upper stage 71E, and flows down the gaming area. It is provided with a stage distribution mechanism 73E that distributes game balls to either an upper stage 71E or a lower stage 72.

FIG. 54 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage. FIG. 55 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage.
As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the upper stage 71E includes a rolling surface 74 that rolls the game balls flowing down the gaming area, and a rolling surface 74 that rolls the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 74 toward the rear of the game board 2. A guide path 75E is provided for guiding the game ball toward the front of the game board 2 after guiding the game ball.

The rolling surface 74 is provided so as to have a depth between the gaming area and the symbol display device 36. The game ball passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided on the left side of the center frame 37, reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73E (see arrow A in FIG. 53), and is transferred to the upper stage by the stage distribution mechanism 73E. By being distributed to 71E, it reaches the rolling surface 74.

Further, the rolling surface 74 is formed to have a lowermost position vertically above the upper operating port 25 and to be gently curved so as to rise toward both horizontally left and right sides. The rolling surface 74 includes a concave portion 741 that is located above the upper operating port 25 and is gently depressed, and two that are located adjacent to the concave portions 741 on both left and right sides of the concave portion 741 and are gently depressed. It has a concave portion 742.

The concave portion 741 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear of the game board 2. The lower end of this slope is connected to the guide path 75E.
Each concave portion 742 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front of the game board 2. The lower end of each slope is connected to the gaming area.
Therefore, by moving back and forth in the horizontal left and right directions, the game ball rolls on the rolling surface 74 and then enters the guide path 75E along the slope of the concave portion 741, and the slope of the concave portion 742. It is discharged into the gaming area through either route, or falling into the gaming area. Specifically, the upper stage 71E sets the inclination angle of the rolling surface 74, the inclination angle of the recessed portion 741 and each recessed portion 742, etc., so that approximately 100% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 are It is configured such that 40% of the game balls are distributed to the route in which the balls enter the guide path 75E, and approximately 60% of the game balls are distributed to the route in which they fall into the game area.

The guide path 75E includes an upper introduction part 751 into which game balls rolling on the rolling surface 74 can enter, and an ejection part 752 which discharges the game balls entered from the upper introduction part 751 into the game area and drops them. It is equipped with Here, the upper stage 71 is made of a transparent (or semi-transparent) synthetic resin so that the game ball that enters the guide path 75E can be visually recognized.

Further, the guide path 75E includes a left guide section 753E that guides the game ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 toward the rear of the game board 2, and then guides it toward the horizontal left direction, and a left guide section 753E. After the game ball guided horizontally to the left falls downwards on the game board 2 and is guided, the right guide part 754 guides the game ball horizontally to the right, and the right guide part 754 moves the ball to the horizontal right. The game ball is provided with a front guide part 755 that guides the game balls guided toward the front of the game board 2 and then discharges and drops them from a discharge part 752 provided in the game area.
Here, since the discharge part 752 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operating port 25, the game ball discharged to the gaming area through the route of entering the guide path 75E enters the upper operating port 25. It becomes easier to do.

The stage distribution mechanism 73E includes a rotating member 78E provided on the left side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E.

The rotating member 78E includes a rotating shaft 781 rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal front-rear direction as the axial direction, and a rotating shaft 781 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 (on the rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71E). 1 plate 782, a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the first plate 782, and a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781 so as to be substantially perpendicular to the first plate 782; A third plate 784E is fixed to the horizontal rear side (the left guide portion 753E side of the upper stage 71E).

The first plate 782 is formed into a rectangular plate shape and is fixed to the rotating shaft 781 so as to pass through the rotating shaft 781 along the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782 includes a first plate portion 785 extending diagonally upward to the right from the rotation shaft 781 and a second plate portion 786 extending diagonally downward to the left from the rotation shaft 781. . This first plate-shaped portion 785 has an end surface that is inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781.
The second plate 783 is formed into a rectangular plate shape, and has one end on the right side in the horizontal direction fixed to the rotating shaft 781. This second plate 783 has an end surface that is inclined with respect to the plate surface on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781.
The third plate 784E is formed into a rectangular plate shape, and has one vertically downward end fixed to the rotating shaft 781. This third plate 784E includes a protrusion 788E formed on the right side plate surface in the horizontal direction. The protruding portion 788E is formed in a semi-elliptic columnar shape whose major axis is in the direction away from the plate surface of the third plate 784E.

Hereinafter, a flow will be described in which game balls flowing down the game area are distributed to either the upper stage 71E or the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73E.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left side area of the center frame 37, reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73E (see arrow A in FIG. 53), and as shown in FIG. The plate surface of the second plate 783 is rolled horizontally to the right.
The game ball BA1 that has rolled horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the second plate 783 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate. Specifically, FIG. 56(A) shows the state immediately before the game ball collides with the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782, and FIG. This is the state immediately after the game ball collides with the shaped portion 785.
When a game ball collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation shaft 781, so the rotation member 78E rotates as shown in FIG. 56(A). It rotates around a shaft 781 (see clockwise direction arrow in the figure). Further, each plate 783, 784E rotates as the rotating shaft 781 rotates.
Thereafter, the game ball will roll horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, as shown in FIG. 56(B).

FIG. 57 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member.
As shown in FIG. 57, when the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the collision of the game ball with the first plate-shaped part 785 of the first plate 782, the first plate-shaped part of the first plate 782 rotates. The end surface of the portion 785 on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781 and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E on the rotating member 78E side engage with each other to stop the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E corresponds to the end surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and the end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74 is placed on the rotating member 78E side. has.
Therefore, since the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is moved horizontally to the right. The game ball BA1 that has been rolling will be distributed to the upper stage 71E.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, so that it reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73E. It becomes impossible to roll the subsequent game ball BA2. Further, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the engagement of the first plate portion 785 and the rolling surface 74. Therefore, the subsequent game balls BA2 will not be distributed to the upper stage 71E. Specifically, the subsequent game balls BA2 are distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. It turns out.
Further, the plate surface of the third plate 784E is close to the left guide part 753E of the guide path 75E, and the protruding part 788E of the third plate 784E is connected to the opening 756E formed in the left guide part 753E (see FIGS. 54 and 55). ) is exposed inside the left guide portion 753E.

Here, as described above, the upper stage 71E distributes about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to the route that enters the guide path 75E, and distributes about 60% of the game balls to the route that enters the guide path 75E. It is configured so that it is sorted into routes that fall into the game area.
In addition, as described above, the lower stage 72 distributes approximately 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 to the route that enters the guide path 77, and distributes approximately 90% of the game balls to the route that enters the guide path 77. It is configured to distribute the fall routes into the area.
The flow of game balls distributed to each route on the upper stage 71E will be explained below. Note that a description of the flow of game balls distributed to each route on the lower stage 72 will be omitted.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing game balls sorted into routes that enter the guide path.
The game ball BA1, which has been sorted to the route of entry into the guide path 75E, passes along the slope of the concave portion 741 and enters the upper introduction portion 751. As shown in FIG. 58, the game ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 is guided toward the rear of the game board 2 by the left guide section 753E, and then is guided horizontally to the left. . The game ball BA1 guided horizontally to the left by the left guide portion 753E collides with the protruding portion 788E.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the operating state of the rotating member when the game ball collides with the protrusion. Specifically, FIG. 59(A) shows the state immediately before the game ball BA1 collides with the protrusion 788E, and FIG. 59(B) shows the state immediately after the game ball BA1 collides with the protrusion 788E. It is.
When the game ball BA1 collides with the protruding portion 788E, the protruding portion 788E is formed in a semi-elliptic cylinder shape whose major axis is in the direction away from the plate surface of the third plate 784E. , the game ball BA1 will be flipped vertically upward. As a result, the third plate 784E rotates about the rotating shaft 781, so the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotating shaft 781, as shown in FIGS. 59(A) and 59(B). 59(B) (see middle counterclockwise direction arrow). Further, each plate 782, 783 rotates as the rotating shaft 781 rotates.
When the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the collision of the game ball BA1 with the protruding portion 788E, the rotating member 78E rotates between the end surface of the second plate 783 on the opposite side to the rotating shaft 781 and the rolling surface of the lower stage 72. 76 and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78E returns to the state shown in FIG. 55.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing game balls sorted into routes falling into the game area.
As shown in FIG. 60, the game ball BA1 that has been sorted to the route of falling into the game area will fall into the game area along the slope of the concave portion 742. In this case, the game ball BA1 will not collide with the protrusion 788E, so the rotating member 78E will not rotate.

Here, when the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 is in a state of protruding toward the left side in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 are It may collide with the second plate-like portion 786 of the plate 782. The length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is such that the proportion of game balls colliding with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 among the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 is approximately 20. %, but it may be set to a different percentage.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates about the rotation axis 781, so the rotation member 78E rotates about the rotation axis 781 (see FIG. (see center-counterclockwise direction arrow). Further, each plate 783, 784E rotates as the rotating shaft 781 rotates.
When the rotating member 78E rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the collision of the game ball BA2 with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78E rotates between the end surface of the second plate 783 on the opposite side to the rotating shaft 781, It engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78E returns to the state shown in FIG. 55.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73E moves the third plate 784E vertically upward by the game ball BA1 guided to the upper stage 71 by the guiding means colliding with the protrusion 788E. It flips up and switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73E can adjust the probability of switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by setting the shape and size of the protrusion 788E. Attention should be paid to whether or not the plate 784E is flipped vertically upward. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same actions and effects as (1) to (7) and (9) in the first embodiment, the following actions and effects can also be achieved. .
(10) The stage distribution mechanism 73E can adjust the probability of switching the blocking means to the non-blocking state by setting the shape and size of the protrusion 788E. We will pay attention to whether or not it is lifted vertically upward. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the game ball existing on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E can enter the upper stage introduction part 751 of the guide path 75E. A state where a game ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as a first gaming state, and a game ball is present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E. If the state is a second game state, the second game state is such that only game balls existing in a specific area (upper stage 71E) in the game area enter the first ball entry area (upper stage introduction section 751). It is possible. The pachinko machine 1 has a guide means (guide path 75E) that guides the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that provides a profit to the player. We are prepared.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between the first gaming state and the second gaming state that provides a profit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
Note that in this embodiment, the second gaming state is a gaming state that provides a profit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, but it is a gaming state that does not provide a profit to the player. It may be a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state, or it may be a gaming state that provides the same benefit to the player as the first gaming state.

Considering the invention according to this embodiment from such a point of view, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are capable of handling the first game ball ( It functions as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the game ball BA1) passing through a predetermined area (area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area. .
In addition, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is a second game ball (game ball BA2) that is fired by the firing handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state. functions as a first game state generating means that generates a first game state when a specific condition is satisfied (when the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786).
Then, the second plate 783 is activated by the second game state generating means based on the fact that the second game ball (game ball BA2) passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. It functions as a restricting means for restricting the occurrence of the second gaming state.

According to this, while the second gaming state is occurring, only game balls existing in a specific area in the gaming area can enter the upper introduction section 751, and the guide path 75E is designed to provide profits to the player. Since the game ball that has entered the upper introduction part 751 is guided to the operating port 25, the player can enjoy the benefit when the second game state occurs. Further, the second plate 783 allows the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to perform a second game based on the fact that the second game ball passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. Since generation of the game state is restricted, the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Further, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 moves the second game ball (game ball BA2) to a predetermined area (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. (area) and another area (area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782).

According to this, since the second plate 783 passes through another area different from the predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the second gaming state, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 It is possible to reliably limit the occurrence of the condition.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 is in a restricted state (a state in which the second plate 783 is erected) that restricts the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second gaming state. ), and a non-limiting state (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are not restricted from generating the second gaming state. Then, when the second gaming state is generated in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the state is switched to the restricted state, and when the first gaming state is generated in the second plate-shaped portion 786, the state is switched to the non-restricted state. switching to the state.

According to this, the second plate 783 switches to the restricted state when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and the second plate part 786 switches the first game state to the restricted state. Since the state is switched to the non-restricted state when the state is generated, the second game state is switched to the non-restricted state without restricting the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state while the first game state is occurring. During the occurrence of the second gaming state, it is possible to reliably restrict the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second gaming state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 only hits some of the second game balls (the game ball BA2 that collided with the second plate-shaped portion 786) that satisfies a predetermined condition. Based on this, certain conditions are established.

According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 establishes the specific condition based only on some of the second game balls that satisfy the predetermined condition, so the player can Attention is paid to whether or not the game ball No. 2 satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 in the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state.

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the first game ball to generate the second game state, so the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 Also, the configuration of the second plate 783 can be simplified.

Further, in this embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 in the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state. In other words, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 were displaced by the propulsive force of the game ball BA1.
On the other hand, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced by the driving force of a motor or the like. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the sensor detects the game ball, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate a second gaming state. Also, for example, if a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and the sensor detects a game ball, whether or not to generate the second game state is determined. A lottery may be executed, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate a second gaming state. At this time, if the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the second gaming state is not won, the game balls existing in the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are moved to the lower stage 72. It may be guided or discharged into the gaming area.

In this way, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are arranged so that the game ball BA1 fired with the firing handle 16 during the first game state is in a predetermined area in the game area (the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the area between nails NL1 and nails NL2 provided in the left side area of the center frame 37, etc.). If a game state is generated and the state generation lottery is not won, the second game state may not be generated.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is not won. Since this does not occur, the player will pay attention to the result of the state occurrence lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 in the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state.

According to this, the second plate-like part 786 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the second game ball to generate the first game state, so the second plate-like part 786 The configuration can be simplified.

Further, in this embodiment, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 causes the first game state to occur by displacing the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 in the game ball BA2. In other words, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 was displacing the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA2.
On the other hand, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be displaced by the driving force of a motor or the like. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to a gap region formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and this sensor When a game ball is detected, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Furthermore, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and this sensor may be used to play the game. When a ball is detected, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate the first gaming state, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced to generate the first gaming state. may be generated. At this time, if the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the first game state is not won, the The game balls existing in the area of the gap may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be discharged to the game area.

In this way, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is configured to prevent the game ball BA2 fired by the firing handle 16 during the second game state from occurring in a predetermined area in the game area (rolling of the lower stage 72). (such as the area of the gap formed between the surface 76 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left side area of the center frame 37). The first game state may be caused to occur if the state generation lottery executed based on passing is won, and the first game state may not be generated if the state generation lottery is not won. .
According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first gaming state when winning the state generating lottery, and does not generate the first gaming state when not winning the state generating lottery. Therefore, the player will pay attention to the result of the state occurrence lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.
Note that the first game state generation means may determine that a state generation lottery is won when a specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, the specific condition may be established when a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be established when a predetermined number of game balls enter the big prize opening, V prize opening, etc. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the state in which the game ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first gaming state, and the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E The state in which the game balls are present, in other words, the state in which the game balls can be caused to flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. The upper stage 71E and the lower stage 72 formed a flow path leading to the upper operating port 25.
On the other hand, the configuration for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be different from the configuration for switching each channel of the upper stage 71E and the lower stage 72. For example, the configuration may be such that the flow path leading to the big winning hole, the flow path leading to the V winning hole, the flow path leading to the general winning hole, the flow path leading to each operating hole, the flow path leading to the through gate, etc. , the configuration may be such that each flow path leading to the two types of V winning ports is switched, or the configuration may be such that the flow path leading to the upper operating port and the flow path leading to the lower operating port are switched, and any flow path may be used. It may be configured to switch between the two. Further, these channels may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside the accessory. Furthermore, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state; for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and the specific The control state (opening/closing execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

Further, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 moves the second game ball (game ball BA2) to a predetermined area (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. It functions as a game ball guiding means for guiding the game ball to another area (the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped part 786 of the first plate 782). do.

According to this, the second plate 783 guides the player to another area different from the predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the second gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind. can.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the second plate 783 operates in a game ball guiding state (a second game ball guidance state) in which the second game ball is guided to another region different from a predetermined region in the game region during the occurrence of the second game state. 2 plate 783 in an upright state) and a game ball non-guidance state (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first game ball is guided to a predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the first game state. have. Then, when the second game state is generated in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, it is switched to the game ball guiding state, and when the first game state is generated in the second plate-shaped portion 786, Switching to game ball non-guidance state.

According to this, the second plate 783 switches to the game ball guiding state when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and the second plate 786 switches to the game ball guiding state. Since the game ball non-guidance state is switched when the game state occurs, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are prevented from generating the second game state while the first game state is occurring. It is possible to reliably restrict the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state while the second game state is occurring.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 is used as the game ball guide means, but during the occurrence of the second game state, the second game ball is moved to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area. It may be of any type as long as it can be induced. For example, the game ball guide means may employ various members (accessories) such as nails and windmills, a center frame, and a valve that switches the flow path of the game ball. Further, the game ball guiding means may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside the accessory.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are arranged so that the first game ball (game ball BA1) fired with the firing handle 16 during the first game state is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. A second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on passing through the region (the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) and being displaced by contacting the first game ball. It is functioning as.
Further, the stage distribution mechanism 73E is configured such that the second game ball (game ball BA2) fired by the firing handle 16 after the first game ball is placed in a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. (the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped part 786 of the first plate 782), and comes into contact with the second game ball and is displaced. Based on this, it functions as a first game state generating means that generates a first game state.
Then, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 send the first game ball that has generated the second game state to the player for a first profit (approximately 40% of the game ball enters the guide path 75E). The stage distribution mechanism 73E directs the player to the first profit giving area (upper stage 71E) where the second game ball that has caused the first game state is given to the player. The player is guided to a second benefit giving area (lower stage 72) that gives a second profit different from the profit (approximately 10% of the game balls are distributed to the route that enters the guide path 77).

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that has caused the second game state to the upper stage 71E that gives the first profit to the player, and the stage shaker. The separating mechanism 73E guides the second game ball that has generated the first gaming state to the lower stage 72 that gives the player a second profit different from the first profit, so the player can The focus will be on where they are directed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71E by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 satisfies the first condition (ball entering the upper stage introduction part 751) , the second game ball that enters the first profit ball entry area (upper introduction part 751) that gives the first profit and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73E is When a second condition different from the above conditions (ball entering the lower introduction section 771) is met, the ball enters the second profit entry area (lower introduction section 771) that provides a second profit.

According to this, the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71E by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 is moved to the upper stage introducing part that gives the first profit when the first condition is satisfied. The second game ball that enters the ball 751 and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73E will be given a second profit if it satisfies a second condition different from the first condition. Since the ball enters the lower introduction section 771, the player pays attention to whether or not the first condition and the second condition are satisfied.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are placed in both areas of the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771. It is discharged to another area (gaming area) different from that of the game area.

According to this, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are different from the areas of both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771. Since the balls are ejected to another area, the player pays attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball are ejected to the other area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state in which the game ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first gaming state, and the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71E The state in which the game balls are present, in other words, the state in which the game balls can be caused to flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. Then, the upper stage 71E receives the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71E by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 when the first condition (ball entering the upper introduction part 751) is satisfied. The lower stage 72 functions as a first profit entry region (upper introduction section 751) that provides a first profit, and the lower stage 72 functions as a first profit entry region (upper introduction section 751) that provides a first profit. When the second game ball is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73E, it enters the second profit ball entry area (lower introduction part 771) that gives the second profit. It functioned as a second profit-giving area.
On the other hand, the first benefit-giving area and the second benefit-giving area may have different configurations from the upper stage 71E and the lower stage 72. For example, it may be a large winning opening, a V winning opening, a general winning opening, each operating opening, a through gate, etc., and may be any area as long as it can provide profits to the player. . Furthermore, these areas may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside an accessory. Furthermore, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state; for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and the specific The control state (opening/closing execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described below based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 61 is a front view of a game board according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the center frame 37 was provided with the two-stage stage 7 provided in the area below the symbol display device 36.
In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61, the center frame 37 is provided with a two-stage stage 7F provided in the area below the symbol display device 36, as compared to the first embodiment. different from.

The two-stage stage 7F includes an upper stage 71F arranged on the vertically upper side (on the display screen G side of the symbol display device 36) and a lower stage 72 arranged on the vertically lower side of the upper stage 71F, and flows down the gaming area. It is provided with a stage distribution mechanism 73F that distributes game balls to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72.

FIG. 62 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage. FIG. 63 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage.
As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the upper stage 71F includes a rolling surface 74 that rolls the game balls flowing down the gaming area, and a rolling surface 74 that rolls the game balls rolling on the rolling surface 74 toward the rear of the game board 2. A guide path 75F is provided for guiding the game ball toward the front of the game board 2 after guiding the game ball.

The rolling surface 74 is provided so as to have a depth between the gaming area and the symbol display device 36. The game ball passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37, reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73F (see arrow A in FIG. 61), and is transferred to the upper stage by the stage distribution mechanism 73F. By being distributed to 71F, it reaches the rolling surface 74.

Further, the rolling surface 74 is formed to have a lowermost position vertically above the upper operating port 25 and to be gently curved so as to rise toward both horizontally left and right sides. The rolling surface 74 includes a concave portion 741 that is located above the upper operating port 25 and is gently depressed, and two that are located adjacent to the concave portions 741 on both left and right sides of the concave portion 741 and are gently depressed. It has a concave portion 742.

The concave portion 741 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear of the game board 2. The lower end of this slope is connected to the guide path 75F.
Each concave portion 742 has an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front of the game board 2. The lower end of each slope is connected to the gaming area.
Therefore, by moving back and forth in the horizontal left and right directions, the game ball rolls on the rolling surface 74 and then enters the guide path 75F along the slope of the recessed part 741, and the slope of the recessed part 742. The game area is discharged through either of two routes: the route where the game machine travels along the road and falls into the game area. Specifically, the upper stage 71F sets the inclination angle of the rolling surface 74, the inclination angle of the recessed portion 741 and each recessed portion 742, etc., so that approximately 100% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 are It is configured such that 40% of the game balls are distributed to the route of entering the guide path 75F, and about 60% of the game balls are distributed to the route of falling into the game area.

The guide path 75F includes an upper introduction part 751 into which game balls rolling on the rolling surface 74 can enter, and an ejection part 752 which discharges the game balls entered from the upper introduction part 751 into the game area and drops them. It is equipped with Here, the upper stage 71F is formed of a transparent (or semi-transparent) synthetic resin so that the game balls entering the guide path 75F can be visually recognized.

Further, the guide path 75F includes a left guide section 753F that guides the game ball that has entered the upper introduction section 751 toward the rear of the game board 2, and then guides it toward the horizontal left direction, and a left guide section 753F. After the game ball guided horizontally to the left falls downwards on the game board 2 and is guided, the right guide part 754 guides the game ball horizontally to the right, and the right guide part 754 moves the ball to the horizontal right. The game ball is provided with a front guide part 755 that guides the game balls guided toward the front of the game board 2 and then discharges and drops them from a discharge part 752 provided in the game area.
Here, since the discharge part 752 is provided at a position vertically above the upper operating port 25, the game ball discharged to the gaming area through the route of entering the guide path 75F enters the upper operating port 25. It becomes easier to do.

The stage distribution mechanism 73F includes a rotating member 78F provided on the left side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F.

The rotating member 78F includes a rotating shaft 781F that is rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal longitudinal direction as the axial direction, and a rotating shaft 781F that is fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F (on the rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71F). The second plate 783 is fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F so as to be substantially orthogonal to the first plate 782.

The first plate 782 is formed into a rectangular plate shape and is fixed to the rotating shaft 781F so as to pass through the rotating shaft 781F along the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782 includes a first plate portion 785 extending diagonally upward to the right from the rotation axis 781F, and a second plate portion 786 extending diagonally downward to the left from the rotation axis 781F. . This first plate-shaped portion 785 has an end surface that is inclined with respect to the plate surface on the opposite side to the rotation axis 781F.
The second plate 783 is formed into a rectangular plate shape, and one end of the second plate 783 on the right side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotating shaft 781F. This second plate 783 has an end surface that is inclined with respect to the plate surface on the opposite side to the rotation axis 781F.

The flow of distributing game balls flowing down the gaming area to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72 by the stage distributing mechanism 73F will be described below.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left side area of the center frame 37, reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73F (see arrow A in FIG. 61), and as shown in FIG. The plate surface of the second plate 783 is rolled horizontally to the right.
The game ball BA1 that has rolled horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the second plate 783 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.

FIG. 64 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member.
As shown in FIG. 64, when the rotating member 78F rotates around the rotating shaft 781F due to the game ball colliding with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate 782 rotates. The end surface of the portion 785 on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781F and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F on the rotating member 78F side engage with each other to stop the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F corresponds to the end surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 that is inclined with respect to the plate surface is placed on the rotating member 78F side. has.
Therefore, since the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is moved horizontally to the right. The game ball BA1 that has been rolling will be distributed to the upper stage 71F.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, so that it reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73F. It becomes impossible to roll the subsequent game ball BA2. Further, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78F rotates about the rotating shaft 781F due to the engagement of the first plate portion 785 and the rolling surface 74. Therefore, the subsequent game balls BA2 will not be distributed to the upper stage 71F. Specifically, the subsequent game balls BA2 are distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. It turns out.

As mentioned above, the upper stage 71F distributes about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to the route that enters the guide path 75F, and sends about 60% of the game balls to the game ball route. It is configured to distribute the fall routes into the area.
As mentioned above, the lower stage 72 distributes about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 to the route that enters the guide path 77, and routes about 90% of the game balls to the game ball route. It is configured to distribute the fall routes into the area.

When the plate surface of the first plate portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate portion 786 of the first plate 782 protrudes toward the left side in the horizontal direction. Therefore, the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 are It may collide with the second plate-shaped portion 786. The length of the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is such that the proportion of game balls colliding with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 among the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 is approximately 20. %, but it may be set to a different percentage.

When a game ball collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates around the rotation axis 781F, so the rotation member 78F rotates around the rotation axis 781F (in the figure). (see counterclockwise direction arrow). Furthermore, the plate 783 rotates with the rotation of the rotating shaft 781F.
When the rotating member 78F rotates around the rotating shaft 781F due to the collision of the game ball with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78F rotates between the end surface of the second plate 783 on the opposite side to the rotating shaft 781F and the lower stage. The stage 72 engages with the rolling surface 76 and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78F returns to the state shown in FIG. 63.

According to this embodiment, the same operations and effects as (1) to (4), (6), (7), and (9) in the first embodiment can be achieved.

Here, in this embodiment, the game ball existing on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F can enter the upper stage introduction part 751 of the guide path 75F. A state in which a game ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as a first gaming state, and a game ball is present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F. If the state is a second game state, the second game state is such that only game balls existing in a specific area (upper stage 71F) in the game area enter the first ball entry area (upper stage introduction section 751). It is possible. The pachinko machine 1 has a guide means (guiding path 75F) that guides the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that provides a profit to the player. We are prepared.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between the first gaming state and the second gaming state that provides a profit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
Note that in this embodiment, the second gaming state is a gaming state that provides a profit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, but it is a gaming state that does not provide a profit to the player. It may be a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state, or it may be a gaming state that provides the same benefit to the player as the first gaming state.

Considering the invention according to this embodiment from such a point of view, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are capable of handling the first game ball ( It functions as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the game ball BA1) passing through a predetermined area (area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area. .
In addition, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is used to hold a second game ball (game ball BA2) that is fired by the firing handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state. functions as a first game state generating means that generates a first game state when a specific condition is satisfied (when the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786).
Then, the second plate 783 is activated by the second game state generating means based on the fact that the second game ball (game ball BA2) passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. It functions as a restriction means for restricting the occurrence of the second game state.

According to this, while the second gaming state is occurring, only game balls existing in a specific area in the gaming area can enter the upper introduction section 751, and the guide path 75F is designed to provide profits to the player. Since the game ball that has entered the upper introduction part 751 is guided to the operating port 25, the player can enjoy the benefit when the second game state occurs. Further, the second plate 783 allows the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 to perform a second game based on the fact that the second game ball passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. Since generation of the game state is restricted, the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Further, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 moves the second game ball (game ball BA2) to a predetermined area (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. (area) and another area (area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782).

According to this, since the second plate 783 passes through another area different from the predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the second gaming state, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 It is possible to reliably limit the occurrence of the condition.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 is in a restricted state (a state in which the second plate 783 is erected) that restricts the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second gaming state. ), and a non-limiting state (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are not restricted from generating the second gaming state. Then, when the second gaming state is generated in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the state is switched to the restricted state, and when the first gaming state is generated in the second plate-shaped portion 786, the state is switched to the non-restricted state. switching to the state.

According to this, the second plate 783 switches to the restricted state when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and the second plate part 786 switches the first game state to the restricted state. Since the state is switched to the non-restricted state when the state is generated, the second game state is switched to the non-restricted state without restricting the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state while the first game state is occurring. During the occurrence of the second gaming state, it is possible to reliably restrict the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second gaming state.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 only hits some of the second game balls (the game ball BA2 that collided with the second plate-shaped portion 786) that satisfies a predetermined condition. Based on this, certain conditions are established.

According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 establishes the specific condition based only on some of the second game balls that satisfy the predetermined condition, so the player can Attention is paid to whether or not the game ball No. 2 satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 in the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state.

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the first game ball to generate the second game state, so the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 Also, the configuration of the second plate 783 can be simplified.

Further, in this embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 in the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state. In other words, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 were displaced by the propulsive force of the game ball BA1.
On the other hand, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced by the driving force of a motor or the like. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and when the sensor detects the game ball, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate a second gaming state. Also, for example, if a sensor that detects a game ball is attached to the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, and the sensor detects a game ball, whether or not to generate the second game state is determined. A lottery may be executed, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate a second gaming state. At this time, if the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the second gaming state is not won, the game balls existing in the area between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are moved to the lower stage 72. It may be guided or discharged into the gaming area.

In this way, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are arranged so that the game ball BA1 fired with the firing handle 16 during the first game state is in a predetermined area in the game area (the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, the area between nails NL1 and nails NL2 provided in the left side area of the center frame 37, etc.). If a game state is generated and the state generation lottery is not won, the second game state may not be generated.
According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is not won. Since this does not occur, the player will pay attention to the result of the state occurrence lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 in the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state.

According to this, the second plate-like part 786 displaces the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 with the second game ball to generate the first game state, so the second plate-like part 786 The configuration can be simplified.

Further, in this embodiment, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 causes the first game state to occur by displacing the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 in the game ball BA2. In other words, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 was displacing the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 by the propulsive force of the game ball BA2.
On the other hand, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 may be displaced by the driving force of a motor or the like. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to a gap region formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and this sensor When a game ball is detected, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first game state. Furthermore, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, and this sensor may be used to play the game. When a ball is detected, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate the first gaming state, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are displaced to generate the first gaming state. may be generated. At this time, if the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the first gaming state is not won, the The game balls existing in the area of the gap may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be discharged to the game area.

In this way, the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 is configured to prevent the game ball BA2 fired by the firing handle 16 during the second game state from occurring in a predetermined area in the game area (rolling of the lower stage 72). (such as the area of the gap formed between the surface 76 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left side area of the center frame 37). The first game state may be caused to occur if the state generation lottery executed based on passing is won, and the first game state may not be generated if the state generation lottery is not won. .
According to this, the second plate-shaped portion 786 generates the first gaming state when winning the state generating lottery, and does not generate the first gaming state when not winning the state generating lottery. Therefore, the player will pay attention to the result of the state occurrence lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.
Note that the first game state generation means may determine that a state generation lottery is won when a specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, the specific condition may be established when a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be established when a predetermined number of game balls enter the big prize opening, V prize opening, etc. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the state in which the game balls can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first gaming state, and the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F The state in which the game balls are present, in other words, the state in which the game balls can flow down the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. The upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72 formed a flow path leading to the upper operating port 25.
On the other hand, the configuration for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be different from the configuration for switching each flow path of the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72. For example, the configuration may be such that the flow path leading to the big winning hole, the flow path leading to the V winning hole, the flow path leading to the general winning hole, the flow path leading to each operating hole, the flow path leading to the through gate, etc. , the configuration may be such that each channel leading to the two types of V winning ports is switched, or the channel leading to the upper operating port and the channel leading to the lower operating port may be switched, and any channel may be used. It may be configured to switch between the two. Further, these channels may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside an accessory. Furthermore, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state; for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and the specific The control state (opening/closing execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

Further, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 moves the second game ball (game ball BA2) to a predetermined area (between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. It functions as a game ball guiding means for guiding the game ball to another area (the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped part 786 of the first plate 782). do.

According to this, the second plate 783 guides the player to another area different from the predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the second gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind. can.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the second plate 783 operates in a game ball guiding state (a second game ball guidance state) in which the second game ball is guided to another region different from a predetermined region in the game region during the occurrence of the second game state. 2 plate 783 in an upright state) and a game ball non-guidance state (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first game ball is guided to a predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the first game state. have. Then, when the second game state is generated in the first plate 782 and the second plate 783, it is switched to the game ball guiding state, and when the first game state is generated in the second plate-shaped portion 786, Switching to game ball non-guidance state.

According to this, the second plate 783 switches to the game ball guiding state when the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and the second plate 786 switches to the game ball guiding state. Since the game ball non-guidance state is switched when the game state occurs, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are prevented from generating the second game state while the first game state is occurring. It is possible to reliably restrict the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state while the second game state is occurring.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 is used as the game ball guide means, but during the occurrence of the second game state, the second game ball is moved to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area. It may be of any type as long as it can be induced. For example, the game ball guide means may employ various members (accessories) such as nails and windmills, a center frame, and a valve that switches the flow path of the game ball. Further, the game ball guiding means may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside the accessory.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 are arranged so that the first game ball (game ball BA1) fired with the firing handle 16 during the first game state is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. A second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on passing through the region (the region between the first plate 782 and the second plate 783) and being displaced by contacting the first game ball. It is functioning as.
In addition, the stage distribution mechanism 73F is configured such that the second game ball (game ball BA2) fired by the firing handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state is placed in a predetermined area in the game area. (the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped part 786 of the first plate 782), and comes into contact with the second game ball and is displaced. Based on this, it functions as a first game state generating means that generates a first game state.
Then, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 send the first game ball that has generated the second game state to the player for a first profit (approximately 40% of the game ball enters the guide path 75F). The stage distribution mechanism 73F directs the player to the first profit giving area (upper stage 71F) where the second game ball that has caused the first gaming state is given to the player. The player is guided to a second benefit giving area (lower stage 72) that gives a second profit different from the profit (approximately 10% of the game balls are distributed to the route in which the balls enter the guide path 77).

According to this, the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that has caused the second game state to the upper stage 71F that gives the first profit to the player, and the stage shaker. The separating mechanism 73F guides the second game ball that has generated the first game state to the lower stage 72 that gives the player a second profit different from the first profit, so the player can The focus will be on where they are directed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 satisfies the first condition (ball entering the upper stage introducing section 751) , the second game ball that enters the first profit ball entry area (upper introduction part 751) that gives the first profit and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73F is If a second condition different from the above conditions (ball entering the lower introduction section 771) is met, the ball enters the second profit entry area (lower introduction section 771) that provides a second profit.

According to this, the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 is moved to the upper stage introduction part that gives the first profit when the first condition is satisfied. The second game ball that enters the ball 751 and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73F will be given a second profit if it satisfies a second condition different from the first condition. Since the ball enters the lower introduction section 771, the player pays attention to whether or not the first condition and the second condition are satisfied.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are placed in both areas of the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771. It is discharged to another area (gaming area) different from that of the game area.

According to this, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are different from the areas of both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771. Since the balls are ejected to another area, the player pays attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball are ejected to the other area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state in which the game ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first gaming state, and the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F The state in which the game balls are present, in other words, the state in which the game balls can be caused to flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. Then, the upper stage 71F receives the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782 and the second plate 783 when the first condition (ball entering the upper introduction part 751) is satisfied. The lower stage 72 functions as a first profit entry region (upper introduction section 751) that provides a first profit, and the lower stage 72 functions as a first profit entry region (upper introduction section 751) that provides a first profit. When the second game ball is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73F, it enters the second profit ball entry area (lower introduction part 771) that gives the second profit. It functioned as a second profit-giving area.
On the other hand, the first profit giving area and the second profit giving area may have different configurations from the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72. For example, it may be a large winning opening, a V winning opening, a general winning opening, each operating opening, a through gate, etc., and may be any area as long as it can provide profits to the player. . Furthermore, these areas may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside an accessory. Furthermore, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state; for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and the specific The control state (opening/closing execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

[Fourth embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 65 is a front view of a game board according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the third embodiment, the center frame 37 includes a two-stage stage 7F provided in a region below the symbol display device 36.
In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, the center frame 37 is provided with a two-stage stage 7G provided in the lower area of the symbol display device 36. different from.

The two-stage stage 7G includes an upper stage 71F arranged on the vertically upper side (on the display screen G side of the symbol display device 36) and a lower stage 72 arranged on the vertically lower side of the upper stage 71F, and flows down the gaming area. It is provided with a stage distribution mechanism 73G that distributes game balls to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72.

FIG. 66 is an enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage. FIG. 67 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage.
The stage distribution mechanism 73G includes a rotating member 78G provided on the left side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F, as shown in FIGS. 66 and 67.

The rotating member 78G includes a rotating shaft 781F that is rotatably attached to the center frame 37 with the horizontal longitudinal direction as the axial direction, and a rotating shaft 781F that is fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F (on the rolling surface 74 side of the upper stage 71F). 1 plate 782G, a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F so as to be substantially perpendicular to the first plate 782G, and a second plate 783 fixed to the horizontal front side of the rotating shaft 781F so as to be substantially perpendicular to the first plate 782G. It is provided with a fourth plate 789G fixed to the horizontal front side and fixed to the opposite side of the second plate 783 with the rotating shaft 781F interposed therebetween.

The first plate 782G is formed into a rectangular plate shape and is fixed to the rotating shaft 781F so as to pass through the rotating shaft 781F along the horizontal front-rear direction. The first plate 782G includes a first plate-shaped portion 785 extending diagonally upward and to the right from the rotation axis 781F. This first plate-shaped portion 785 has an end surface that is inclined with respect to the plate surface on the opposite side to the rotation axis 781F.
The second plate 783 is formed into a rectangular plate shape, and one end of the second plate 783 on the right side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotating shaft 781F. This second plate 783 has an end surface that is inclined with respect to the plate surface on the opposite side to the rotation axis 781F.
The fourth plate 789G is formed into a rectangular plate shape, and one end on the left side in the horizontal direction is fixed to the rotating shaft 781F.

The flow of distributing game balls flowing down the gaming area to either the upper stage 71F or the lower stage 72 by the stage distributing mechanism 73G will be described below.
The game ball BA1 passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left side area of the center frame 37 to reach the stage distribution mechanism 73G (see arrow A in FIG. 65), and as shown in FIG. The plate surface of the second plate 783 is rolled horizontally to the right.
The game ball BA1 rolling horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the second plate 783 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G.

FIG. 68 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member.
As shown in FIG. 68, when the rotating member 78G rotates around the rotating shaft 781F due to the game ball colliding with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G, the first plate-shaped portion of the first plate 782G rotates. The end surface of the portion 785 on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781F and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F on the rotating member 78G side engage with each other to stop the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F corresponds to the end surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782G, and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 that is inclined with respect to the plate surface is placed on the rotating member 78G side. has.
Therefore, since the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782G is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782G is directed horizontally to the right. The game ball BA1 that has been rolling will be distributed to the upper stage 71F.

When the plate surface of the first plate portion 785 of the first plate 782G is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, so that it reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73G. It becomes impossible to roll the subsequent game ball BA2. In addition, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78G rotates about the rotating shaft 781F due to the engagement of the first plate portion 785 and the rolling surface 74. Therefore, the subsequent game balls BA2 will not be distributed to the upper stage 71F. Specifically, the subsequent game balls BA2 are distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F.

As mentioned above, the upper stage 71F distributes about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to the route that enters the guide path 75F, and sends about 60% of the game balls to the game ball route. It is configured to distribute the fall routes into the area.
As mentioned above, the lower stage 72 distributes about 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 to the route that enters the guide path 77, and routes about 90% of the game balls to the game ball route. It is configured to distribute the fall routes into the area.

When the plate surface of the first plate portion 785 of the first plate 782G is connected to the rolling surface 74, the fourth plate 789G protrudes vertically downward, so that the lower stage 72 The game ball BA2 distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 and the rotating shaft 781F collides with the fourth plate 789G.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the fourth plate 789G, the fourth plate 789G rotates around the rotating shaft 781F, so the rotating member 78G disengages the first plate-shaped portion 785 and the rolling surface 74. direction (see the counterclockwise arrow in the figure) about the rotation axis 781F. Furthermore, the plate 783 rotates with the rotation of the rotating shaft 781F.
When the rotating member 78G rotates around the rotating shaft 781F due to the game ball colliding with the fourth plate 789G, the rotating member 78G rotates between the end surface of the second plate 783 on the opposite side to the rotating shaft 781F and the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72. engages and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78G returns to the state shown in FIG. 67.

In this way, in this embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73G switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guiding means. It is equipped with 4 plates 789G (contact means). This contacting means is arranged at a position where it contacts all the game balls among the following game balls different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71F by the guiding means.
According to this, the stage distribution mechanism 73G includes a contact means that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guiding means, The contact means is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with all the game balls that are different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guiding means, so the player can The movement of the game ball guided to the upper stage 71 can be enjoyed with peace of mind.

According to this embodiment, in addition to the same actions and effects as (1) to (4), (6), and (9) in the first embodiment, the following actions and effects can be achieved. can play.
(11) The stage distribution mechanism 73G includes a contact means that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the guiding means, and the contact means is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with all of the game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the upper stage 71F by the guiding means, so the player can You can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to 71F with peace of mind.

Here, in this embodiment, the game ball existing on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F can enter the upper stage introduction part 751 of the guide path 75F. A state in which a game ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as a first gaming state, and a game ball is present on the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F. If the state is a second game state, the second game state is such that only game balls existing in a specific area (upper stage 71F) in the game area enter the first ball entry area (upper stage introduction section 751). It is possible. The pachinko machine 1 has a guide means (guiding path 75F) that guides the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to the second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that provides a profit to the player. We are prepared.
Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 switches between the first gaming state and the second gaming state that provides a profit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
Note that in this embodiment, the second gaming state is a gaming state that provides a profit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, but it is a gaming state that does not provide a profit to the player. It may be a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state, or it may be a gaming state that provides the same benefit to the player as the first gaming state.

Considering the invention according to this embodiment from such a point of view, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are capable of handling the first game ball ( It functions as a second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on the game ball BA1) passing through a predetermined area in the game area (the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783). .
In addition, the fourth plate 789G is configured such that the second game ball (game ball BA2) fired by the firing handle 16 after the first game ball satisfies a specific condition during the second game state. (when the game ball BA2 collides with the fourth plate 789G), it functions as a first game state generating means that generates the first game state.
Then, the second plate 783 is activated by the second game state generating means based on the fact that the second game ball (game ball BA2) passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. It functions as a restricting means for restricting the occurrence of the second gaming state.

According to this, while the second gaming state is occurring, only game balls existing in a specific area in the gaming area can enter the upper introduction section 751, and the guide path 75F is designed to provide profits to the player. Since the game ball that has entered the upper introduction part 751 is guided to the operating port 25, the player can enjoy the benefit when the second game state occurs. Further, the second plate 783 allows the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 to perform a second game based on the fact that the second game ball passes through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. Since generation of the game state is restricted, the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Further, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 moves the second game ball (game ball BA2) to a predetermined area (between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. (area) and another area (area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F).

According to this, the second plate 783 passes through another area different from the predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the second gaming state, so the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 It is possible to reliably limit the occurrence of the condition.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 is in a restricted state (a state in which the second plate 783 is erected) that restricts the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 from generating the second gaming state. ), and a non-limiting state (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are not restricted from generating the second gaming state. Then, when the second gaming state is generated on the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, the state is switched to the restricted state, and when the first gaming state is generated on the fourth plate 789G, the state is switched to the non-restricted state. It's switching.

According to this, the second plate 783 switches to the restricted state when the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 generate the second gaming state, and the fourth plate 789G switches the first gaming state to the restricted state. Since the state is switched to a non-restricted state when the first game state is generated, the second game state can be changed without restricting the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state while the first game state is occurring. It is possible to reliably restrict the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state while the game state is occurring.

Further, in this embodiment, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 in the game ball BA1 to generate a second game state.

According to this, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the first game ball to generate the second game state, so the first plate 782G Also, the configuration of the second plate 783 can be simplified.

Further, in this embodiment, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 displace the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 in the game ball BA1 to generate the second game state. In other words, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 were displaced by the propulsive force of the game ball BA1.
On the other hand, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced by the driving force of a motor or the like. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to a region between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and when the sensor detects a game ball, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate a second gaming state. Also, for example, if a sensor for detecting a game ball is attached to the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, and the sensor detects a game ball, whether or not to generate the second game state is determined. A lottery may be executed, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate a second gaming state. At this time, if the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the second gaming state is not won, the game balls existing in the area between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are moved to the lower stage 72. It may be guided or discharged into the gaming area.

In this way, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are arranged so that the game ball BA1 fired with the firing handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state can be placed in a predetermined area (the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) in the game area. 783, the area between nails NL1 and nails NL2 provided in the left side area of the center frame 37, etc.). If a game state is generated and the state generation lottery is not won, the second game state may not be generated.
According to this, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and generate the second game state when the state generation lottery is not won. Since the state occurrence lottery does not occur, the player pays attention to the result of the state occurrence lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.

Further, in this embodiment, the fourth plate 789G displaces the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 in the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state.

According to this, the fourth plate 789G generates the first game state by displacing the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 with the second game ball, so the configuration of the fourth plate 789G can be simplified. can do.

Further, in this embodiment, the fourth plate 789G displaces the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 in the game ball BA2 to generate the first game state. In other words, the fourth plate 789G was displacing the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 by the driving force of the game ball BA2.
On the other hand, the fourth plate 789G may be displaced by the driving force of a motor or the like. In this case, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball is installed in the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F, and when the sensor detects the game ball. Alternatively, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first gaming state. Also, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball may be attached to the gap area formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F, and when the sensor detects a game ball, the second A lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to generate the first gaming state, and if the lottery is won, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 may be displaced to generate the first gaming state. At this time, if you do not win the lottery to determine whether or not to generate the first game state, the The game balls placed in the player may be guided to the lower stage 72, or may be discharged to the game area.

In this way, the fourth plate 789G is arranged so that the game ball BA2 fired with the firing handle 16 during the second game state can reach a predetermined area in the game area (the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F). and the area between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided on the left side of the center frame 37). Alternatively, the first game state may be generated, and if the state generation lottery is not won, the first game state may not be generated.
According to this, the fourth plate 789G generates the first gaming state when the state generation lottery is won, and does not generate the first gaming state when the state generation lottery is not won. The player will pay attention to the result of the state occurrence lottery. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can increase the attention of players to the game.
Note that the first game state generation means may determine that a state generation lottery is won when a specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition may be any condition. For example, the specific condition may be established when a predetermined time has elapsed, or may be established when a predetermined number of game balls enter the big prize opening, V prize opening, etc. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the state in which the game balls can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first gaming state, and the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F The state in which the game balls are present, in other words, the state in which the game balls can flow down the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. The upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72 formed a flow path leading to the upper operating port 25.
On the other hand, the configuration for switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be different from the configuration for switching each flow path of the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72. For example, the configuration may be such that the flow path leading to the big winning hole, the flow path leading to the V winning hole, the flow path leading to the general winning hole, the flow path leading to each operating hole, the flow path leading to the through gate, etc. , the configuration may be such that each channel leading to the two types of V winning ports is switched, or the channel leading to the upper operating port and the channel leading to the lower operating port may be switched, and any channel may be used. It may be configured to switch between the two. Further, these channels may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside an accessory. Furthermore, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state; for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and the specific The control state (opening/closing execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

Further, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 moves the second game ball (game ball BA2) to a predetermined area (between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. It functions as a game ball guiding means that guides the ball to another area (the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F).

According to this, the second plate 783 guides the player to another area different from the predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the second gaming state, so that the player can enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind. can.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the second plate 783 operates in a game ball guiding state (a second game ball guidance state) in which the second game ball is guided to another region different from a predetermined region in the game region during the occurrence of the second game state. 2 plate 783 in an upright state) and a game ball non-guidance state (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) in which the first game ball is guided to a predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the first game state. have. Then, when the second game state is generated on the first plate 782G and the second plate 783, the game ball guiding state is switched to, and when the first game state is generated on the fourth plate 789G, the game ball guide state is activated. Switching to non-induced state.

According to this, the second plate 783 switches to the game ball guiding state when the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 generate the second game state, and the fourth plate 789G switches the second game state to the first game state. Since the state is switched to the game ball non-guidance state when the state is generated, there is no restriction on the generation of the second game state at the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 during the occurrence of the first game state. , it is possible to reliably restrict the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 from generating the second game state while the second game state is occurring.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second plate 783 is used as the game ball guide means, but during the occurrence of the second game state, the second game ball is moved to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area. It may be of any type as long as it can be induced. For example, the game ball guide means may employ various members (accessories) such as nails and windmills, a center frame, and a valve that switches the flow path of the game ball. Further, the game ball guiding means may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside the accessory.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 are arranged so that the first game ball (game ball BA1) fired with the firing handle 16 during the occurrence of the first game state is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. A second game state generating means that generates a second game state based on passing through the region (the region between the first plate 782G and the second plate 783) and being displaced by contacting the first game ball. It is functioning as.
In addition, the stage distribution mechanism 73G is configured such that the second game ball (game ball BA2) fired by the firing handle 16 after the first game ball during the occurrence of the second game state is placed in a predetermined area in the game area. (the area of the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the rotating shaft 781F), and is brought into contact with the second game ball and displaced, the first game state It functions as a first game state generating means for generating.
Then, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 send the first game ball that has generated the second game state to the player for a first profit (approximately 40% of the game ball enters the guide path 75F). The stage distribution mechanism 73G directs the player to the first profit giving area (upper stage 71F) where the second game ball that has caused the first game state is given to the player. The player is guided to a second benefit giving area (lower stage 72) that gives a second profit different from the profit (approximately 10% of the game balls are distributed to the route that enters the guide path 77).

According to this, the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 guide the first game ball that has caused the second game state to the upper stage 71F that gives the first profit to the player, and the stage shaker. The separating mechanism 73G guides the second game ball that has caused the first gaming state to the lower stage 72 that gives the player a second profit different from the first profit, so the player can The focus will be on where they are directed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 satisfies the first condition (ball entering the upper introduction part 751) , the second game ball that enters the first profit ball entry area (upper introduction part 751) that gives the first profit and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73G is If a second condition different from the above conditions (ball entering the lower introduction section 771) is met, the ball enters the second profit entry area (lower introduction section 771) that provides a second profit.

According to this, the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 is moved to the upper stage introduction part that gives the first profit when the first condition is satisfied. The second game ball that enters the ball 751 and is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73G will be given a second profit if it satisfies a second condition different from the first condition. Since the ball enters the lower introduction section 771, the player pays attention to whether or not the first condition and the second condition are satisfied.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are placed in both areas of the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771. It is discharged to another area (gaming area) different from that of the game area.

According to this, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition are different from the areas of both the upper introduction section 751 and the lower introduction section 771. Since the balls are ejected to another area, the player pays attention to whether the first game ball and the second game ball are ejected to the other area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state in which the game ball can flow down the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F (approximately horizontal state of the second plate 783) is defined as the first gaming state, and the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71F The state in which the game balls are present, in other words, the state in which the game balls can be caused to flow down onto the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 is defined as the second game state. Then, the upper stage 71F receives the first game ball guided to the upper stage 71F by the first plate 782G and the second plate 783 when the first condition (ball entering the upper introduction part 751) is satisfied. The lower stage 72 functions as a first profit entry region (upper introduction section 751) that provides a first profit, and the lower stage 72 functions as a first profit entry region (upper introduction section 751) that provides a first profit. When the second game ball is guided to the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73G, it enters the second profit ball entry area (lower introduction part 771) that gives the second profit. It functioned as a second profit-giving area.
On the other hand, the first profit giving area and the second profit giving area may have different configurations from the upper stage 71F and the lower stage 72. For example, it may be a large winning opening, a V winning opening, a general winning opening, each operating opening, a through gate, etc., and may be any area as long as it can provide profits to the player. . Furthermore, these areas may be located in any part of the gaming machine, for example, inside the grand prize opening or inside an accessory. Furthermore, the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any gaming state; for example, the normal control state (low probability mode and high probability mode) may be the first gaming state, and the specific The control state (opening/closing execution mode) may be the second gaming state.

[Fifth embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the drawings.
In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the parts that have already been described, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 69 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73 includes a rotating member 78 provided on the left side of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 and a door member 79 provided on the left guide portion 753 of the upper stage 71. It was equipped with
In contrast, in the present embodiment, the stage distribution mechanism 73H includes a rotating member 78, a door member 79, and a blocking means 70 that prevents the game balls from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H. This differs from the first embodiment in this point.

The baffle means 70 includes a baffle plate 701 provided at the upper left position of the rotating shaft 781 of the rotating member 78, a baffle plate drive unit 702 that drives the baffle plate 701, and a rotation detection sensor 703 that detects the rotational state of the rotating member 78. It is equipped with

The baffle plate 701 is formed into a rectangular plate shape. By moving forward toward the window panel 123 and protruding from the game board 2, the baffle plate 701 creates an obstructive state in which it prevents the game balls from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H, and a state in which it prevents the game balls from reaching the inside of the game board 2. By retreating and being buried in the game board 2, it has a non-obstructing state in which it does not interfere with the game balls reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H.
Further, the baffle plate 701 is connected to a baffle plate drive unit 702 mounted on the back side of the game board 2. This baffle plate 701 is set to either a baffling state or a non-baffling state by being driven by a baffle plate drive unit 702.

The rotation detection sensor 703 is attached to the horizontal rear side of the rotation shaft 781 (on the left guide portion 753 side of the upper stage 71). This rotation detection sensor 703 detects two rotation states: a state in which the second plate 783 is in an upright state, and a state in which the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state.

<Electrical configuration of audio emission control device>
FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio emission control device.
As shown in FIG. 70, the audio emission control device 5H includes an audio emission control board 51, an MPU 52 mounted on the audio emission control board 51, and a ROM 53 and a RAM 54 that constitute the MPU 52. Here, the MPU 52 is an element in which, in addition to the ROM 53 and the RAM 54, a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip.

MPU52 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 52 is connected to the main controller 4 as described above. Further, the input port of the MPU 52 is connected to a rotation detection sensor 703 that detects the rotation state of the rotation member 78. The output port of the MPU 52 is connected to the various lamp sections 124, 371 to 373, the speaker section 125, and the display control device 6. Further, the output port of the MPU 52 is connected to a baffle plate drive unit 702 that moves the baffle plate 701 in a protruding and retracting motion.
Note that the audio light emission control board 51 has a driver circuit. The MPU 52 executes drive control of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the baffle plate drive unit 702 to cause the baffle plate 701 to protrude and retract.

Hereinafter, a flow will be described in which the game balls flowing down the game area are distributed to either the upper stage 71 or the lower stage 72 by the stage distribution mechanism 73H.
The MPU 52 periodically (for example, every 2 msec) uses the rotation detection sensor 703 to detect two rotational states: an upright state of the second plate 783 and a substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783.

In the state of FIG. 69, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in a substantially horizontal state, so that the game ball BA1 that has reached the stage distribution mechanism 73H can be rolled.
When the MPU 52 detects the substantially horizontal rotating state of the second plate 783, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the baffle plate drive unit 702 to set the baffle plate 701 to a non-obstructing state. In addition, in FIG. 69, the non-obstructing state is shown by showing the baffle plate 701 in white.
Since the baffle plate 701 is set to a non-obstructive state, the game ball BA1 passes between the nails NL1 and NL2 provided in the left area of the center frame 37 and reaches the stage distribution mechanism 73H ( (see arrow A in FIG. 45), and as shown in FIG. 69, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is rolled toward the horizontal right direction.
The game ball BA1 that has rolled horizontally to the right on the plate surface of the second plate 783 collides with the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782.

FIG. 71 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the two-stage stage after rotation of the rotating member.
As shown in FIG. 71, when the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the collision of the game ball BA1 with the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782, the first plate of the first plate 782 rotates. The end surface of the shaped portion 785 on the side opposite to the rotating shaft 781 and the end surface of the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 on the rotating member 78 side are engaged to stop the rotation. In other words, the rolling surface 74 of the upper stage 71 corresponds to the end surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782, and the end surface inclined with respect to the plate surface of the rolling surface 74 is placed on the rotating member 78 side. has.
Therefore, since the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is moved horizontally to the right. The game ball BA1 that has been rolling will be distributed to the upper stage 71.

When the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state.
Further, the plate surface of the third plate 784 is close to the left guide portion 753 of the guide path 75, and the permanent magnet 787 of the third plate 784 is inserted into the left guide portion 753 through an opening 756 formed in the left guide portion 753. will be exposed inside.

Here, as described above, the upper stage 71 distributes about 40% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 74 to the route that enters the guide path 75, and distributes about 60% of the game balls to the route that enters the guide path 75. It is configured so that it is sorted into routes that fall into the game area.
In addition, as described above, the lower stage 72 distributes approximately 10% of the game balls that have reached the rolling surface 76 to the route that enters the guide path 77, and distributes approximately 90% of the game balls to the route that enters the guide path 77. It is configured to distribute the fall routes into the area.
The flow of game balls sorted into the routes falling into the game area of the upper stage 71 will be described below. Note that the flow of game balls distributed to the routes entering the guide path 75 of the upper stage 71 and the flow of game balls distributed to each route of the lower stage 72 are the same as in the first embodiment.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing game balls sorted into routes falling into the game area.
As shown in FIG. 72, the game ball BA1 that has been sorted to the route of falling into the game area will fall into the game area along the slope of the concave portion 742. In this case, the game ball BA1 does not collide with the revolving door 792, so the permanent magnet 793 of the revolving door 792 is connected to the permanent magnet of the third plate 784 through the opening 756 formed in the left guide part 753. 787, and the rotating member 78 will not rotate.

When the MPU 52 detects the rotational state of the second plate 783 in the upright state, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the baffle plate drive unit 702 to repeatedly move the baffle plate 701 into a non-obstructing state and a blocking state at a predetermined period. Set. Note that in FIG. 71, the baffle plate 701 is shown with diagonal lines to indicate a blocking state, and in FIG. 72, the baffle board 701 is shown in white to indicate a non-baffling state.

Here, the MPU 52 shortens the period during which the baffle board 701 is set to a non-obstructing state (for example, 0.3 sec), lengthens the period during which it is set to a disturb state (for example, 0.7 sec), and causes the stage distribution mechanism 73H to In the high-frequency nuisance mode, which frequently obstructs the arrival of the ball, the period in which the baffle plate 701 is set to a non-obstructing state is lengthened (for example, 0.7 sec), and the period in which it is set to a hindrance state is shortened (for example, 0.7 sec). .3 sec), and a low-frequency nuisance mode in which the game balls are less frequently obstructed from reaching the stage distribution mechanism 73H.

When the MPU 52 detects a transition in the rotational state from the substantially horizontal state of the second plate 783 to the upright state of the second plate 783, the MPU 52 executes a lottery to select either the high-frequency nuisance mode or the low-frequency nuisance mode. Then, drive control of the baffle plate drive unit 702 is executed in the mode won in this lottery. Although the MPU 52 executes a lottery in which the high-frequency nuisance mode and low-frequency nuisance mode are each selected with a probability of 50%, it may execute a lottery in which the high-frequency nuisance mode and the low-frequency nuisance mode are selected with a probability different from this.

When the MPU 52 sets the baffle plate 701 to the obstructing state, the subsequent game balls BA2 are obstructed by the baffle plate 701 and cannot reach the stage distribution mechanism 73H, as shown in FIG. In this case, the subsequent game balls BA2 are distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. It turns out.
Here, when the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 is in a state of protruding toward the left side in the horizontal direction. It becomes. However, since the baffle plate 701 is provided at a position vertically above the tip of the second plate-like part 786, the game ball that is obstructed by the baffle plate 701 is moved to the second plate-like part 786 of the first plate 782. There will be no collision.

On the other hand, when the MPU 52 sets the baffle plate 701 to the non-obstructed state, the subsequent game ball BA2 is moved to the stage distribution mechanism 73H without being obstructed by the baffle plate 701, as shown in FIG. reach. However, when the plate surface of the first plate-shaped portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the plate surface of the second plate 783 is in an upright state, so the stage distribution mechanism 73H It is no longer possible to roll the subsequent game ball BA2 that has reached this point. Further, when the subsequent game ball BA2 collides with the plate surface of the second plate 783, the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the engagement of the first plate portion 785 and the rolling surface 74. Therefore, the subsequent game balls BA2 will not be distributed to the upper stage 71. Specifically, the subsequent game balls BA2 are distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782. It turns out.
Here, when the plate surface of the first plate-like portion 785 of the first plate 782 is connected to the rolling surface 74, the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 is in a state of protruding toward the left side in the horizontal direction. It becomes. Therefore, the subsequent game balls BA2 distributed to the lower stage 72 through the gap formed between the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782 are It may collide with the second plate-like portion 786 of 782. The length of the second plate-like portion 786 of the first plate 782 is such that when the MPU 52 sets the baffle plate 701 to the non-baffling state, the length of the first plate 782 among the game balls distributed to the lower stage 72 is Although the proportion of game balls colliding with the second plate-shaped portion 786 is set to be about 20%, it may be set to a different proportion from this.

When the game ball BA2 collides with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the first plate 782 rotates around the rotation shaft 781, so the rotation member 78 rotates around the rotation shaft 781 (see FIG. (see center-counterclockwise direction arrow). Further, each plate 783, 784 rotates as the rotating shaft 781 rotates.
When the rotating member 78 rotates about the rotating shaft 781 due to the collision of the game ball BA2 with the second plate-shaped portion 786 of the first plate 782, the rotating member 78 rotates between the end face of the second plate 783 on the opposite side to the rotating shaft 781, It engages with the rolling surface 76 of the lower stage 72 and stops its rotation. As a result, the rotating member 78 returns to the state shown in FIG. 69.
Note that when the MPU 52 detects the rotational state of the second plate 783 in an upright state and then detects rotation about the rotating shaft 781, the MPU 52 immediately controls the drive of the baffle plate drive unit 702 to remove the baffle plate. Since the plate 701 is set in a non-obstructing state, rotation about the rotating shaft 781 is not obstructed by the baffle plate 701.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second gaming state is a first probability state (high-frequency nuisance mode) that causes the first gaming state generating means to generate the first gaming state based on the first probability. , a second probability state (low-frequency nuisance mode) in which the first gaming state generating means generates the first gaming state based on a second probability higher than the first probability.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first probability state is generated by causing the first gaming state generating means to generate the first gaming state based on the first probability in the second gaming state. In the state, it is indirectly prescribed that the second gaming state generating means is caused to generate the second gaming state based on the first probability.
In addition, in the present embodiment, the second probability state is such that the first gaming state generating means is configured to cause the first gaming state to enter the first gaming state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability in the second gaming state. By generating this, it is indirectly prescribed that the second gaming state generating means is caused to generate the second gaming state in the first gaming state based on the second probability.

In other words, in this embodiment, the first gaming state is a first probability state (high-frequency nuisance mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on the first probability. , a second probability state (low-frequency nuisance mode) in which the second game state generating means generates a second game state based on a second probability higher than the first probability.
In addition, in this embodiment, the first probability state and the second probability state indirectly cause the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on the first probability and the second probability. However, it may be specified directly. In short, the first gaming state includes a first probability state that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate a second gaming state based on a first probability, and a second probability state that has a higher probability than the first probability. It is only necessary to have a second probability state that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on the probability.

According to this, the first gaming state includes a first probability state that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate a second gaming state based on the first probability, and a first probability state that has a higher probability than the first probability. Since the second probability state causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on the second probability, the player pays attention to the probability state of the second gaming state generating means and The game is played in the hope that the game will be in a 2-probability state. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

According to this embodiment, in addition to being able to achieve the same actions and effects as those of the first embodiment, the following actions and effects can also be achieved.
(12) The first gaming state includes a first probability state that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate a second gaming state based on a first probability, and a second probability state that has a higher probability than the first probability. The player pays attention to the probability state of the second gaming state generating means and calculates the second probability state by causing the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on the probability of You will play the game in the hope that this will happen. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second game state has the first probability state and the second probability state by setting the periods in which the baffle board 701 is set to the non-obstructing state and the disturbing state to be different. Any configuration may be adopted as long as the probability of causing the first gaming state generating means to generate the first gaming state can be varied. For example, the second game state may be a first probability state in which the baffle board 701 is set in a disturbing state, and a second probability state in which a state in which the baffle board 701 is set in a non-disturbing state.
Further, in the present embodiment, the second game state has the first probability state and the second probability state by setting the baffle board 701 to the non-obstructing state and the obstructing state, but the first gaming state A different configuration from the baffle plate 701 may be adopted as long as the probability of causing the first game state to occur in the generating means can be varied. For example, in the second game state, a motor is attached to the rotating shaft 781 instead of the baffle plate 701, a state in which a large load is applied to the rotating shaft 781 and it is difficult to rotate is the first probability state, and a small load is applied to the rotating shaft 781. A state in which it is easy to rotate may be set as a second probability state.

[Group of inventions extracted from each embodiment and each reference form]
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments and each reference form will be explained. Note that among the features of the present invention group, structures corresponding to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each reference form are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each reference form. Rather, modifications, improvements, etc., and combinations of each feature within the range that can achieve the purpose of the features of the present invention group are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Characteristics Group A>
Feature A1.
A firing means (a firing handle 16) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area that enters the ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. A starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and a lower operating port 26) to execute, and a variable display means (symbol display device 36) to perform a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means. , a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising performance execution means (sound emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to perform a performance,
The performance execution means is
a first performance means (notice pending performance determination process) that causes the variable display means to execute a first performance (pre-reading performance) for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a first opportunity;
Based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity, a second effect (special effect) that overlaps with the first effect and different from the first effect is displayed on the variable display means during the predetermined period. a second performance means (special suspension performance determination process) for executing a performance for extinguishing suspension;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first performance means continues to execute the first performance after the second performance ends.

According to feature A1 of the present invention group, the second presentation means displays a display overlapping with the first presentation on the variable display means during a predetermined period based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity. A second performance different from the first performance is executed, and the first performance means continues to execute the first performance after the second performance ends. According to this, the gaming machine cannot cause the variable display means to execute the second effect based on the establishment of the first opportunity even if the variable display means is in a state of executing the first effect for a predetermined period. Therefore, after the second performance is finished, the first performance can be continued. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play games comfortably.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the present invention group,
The first effect means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect when the second effect causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, and the second effect causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect; A gaming machine characterized in that when the variable display means ends the second effect, the variable display means is caused to restart the first effect.

According to feature A2 of the present invention group, the first effect means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect when the second effect causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, and the first effect causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect; When the means causes the variable display means to end the second effect, the variable display means restarts the first effect, so even if the first effect is being executed, the first effect is interrupted. Then, the second performance can be executed, and after the second performance is finished, the first performance can be restarted. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably allow the player to enjoy the first performance.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in feature A1 of the present invention group,
A game characterized in that the first effect causes the second effect to continuously execute the first effect during an overlapping period in which the variable display means executes the second effect. Machine.

According to feature A3 of the present invention group, the first effect causes the second effect to continuously execute the first effect during the overlapping period in which the variable display means executes the second effect. , the first performance can be continuously executed regardless of the second performance. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to enjoy the flow of the first performance.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A3 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry part,
The performance execution means is
By storing data related to the first performance in the first performance layer (third layer L3) using the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry part as the first opportunity, the fluctuation the first presentation means for causing the display means to execute the first presentation;
Using the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section as the second opportunity, data related to the second presentation is transferred to a second presentation layer (second presentation layer) having a higher priority than the first presentation layer. 2 layer L2) to cause the variable display means to execute the second effect;
an image compositing means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by overlapping a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in order of priority;
The second effect means stores data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. A gaming machine with special features.

According to characteristic A4 of the present invention group, the image synthesis means displays the image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer in order of priority. , the second effect means creates a second effect on the first effect layer in which the first effect layer stores data related to the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry section. An image can be displayed on the variable display means by superimposing a second effect layer storing data related to a second effect based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry part. Then, the second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer, so that the first start Even if the first effect is being executed based on the game ball entering the ball entering section, the second effect based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entering section may be overwritten. After the second performance is completed, the first performance means continues the first performance by erasing the data related to the second performance stored in the second performance layer. can be executed.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in feature A4 of the present invention group,
The performance execution means is
information storage means (sub-side holding information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of holding information (sub-side holding information) based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means;
Information storage means (holding determination processing) for storing holding information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entering means,
The information storage means includes:
an execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information while variable display is being executed by the variable display means;
comprising a plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information in a pending state before the variable display is performed by the variable display means,
The information storage means includes:
a first holding storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing holding information in a first holding area (first sub-side holding area SRa) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entering part; ,
A second holding storage that stores holding information in a second holding area (second sub-side holding area SRb) different from the first holding area based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entering section. means (processing of step S2203);
A reservation shift means (reservation shift processing) for shifting reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reservation shift means preferentially shifts reservation information stored in the second reservation area toward the execution area.

According to feature A5 of the present invention group, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that the game ball is not transferred to the first starting ball entry part. Even if the first performance is executed based on the reservation information stored in the first reservation area based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section, , it is possible to execute a second effect based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in feature A5 of the present invention group,
The first effect is, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, the first effect is stored in the first hold area to be consumed before the hold information. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a look-ahead effect that notifies a player of the expectation level of the pending information by using a presentation based on the pending information.

According to feature A6 of the present invention group, since the first performance is a look-ahead performance, the reservation information stored in the first reservation area is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry section. In the state in which the first performance based on is being executed, the second performance based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section. If this happens, the continuity of the first performance will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine can cause the variable display means to execute the second effect even if the variable display means is in a state of executing the first effect for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity. Since the first performance can be continuously executed after the second performance is finished, the player can comfortably play the game without spoiling the continuity of the first performance.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in feature A5 or feature A6 of the present invention group,
The performance execution means is
Information notification means (hold generation processing) for displaying a pending symbol associated with the pending information on the variable display means based on the pending information stored in the information storage means,
The information notification means causes the variable display means to display the pending symbol by storing data related to the pending symbol in a pending symbol layer (first layer L1) that has a higher priority than the second presentation layer. A game machine characterized by displaying information.

According to characteristic A7 of the present invention group, the information notification means displays the pending symbol on the variable display means by storing data related to the pending symbol in the pending symbol layer having a higher priority than the second effect layer. Therefore, when executing the first performance and the second performance, the pending symbols displayed on the variable display means can be surely displayed without overwriting the pending symbols displayed on the variable display means.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in feature A5 or feature A6 of the present invention group,
The performance execution means is
Information notifying means (holding generation processing) for displaying a pending symbol associated with the holding information on the variable display means based on the holding information stored in the information storage means,
The information notification means causes the variable display means to display the suspended symbol by storing data related to the suspended symbol in both the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer. Game machine.

According to feature A8 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the pending symbol by storing data related to the pending symbol in both the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer. When executing the first performance and the second performance, the pending symbols can be surely displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the pending symbols displayed on the variable display means. Further, the information notification means can reliably display the pending symbol on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature A9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A8 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second effect causes the variable display means to end the second effect in a fade-out manner.

According to characteristic A9 of the present invention group, the second performance means ends the second performance by fading it out on the variable display means, so that the second performance can be ended without making the player feel uncomfortable. I can do it.

Feature A10.
In the gaming machine described in feature A9 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation after the first presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation. .

According to feature A10 of the present invention group, the second performance means causes the variable display means to finish the second performance after the first performance means causes the variable display means to execute the first performance. The second performance can be finished and the first performance can be executed without making the person feel uncomfortable.

Feature A11.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A8 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second effect causes the variable display means to immediately end the second effect all at once.

According to feature A11 of the present invention group, the second performance means immediately ends the second performance on the variable display means all at once, so that the second performance can be quickly ended.

According to the feature group A of the present invention, it is possible to allow the player to play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known that are equipped with variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols. This gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts displaying a changing pattern when a game ball enters an operating port (starting ball entry means). For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, it finally stops displaying a specific combination of symbols on the variable display means and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine executes a plurality of types of effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will be shifted to a specific control state after starting the variable display of symbols.

However, since the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner in order to simplify the control of the gaming machine, there is a problem in that it may not be possible for the player to play the game comfortably.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1.
A firing means (a firing handle 16) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area that enters the ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. A starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and a lower operating port 26) to execute, and a variable display means (symbol display device 36) to perform a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means. , a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising performance execution means (sound emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to perform a performance,
The performance execution means is
Based on the establishment of a specific opportunity, by storing data related to a specific effect (pre-read effect and effect for extinguishing special reservation) in the specific effect layer (second layer L2 and third layer L3), the above-mentioned specific effect means (advance pending effect determination process and special pending effect determination process) that causes the variable display means to execute the specific effect;
By storing data related to a common image different from the specific effect in a common layer (first layer L1) that has a higher priority than the specific effect layer, the common image is displayed on the variable display means. Information notification means to display (hold occurrence processing);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an image synthesizing means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the specific effect layer in order of priority.

According to feature B1 of the present invention group, the information notification means stores data related to a common image different from a specific effect in a common layer that has a higher priority than a specific effect layer, so that the variable display means Since the common image is displayed on the variable display means, when a specific effect is executed, the common image displayed on the variable display means can be surely displayed without overwriting the common image displayed on the variable display means. .

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 of the present invention group,
The performance execution means is
information storage means (sub-side holding information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of holding information (sub-side holding information) based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means;
information storage means (reservation determination processing) for storing reservation information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entry means;
and the information notification means for displaying the pending symbols associated with the pending information as the common image on the variable display means based on the pending information stored in the information storage means. .

According to feature B2 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the pending symbol by storing data related to the pending symbol in a common layer that has a higher priority than the specific effect layer. When executing a specific performance, the pending symbols can be surely displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the pending symbols displayed on the variable display means.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in feature B1 or feature B2 of the present invention group,
The specific presentation means is
Based on the establishment of the first opportunity as the specific opportunity, a first performance means (determining advance notice suspension performance) that causes the variable display means to execute a first performance (pre-reading performance) as the specific performance for a predetermined period of time. processing) and
Based on the establishment of a second opportunity as the specific opportunity different from the first opportunity, a presentation that overlaps with the first effect and is different from the first effect is displayed on the variable display means during the predetermined period. a second performance means (special suspension performance determination process) for executing a second performance as the specific performance (a performance for extinguishing the special suspension),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first performance means continues to execute the first performance after the second performance ends.

According to feature B3 of the present invention group, the second presentation means displays a display overlapping with the first presentation on the variable display means during a predetermined period based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity. A second performance different from the first performance is executed, and the first performance means continues to execute the first performance after the second performance ends. According to this, the gaming machine cannot cause the variable display means to execute the second effect based on the establishment of the first opportunity even if the variable display means is in a state of executing the first effect for a predetermined period. Therefore, after the second performance is finished, the first performance can be continued. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play games comfortably.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in feature B3 of the present invention group,
The first effect means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect when the second effect causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, and the second effect causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect; A gaming machine characterized in that when the variable display means ends the second effect, the variable display means is caused to restart the first effect.

According to feature B4 of the present invention group, the first effect means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect when the second effect causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, and the first effect causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect; When the means causes the variable display means to end the second effect, the variable display means restarts the first effect, so even if the first effect is being executed, the first effect is interrupted. Then, the second performance can be executed, and after the second performance is finished, the first performance can be restarted. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably allow the player to enjoy the first performance.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in feature B3 of the present invention group,
A game characterized in that the first effect causes the second effect to continuously execute the first effect during an overlapping period in which the variable display means executes the second effect. Machine.

According to feature B5 of the present invention group, the first effect causes the second effect to continuously execute the first effect during the overlapping period in which the variable display means executes the second effect. , the first performance can be continuously executed regardless of the second performance. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to enjoy the flow of the first performance.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features B3 to B5 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry part,
The specific presentation means is
Using the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry section as the first opportunity, data related to the first performance is transferred to the first performance layer (third layer L3) as the specific performance layer. the first effect means for causing the variable display means to execute the first effect by storing the first effect;
Using the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section as the second opportunity, data relating to the second presentation is stored as the specific presentation layer having a higher priority than the first presentation layer. The second effect means causes the variable display means to execute the second effect by storing the information in a second effect layer (second layer L2),
The second effect means stores data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature B6 of the present invention group, the image composition means displays the image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer in order of priority. , the second effect means creates a second effect on the first effect layer in which the first effect layer stores data related to the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry section. An image can be displayed on the variable display means by superimposing a second effect layer storing data related to a second effect based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry part. Then, the second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer, so that the first start Even if the first effect is being executed based on the game ball entering the ball entering section, the second effect based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entering section may be overwritten. After the second performance is completed, the first performance means continues the first performance by erasing the data related to the second performance stored in the second performance layer. can be executed.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in feature B6 of the present invention group,
The performance execution means is
information storage means (sub-side holding information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of holding information (sub-side holding information) based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means;
Information storage means (holding determination processing) for storing holding information in the information storage means in the order of entry of game balls into the starting ball entering means,
The information storage means includes:
an execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information while variable display is being executed by the variable display means;
comprising a plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information in a pending state before the variable display is performed by the variable display means,
The information storage means includes:
a first holding storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing holding information in a first holding area (first sub-side holding area SRa) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entering part; ,
A second holding storage that stores holding information in a second holding area (second sub-side holding area SRb) different from the first holding area based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entering section. means (processing of step S2203);
A reservation shift means (reservation shift processing) for shifting reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reservation shift means preferentially shifts reservation information stored in the second reservation area toward the execution area.

According to feature B7 of the present invention group, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that the game ball is not transferred to the first starting ball entry part. Even if the first performance is executed based on the reservation information stored in the first reservation area based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section, , it is possible to execute a second effect based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in feature B7 of the present invention group,
The first effect is, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, the first effect is stored in the first hold area to be consumed before the hold information. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a look-ahead effect that notifies a player of the expectation level of the pending information by using a presentation based on the pending information.

According to feature B8 of the present invention group, since the first performance is a look-ahead performance, the reservation information stored in the first reservation area is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry section. In the state in which the first performance based on is being executed, the second performance based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section. If this happens, the continuity of the first performance will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine can cause the variable display means to execute the second effect even if the variable display means is in a state of executing the first effect for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity. Since the first performance can be continuously executed after the second performance is finished, the player can comfortably play the game without spoiling the continuity of the first performance.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features B3 to B8 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second effect causes the variable display means to end the second effect in a fade-out manner.

According to feature B9 of the present invention group, the second performance means ends the second performance by fading it out on the variable display means, so that the second performance can be ended without making the player feel uncomfortable. I can do it.

Feature B10.
In the gaming machine described in feature B9 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second performance means causes the variable display means to end the second performance after the first performance means causes the variable display means to execute the first performance. .

According to feature B10 of the present invention group, the second performance means causes the variable display means to finish the second performance after the first performance means causes the variable display means to execute the first performance, so that the game The second performance can be finished and the first performance can be executed without making the person feel uncomfortable.

Feature B11.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features B3 to B8 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second effect causes the variable display means to immediately end the second effect all at once.

According to feature B11 of the present invention group, the second performance means causes the variable display means to immediately end the second performance all at once, so it is possible to quickly end the second performance.

According to the feature group B of the present invention, it is possible to allow the player to play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that are equipped with variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols. This gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts displaying a changing pattern when a game ball enters an operating port (starting ball entry means). For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, it finally stops displaying a specific combination of symbols on the variable display means and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine stores the reservation information in the information storage means in the order in which the game balls enter the operating opening, and also stores the reservation information related to the reservation information based on the reservation information stored in the information storage means. A common image such as a reserved pattern is displayed on a variable display means. Furthermore, after the game machine starts displaying the symbols in a variable manner, it executes a plurality of types of effects that make the player expect that the game state will shift to a specific control state.

However, since multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, they may affect the common image displayed on the variable display means, making it difficult for the player to feel comfortable. There is a problem in that it may not be possible to play games.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1.
A firing means (a firing handle 16) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area that enters the ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. A starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and a lower operating port 26) to execute, and a variable display means (symbol display device 36) to perform a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means. , a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising performance execution means (sound emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to perform a performance,
The performance execution means is
a first performance means (notice pending performance determination process) that causes the variable display means to execute a first performance (pre-reading performance) for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a first opportunity;
Based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity, a second effect (special effect) that overlaps with the first effect and is different from the first effect is displayed on the variable display means during the predetermined period. a second performance means (special suspension performance determination process) for executing a performance for extinguishing the suspension;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second effect causes the variable display means to end the second effect in a fade-out manner.

According to feature C1 of the present invention group, the second effect means displays a variable display means overlapping with the first effect during a predetermined period based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity. A second performance different from the first performance is executed. Then, the second performance means ends the second performance by fading it out on the variable display means, so that the second performance can be ended without making the player feel uncomfortable.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in feature C1 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation after the first presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation. .

According to feature C2 of the present invention group, the second performance means causes the variable display means to complete the second performance after the first performance means causes the variable display means to execute the first performance. The second performance can be finished and the first performance can be executed without making the person feel uncomfortable.

Feature C3.
A firing means (a firing handle 16) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area that enters the ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. A starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and a lower operating port 26) to execute, and a variable display means (symbol display device 36) to perform a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means. , a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising performance execution means (sound emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to perform a performance,
The performance execution means is
a first performance means (notice pending performance determination process) that causes the variable display means to execute a first performance (pre-reading performance) for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a first opportunity;
Based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity, a second effect (special effect) that overlaps with the first effect and is different from the first effect is displayed on the variable display means during the predetermined period. a second performance means (special suspension performance determination process) for executing a performance for extinguishing the suspension;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second effect causes the variable display means to immediately end the second effect all at once.

According to feature C3 of the present invention group, the second presentation means displays a display overlapping with the first presentation on the variable display means during a predetermined period based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity. A second performance different from the first performance is executed. Then, the second performance means causes the variable display means to immediately end the second performance all at once, so it is possible to quickly end the second performance.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C3 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first performance means continues to execute the first performance after the second performance ends.

According to feature C4 of the present invention group, the first performance means continues to execute the first performance after the second performance ends. According to this, the gaming machine cannot cause the variable display means to execute the second effect based on the establishment of the first opportunity even if the variable display means is in a state of executing the first effect for a predetermined period. Therefore, after the second performance is finished, the first performance can be continued. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play games comfortably.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in feature C4 of the present invention group,
The first effect means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect when the second effect causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, and the second effect causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect; A gaming machine characterized in that when the variable display means ends the second effect, the variable display means is caused to restart the first effect.

According to feature C5 of the present invention group, when the second presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the second presentation, the first presentation means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first presentation, and the second presentation means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first presentation. When the means causes the variable display means to end the second effect, the variable display means restarts the first effect, so even if the first effect is being executed, the first effect is interrupted. Then, the second performance can be executed, and after the second performance is finished, the first performance can be restarted. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably allow the player to enjoy the first performance.

Feature C6.
In the gaming machine described in feature C4 of the present invention group,
A game characterized in that the first effect causes the second effect to continuously execute the first effect during an overlapping period in which the variable display means executes the second effect. Machine.

According to feature C6 of the present invention group, the first effect causes the second effect to continuously execute the first effect during the overlapping period in which the variable display means executes the second effect. , the first performance can be continuously executed regardless of the second performance. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to enjoy the flow of the first performance.

Feature C7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features C4 to C6 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry part,
The performance execution means is
By storing data related to the first performance in the first performance layer (third layer L3) using the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry part as the first opportunity, the fluctuation the first presentation means for causing the display means to execute the first presentation;
Using the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section as the second opportunity, data related to the second presentation is transferred to a second presentation layer (second presentation layer) having a higher priority than the first presentation layer. 2 layer L2) to cause the variable display means to execute the second effect;
an image compositing means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by overlapping a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in order of priority;
The second effect means stores data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature C7 of the present invention group, the image composition means displays the image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer in order of priority. , the second effect means creates a second effect on the first effect layer in which the first effect layer stores data related to the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry section. An image can be displayed on the variable display means by superimposing a second effect layer storing data related to a second effect based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry part. Then, the second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer, so that the first start Even if the first effect is being executed based on the game ball entering the ball entering section, the second effect based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entering section may be overwritten. After the second performance is completed, the first performance means continues the first performance by erasing the data related to the second performance stored in the second performance layer. can be executed.

Feature C8.
In the gaming machine described in feature C7 of the present invention group,
The performance execution means is
information storage means (sub-side holding information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of holding information (sub-side holding information) based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means;
Information storage means (holding determination processing) for storing holding information in the information storage means in the order of entry of game balls into the starting ball entering means,
The information storage means includes:
an execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information while variable display is being executed by the variable display means;
comprising a plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information in a pending state before the variable display is performed by the variable display means,
The information storage means includes:
a first holding storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing holding information in a first holding area (first sub-side holding area SRa) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entering part; ,
A second holding storage that stores holding information in a second holding area (second sub-side holding area SRb) different from the first holding area based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entering section. means (processing of step S2203);
A reservation shift means (reservation shift processing) for shifting reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reservation shift means preferentially shifts reservation information stored in the second reservation area toward the execution area.

According to feature C8 of the present invention group, the holding shift means preferentially shifts the holding information stored in the second holding area toward the execution area, so that the game ball is not transferred to the first starting ball entry part. Even if the first performance is executed based on the reservation information stored in the first reservation area based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section, , it is possible to execute a second effect based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area.

Feature C9.
In the gaming machine described in feature C8 of the present invention group,
The first effect is, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, the first effect is stored in the first hold area to be consumed before the hold information. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a look-ahead effect that notifies a player of the expectation level of the pending information by using a presentation based on the pending information.

According to feature C9 of the present invention group, since the first performance is a look-ahead performance, the reservation information stored in the first reservation area is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry section. In the state in which the first performance based on is being executed, the second performance based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section. If this happens, the continuity of the first performance will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine can cause the variable display means to execute the second effect even if the variable display means is in a state of executing the first effect for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity. Since the first performance can be continuously executed after the second performance is finished, the player can comfortably play the game without spoiling the continuity of the first performance.

Feature C10.
In the gaming machine described in feature C8 or feature C9 of the present invention group,
The performance execution means is
Information notification means (hold generation processing) for displaying a pending symbol associated with the pending information on the variable display means based on the pending information stored in the information storage means,
The information notification means causes the variable display means to display the pending symbol by storing data related to the pending symbol in a pending symbol layer (first layer L1) that has a higher priority than the second presentation layer. A gaming machine characterized by displaying information.

According to feature C10 of the present invention group, the information notification means displays the pending symbol on the variable display means by storing data related to the pending symbol in the pending symbol layer having a higher priority than the second effect layer. Therefore, when executing the first performance and the second performance, the pending symbols displayed on the variable display means can be surely displayed without overwriting the pending symbols displayed on the variable display means.

Feature C11.
In the gaming machine described in feature C8 or feature C9 of the present invention group,
The performance execution means is
Information notification means (hold generation processing) for displaying a pending symbol associated with the pending information on the variable display means based on the pending information stored in the information storage means,
The information notification means causes the variable display means to display the suspended symbol by storing data related to the suspended symbol in both the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer. Game machine.

According to feature C11 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the pending symbol by storing data related to the pending symbol in both the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer. When executing the first performance and the second performance, the pending symbols can be surely displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the pending symbols displayed on the variable display means. Further, the information notification means can reliably display the pending symbol on the variable display means without using a new layer.

According to the feature group C of the present invention, it is possible to allow the player to play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that are equipped with a variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols. This gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts displaying a changing pattern when a game ball enters an operating port (starting ball entry means). For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, it finally stops displaying a specific combination of symbols on the variable display means and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine executes a plurality of types of effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will be shifted to a specific control state after starting the variable display of symbols.

However, since the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner in order to simplify the control of the gaming machine, there is a problem in that it may not be possible for the player to play the game comfortably.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1.
A firing means (a firing handle 16) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area that enters the ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. A starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and a lower operating port 26) to execute, and a variable display means (symbol display device 36) to perform a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means. , a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising performance execution means (sound emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to perform a performance,
The performance execution means is
a first performance means (notice pending performance determination process) that causes the variable display means to execute a first performance (pre-reading performance) for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a first opportunity;
Based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity, a second effect (special effect) that overlaps with the first effect and different from the first effect is displayed on the variable display means during the predetermined period. a second performance means (special suspension performance determination process) for executing a performance for extinguishing the suspension;
A gaming machine characterized in that the second performance is more useful to a player than the first performance.

According to feature D1 of the present invention group, the second effect means displays a variable display means overlapping with the first effect during a predetermined period based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity. A second performance different from the first performance is executed. Since the second performance is more useful to the player than the first performance, the player pays attention to whether or not the second performance is executed during the predetermined period. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in feature D1 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first performance means continues to execute the first performance after the second performance ends.

According to feature D2 of the present invention group, the first performance means continues to execute the first performance after the second performance ends. According to this, the gaming machine cannot cause the variable display means to execute the second effect based on the establishment of the first opportunity even if the variable display means is in a state of executing the first effect for a predetermined period. Therefore, after the second performance is finished, the first performance can be continued. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play games comfortably.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in feature D2 of the present invention group,
The first effect means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect when the second effect causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, and the second effect causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect; A gaming machine characterized in that when the variable display means ends the second effect, the variable display means is caused to restart the first effect.

According to feature D3 of the present invention group, the first effect means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect when the second effect causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, and the first effect causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect; When the means causes the variable display means to end the second effect, the variable display means restarts the first effect, so even if the first effect is being executed, the first effect is interrupted. Then, the second performance can be executed, and after the second performance is finished, the first performance can be restarted. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably allow the player to enjoy the first performance.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in feature D2 of the present invention group,
A game characterized in that the first effect causes the second effect to continuously execute the first effect during an overlapping period in which the variable display means executes the second effect. Machine.

According to feature D4 of the present invention group, the first effect causes the second effect to continuously execute the first effect during the overlapping period in which the variable display means executes the second effect. , the first performance can be continuously executed regardless of the second performance. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to enjoy the flow of the first performance.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D2 to D4 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry part,
The performance execution means is
By storing data related to the first performance in the first performance layer (third layer L3) using the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry part as the first opportunity, the fluctuation the first presentation means for causing the display means to execute the first presentation;
Using the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section as the second opportunity, data related to the second presentation is transferred to a second presentation layer (second presentation layer) having a higher priority than the first presentation layer. 2 layer L2) to cause the variable display means to execute the second effect;
an image compositing means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by overlapping a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in order of priority;
The second effect means stores data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature D5 of the present invention group, the image composition means displays the image on the variable display means by overlapping a plurality of layers including the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer in order of priority. , the second effect means creates a second effect on the first effect layer in which the first effect layer stores data related to the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry section. An image can be displayed on the variable display means by superimposing a second effect layer storing data related to a second effect based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry part. Then, the second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer, so that the first start Even if the first effect is being executed based on the game ball entering the ball entering section, the second effect based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entering section may be overwritten. After the second performance is completed, the first performance means continues the first performance by erasing the data related to the second performance stored in the second performance layer. can be executed.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in feature D5 of the present invention group,
The performance execution means is
information storage means (sub-side holding information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of holding information (sub-side holding information) based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means;
Information storage means (holding determination processing) for storing holding information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entering means,
The information storage means includes:
an execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information while variable display is being executed by the variable display means;
comprising a plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information in a pending state before the variable display is performed by the variable display means,
The information storage means includes:
a first holding storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing holding information in a first holding area (first sub-side holding area SRa) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entering part; ,
A second holding storage that stores holding information in a second holding area (second sub-side holding area SRb) different from the first holding area based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entering section. means (processing of step S2203);
A reservation shift means (reservation shift processing) for shifting reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reservation shift means preferentially shifts reservation information stored in the second reservation area toward the execution area.

According to feature D6 of the present invention group, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that the game ball is not transferred to the first starting ball entry part. Even if the first performance is executed based on the reservation information stored in the first reservation area based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section, , it is possible to execute a second effect based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area.

Feature D7.
In the gaming machine described in feature D6 of the present invention group,
The first effect is, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, the first effect is stored in the first hold area to be consumed before the hold information. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a look-ahead effect that notifies a player of the expectation level of the pending information by using a presentation based on the pending information.

According to feature D7 of the present invention group, since the first performance is a look-ahead performance, the reservation information stored in the first reservation area is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry section. In the state in which the first performance based on is being executed, the second performance based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section. If this happens, the continuity of the first performance will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine can cause the variable display means to execute the second effect even if the variable display means is in a state of executing the first effect for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity. Since the first performance can be continuously executed after the second performance is finished, the player can comfortably play the game without spoiling the continuity of the first performance.

Feature D8.
In the gaming machine described in feature D6 or feature D7 of the present invention group,
The performance execution means is
Information notifying means (holding generation processing) for displaying a pending symbol associated with the holding information on the variable display means based on the holding information stored in the information storage means,
The information notification means causes the variable display means to display the pending symbol by storing data related to the pending symbol in a pending symbol layer (first layer L1) that has a higher priority than the second presentation layer. A game machine characterized by displaying information.

According to feature D8 of the present invention group, the information notification means displays the pending symbol on the variable display means by storing data related to the pending symbol in the pending symbol layer having a higher priority than the second effect layer. Therefore, when executing the first performance and the second performance, the pending symbols displayed on the variable display means can be surely displayed without overwriting the pending symbols displayed on the variable display means.

Feature D9.
In the gaming machine described in feature D6 or feature D7 of the present invention group,
The performance execution means is
Information notification means (hold generation processing) for displaying a pending symbol associated with the pending information on the variable display means based on the pending information stored in the information storage means,
The information notification means causes the variable display means to display the suspended symbol by storing data related to the suspended symbol in both the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer. Game machine.

According to feature D9 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the pending symbol by storing data related to the pending symbol in both the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer. When executing the first performance and the second performance, the pending symbols can be surely displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the pending symbols displayed on the variable display means. Further, the information notification means can reliably display the pending symbol on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature D10.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D2 to D9 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second effect causes the variable display means to end the second effect in a fade-out manner.

According to feature D10 of the present invention group, the second performance means ends the second performance by fading it out on the variable display means, so that the second performance can be ended without making the player feel uncomfortable. I can do it.

Feature D11.
In the gaming machine described in feature D10 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second presentation means causes the variable display means to end the second presentation after the first presentation means causes the variable display means to execute the first presentation. .

According to the feature D11 of the present invention group, the second performance means causes the variable display means to complete the second performance after the first performance means causes the variable display means to execute the first performance. The second performance can be finished and the first performance can be executed without making the person feel uncomfortable.

Feature D12.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features D2 to D9 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second effect causes the variable display means to immediately end the second effect all at once.

According to feature D12 of the present invention group, the second performance means immediately ends the second performance on the variable display means all at once, so that the second performance can be quickly ended.

According to the D group of features of the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game, so the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known that are equipped with variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols. This gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts displaying a changing pattern when a game ball enters an operating port (starting ball entry means). For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, it finally stops displaying a specific combination of symbols, etc. on the variable display means, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine executes a plurality of types of effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will shift to a specific control state after starting the variable display of symbols.

However, since the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner to simplify the control of the gaming machine, there is a problem in that the player's attention to the game is reduced.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1.
A firing means (a firing handle 16) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, and a game ball flowing down the game area that enters the ball, and an internal lottery when the game ball enters the game board. A starting ball entry means (upper operating port 25 and a lower operating port 26) to execute, and a variable display means (symbol display device 36) to perform a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means. , a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising performance execution means (sound emission control device 5 and display control device 6) for causing the variable display means to perform a performance,
The performance execution means is
A first performance means (advancement suspension performance determination process) that causes the variable display means to execute a first performance (pre-reading performance) having a plurality of expectations over a predetermined period based on the establishment of a first opportunity;
The gaming machine is
Based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity, a second effect (for extinguishing special reservation) that overlaps with the first effect and is different from the first effect during the predetermined period. a second performance means (special pending performance determination process) for executing the performance);
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first performance means changes the expectation level of the first performance during an overlapping period in which the second performance is executed by the second performance means.

According to feature E1 of the present invention group, the second effect means performs the first effect overlappingly with the first effect during the predetermined period based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity. A different second performance is executed, and the first performance means changes the expectation level of the first performance during an overlapping period in which the second performance is executed by the second performance means. According to this, the gaming machine cannot cause the variable display means to execute the second effect based on the establishment of the first opportunity even if the variable display means is in a state of executing the first effect for a predetermined period. The expectation level of the first performance can be changed during the overlapping period in which the second performance is executed by the second performance means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in feature E1 of the present invention group,
The performance execution means is
Based on the establishment of a second opportunity different from the first opportunity, a second effect (special effect) that overlaps with the first effect and is different from the first effect is displayed on the variable display means during the predetermined period. the second performance means (special suspension performance determination process) for executing a performance for extinguishing suspension;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the first performance means continues to execute the first performance after the second performance ends.

According to feature E2 of the present invention group, the first performance means continues to execute the first performance after the second performance ends. According to this, the gaming machine cannot cause the variable display means to execute the second effect based on the establishment of the first opportunity even when the variable display means is in a state of executing the first effect for a predetermined period. Therefore, after the second performance is finished, the first performance can be continued. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play games comfortably.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in feature E2 of the present invention group,
The first effect means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect when the second effect causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, and the second effect causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect; A gaming machine characterized in that when the variable display means ends the second effect, the variable display means is caused to restart the first effect.

According to feature E3 of the present invention group, the first effect means causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect when the second effect causes the variable display means to execute the second effect, and the first effect causes the variable display means to interrupt the first effect; When the means causes the variable display means to end the second effect, the variable display means restarts the first effect, so even if the first effect is being executed, the first effect is interrupted. Then, the second performance can be executed, and after the second performance is finished, the first performance can be restarted. Therefore, the gaming machine can reliably allow the player to enjoy the first performance.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in feature E2 of the present invention group,
A game characterized in that the first effect causes the second effect to continuously execute the first effect during an overlapping period in which the variable display means executes the second effect. Machine.

According to characteristic E4 of the present invention group, the first effect causes the second effect to continuously execute the first effect during the overlapping period in which the variable display means executes the second effect. , the first performance can be continuously executed regardless of the second performance. Therefore, the gaming machine allows the player to enjoy the flow of the first performance.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features E2 to E4 of the present invention group,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry part (upper operating port 25);
A second starting ball entry part (lower operating port 26) different from the first starting ball entry part,
The performance execution means is
By storing data related to the first performance in the first performance layer (third layer L3) using the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry part as the first opportunity, the fluctuation the first presentation means for causing the display means to execute the first presentation;
Using the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section as the second opportunity, data related to the second presentation is transferred to a second presentation layer (second presentation layer) having a higher priority than the first presentation layer. 2 layer L2) to cause the variable display means to execute the second effect;
an image compositing means (frame buffer 69) for displaying an image on the variable display means by overlapping a plurality of layers including the first effect layer and the second effect layer in order of priority;
The second effect means stores data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature E5 of the present invention group, the image composition means displays the image on the variable display means by superimposing a plurality of layers including the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer in order of priority. , the second effect means creates a second effect on the first effect layer in which the first effect layer stores data related to the first effect based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry section. An image can be displayed on the variable display means by superimposing a second effect layer storing data related to a second effect based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry part. Then, the second effect means stores the data related to the second effect in the second effect layer so as to overwrite the data related to the first effect stored in the first effect layer, so that the first start Even if the first effect is being executed based on the game ball entering the ball entering section, the second effect based on the game ball entering the second starting ball entering section may be overwritten. After the second performance is completed, the first performance means continues the first performance by erasing the data related to the second performance stored in the second performance layer. can be executed.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine described in feature E5 of the present invention group,
The performance execution means is
information storage means (sub-side holding information storage area 543) for storing a plurality of holding information (sub-side holding information) based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means;
Information storage means (holding determination processing) for storing holding information in the information storage means in the order in which game balls enter the starting ball entering means,
The information storage means includes:
an execution area (execution area SAE) for storing pending information while variable display is being executed by the variable display means;
comprising a plurality of holding areas (a first sub-side holding area SRa and a second sub-side holding area SRb) for storing holding information in a pending state before the variable display is performed by the variable display means,
The information storage means includes:
a first holding storage means (processing of step S2202) for storing holding information in a first holding area (first sub-side holding area SRa) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entering part; ,
A second holding storage that stores holding information in a second holding area (second sub-side holding area SRb) different from the first holding area based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entering section. means (processing of step S2203);
A reservation shift means (reservation shift processing) for shifting reservation information stored in the first reservation area and the second reservation area toward the execution area,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reservation shift means preferentially shifts reservation information stored in the second reservation area toward the execution area.

According to feature E6 of the present invention group, the hold shift means preferentially shifts the hold information stored in the second hold area toward the execution area, so that the game ball is not transferred to the first starting ball entry part. Even if the first performance is executed based on the reservation information stored in the first reservation area based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section, , it is possible to execute a second effect based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine described in feature E6 of the present invention group,
The first effect is, when the first hold storage means stores hold information in the first hold area, the first effect is stored in the first hold area to be consumed before the hold information. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a look-ahead effect that notifies a player of the expectation level of the pending information by using a presentation based on the pending information.

According to feature E7 of the present invention group, since the first performance is a look-ahead performance, the reservation information stored in the first reservation area is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry section. In the state in which the first performance based on is being executed, the second performance based on the reservation information stored in the second reservation area is executed based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry section. If this happens, the continuity of the first performance will be lost. According to the present invention, the gaming machine can cause the variable display means to execute the second effect even if the variable display means is in a state of executing the first effect for a predetermined period based on the establishment of the first opportunity. Since the first performance can be continuously executed after the second performance is finished, the player can comfortably play the game without spoiling the continuity of the first performance.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine described in feature E6 or feature E7 of the present invention group,
The performance execution means is
Information notification means (hold generation processing) for displaying a pending symbol associated with the pending information on the variable display means based on the pending information stored in the information storage means,
The information notification means causes the variable display means to display the pending symbol by storing data related to the pending symbol in a pending symbol layer (first layer L1) that has a higher priority than the second presentation layer. A gaming machine characterized by displaying information.

According to feature E8 of the present invention group, the information notification means displays the pending symbol on the variable display means by storing data related to the pending symbol in the pending symbol layer having a higher priority than the second effect layer. Therefore, when executing the first performance and the second performance, the pending symbols displayed on the variable display means can be surely displayed without overwriting the pending symbols displayed on the variable display means.

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine described in feature E6 or feature E7 of the present invention group,
The performance execution means is
Information notification means (hold generation processing) for displaying a pending symbol associated with the pending information on the variable display means based on the pending information stored in the information storage means,
The information notification means causes the variable display means to display the suspended symbol by storing data related to the suspended symbol in both the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer. Game machine.

According to characteristic E9 of the present invention group, the information notification means causes the variable display means to display the pending symbol by storing data related to the pending symbol in both the first presentation layer and the second presentation layer. When executing the first performance and the second performance, the pending symbols can be surely displayed on the variable display means without overwriting the pending symbols displayed on the variable display means. Further, the information notification means can reliably display the pending symbol on the variable display means without using a new layer.

Feature E10.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features E2 to E9 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second effect causes the variable display means to end the second effect in a fade-out manner.

According to feature E10 of the present invention group, the second performance means ends the second performance by fading it out on the variable display means, so that the second performance can be ended without making the player feel uncomfortable. I can do it.

Feature E11.
In the gaming machine described in feature E10 of the present invention group,
The second performance means causes the variable display means to execute the first performance by the first performance means, and then causes the variable display means to end the second performance. .

According to feature E11 of the present invention group, the second performance means causes the variable display means to execute the first performance after the first performance means causes the variable display means to finish the second performance, so that the game The second performance can be finished and the first performance can be executed without making the person feel uncomfortable.

Feature E12.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features E2 to E9 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second effect causes the variable display means to immediately end the second effect all at once.

According to feature E12 of the present invention group, the second performance means immediately ends the second performance all at once on the variable display means, so it is possible to quickly end the second performance.

According to feature group E of the present invention, the gaming machine can improve the player's attention to the game, so the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known that are equipped with variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols. This gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts displaying a changing pattern when a game ball enters an operating port (starting ball entry means). For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, it finally stops displaying a specific combination of symbols, etc. on the variable display means, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.
By the way, such a gaming machine executes a plurality of types of effects that make the player expect that the gaming state will shift to a specific control state after starting the variable display of symbols.

However, since the multiple types of effects are executed in a chaotic manner in order to simplify the control of the gaming machine, there is a problem in that it may not be possible for the player to play the game comfortably.

<Characteristics Group F>
Feature F1.
It has a firing means (launching handle 16) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, and a rolling surface that rolls the game ball flowing down the game area, and the rolling surface A stage (two-stage stage 7, 7E, 7F, 7G) that temporarily rolls and drops the game ball at the stage, and a ball entry means (upper operating port 25) that allows the ball to enter the game ball that has fallen from the stage. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising:
The stage is
Guiding means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) for guiding the game ball to the rolling surface (rolling surface 74) of the stage (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F);
Preventing means ( A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a second plate 783).

According to feature F1 of the present invention group, when the guiding means guides at least one game ball to the rolling surface of the stage, the blocking means causes the guiding means to guide the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface of the stage. Therefore, the game balls guided to the stage by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface of the stage without being hindered by the following game balls. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play games comfortably.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in feature F1 of the present invention group,
The stage is
A first stage (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F),
A second stage (lower stage 72) different from the first stage,
The guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface (rolling surface 74) of the first stage,
The blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface (rolling surface 76) of the second stage so that the guiding means guides subsequent game balls to the rolling surface of the first stage. A gaming machine characterized by preventing players from playing.

According to feature F2 of the present invention group, the guiding means guides the game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage, and the blocking means guides the game ball to the rolling surface of the second stage. Since the guiding means prevents the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface of the first stage, the player uses the blocking means to guide the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage. Even if this is prevented, the user can enjoy the subsequent movement of the game ball guided to the rolling surface of the second stage.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in feature F2 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first stage is a stage more advantageous for the player than the second stage.

According to feature F3 of the present invention group, the game ball guided to the first stage by the guiding means can roll on the rolling surface of the first stage without being hindered by the following game balls. Since the first stage is an advantageous stage for the player compared to the second stage, the player can feel at ease about the movement of the game ball guided by the rolling surface of the first stage. You can enjoy it.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features F1 to F3 of the present invention group,
The blocking means includes:
a blocking state that prevents the guiding means from guiding subsequent game balls to the rolling surface of the stage;
a non-blocking state in which the guiding means does not prevent the subsequent game ball from being guided to the rolling surface of the stage;
The stage is
comprising switching means (stage distribution mechanisms 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) for switching the blocking means to either a blocking state or a non-blocking state;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the switching means switches the blocking means to a blocking state when the guiding device guides at least one game ball to the rolling surface of the stage.

According to feature F4 of the present invention group, the stage includes a switching means for switching the blocking means to either the blocking state or the non-blocking state, and the switching means causes the guiding means to move at least one game ball on the stage. Since the blocking means is switched to the blocking state when the player is guided to the moving surface, the player pays attention to the state of the blocking means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in feature F4 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the switching means switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by cooperating with a game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means.

According to feature F5 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means. You can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the stage.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in feature F4 of the present invention group,
A game machine characterized in that the switching means switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means.

According to feature F6 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the blocking means to the non-blocking state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball that is different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means, so that the player The user can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball that is different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine described in feature F6 of the present invention group,
The switching means is
A contact means (second plate-shaped part 786) that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the contacting means is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with some of the game balls that follow the game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the stage by the guiding means.

According to feature F7 of the present invention group, the switching means includes a contact means that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means, The contact means is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with some of the following game balls that are different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means, so the player can move the stage by using the guiding means. Attention is paid to whether or not a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided by the contact means contacts the contact means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine described in feature F6 of the present invention group,
The switching means is
comprising a contact means (fourth plate 789G) that switches the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the contacting means is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with all game balls among subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the stage by the guiding means.

According to feature F8 of the present invention group, the switching means includes a contact means for switching the blocking means to a non-blocking state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the stage by the guiding means, The contact means is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with all of the following game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the stage by the guiding means, so that the player can contact the rolling surface of the stage. You can enjoy the guided movement of the game ball with peace of mind.

According to the feature group F of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that are equipped with variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols. This gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts displaying a changing pattern when a game ball enters an operating port (starting ball entry means). For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, it finally stops displaying a specific combination of symbols on the variable display means and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.
Further, the game machine includes a stage that temporarily rolls and drops game balls flowing down the game area, and the starting ball entry means allows the game balls that have fallen from this stage to enter the stage.

However, if a subsequent game ball comes into contact with a game ball rolling on the stage, the game ball rolling on the stage may move unfavorably to the player, so the game machine There is a problem in that players cannot play games comfortably.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1.
It has a firing means (launching handle 16) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, and a rolling surface that rolls the game ball flowing down the game area, and the rolling surface A stage (two-stage stage 7, 7E, 7F, 7G) that temporarily rolls and drops the game ball at the stage, and a ball entry means (upper operating port 25) that allows the ball to enter the game ball that has fallen from the stage. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising:
The stage is
A first stage (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F),
a second stage (lower stage 72) different from the first stage;
The game ball has a first guidance state in which the game ball is guided only to the first stage, and a second guidance state in which the game ball is guided only to the second stage, and the game ball is guided to the first stage and the second stage. Stage guiding means (first plate 782 and second plate 783) for guiding the game ball to any of the stages,
The stage guiding means is
A gaming machine comprising switching means (stage distribution mechanisms 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) for switching the stage guiding means to either a first guiding state or a second guiding state.

According to feature G1 of the present invention group, the stage guiding means includes a switching means for switching the stage guiding means to either the first guiding state or the second guiding state, and the switching means is configured to switch the stage guiding means only to the first guiding state. The player is forced to pay attention to the state of the stage guiding means because the player is switched to either the first guiding state in which the game ball is guided and the second guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the second stage. . Moreover, the switching means guides the subsequent game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage (second stage) by the stage guiding means by switching to the second guiding state (first guiding state). Therefore, the game ball guided to the first stage (second stage) by the stage guiding means can reach the first stage (second stage) without being hindered by the following game ball. can roll on the rolling surface. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature G2.
In the gaming machine described in feature G1 of the present invention group,
The switching means is characterized in that when the stage guiding means guides at least one game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage, the switching means switches the stage guiding means to a second guiding state. Game machine.

According to feature G2 of the present invention group, the switching means changes the stage guiding means to the second guiding state when the stage guiding means guides at least one game ball to the rolling surface of the first stage. Since the switching is performed, the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means can roll on the rolling surface of the first stage without being hindered by subsequent game balls. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play games comfortably.

Feature G3.
In the gaming machine described in feature G2 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first stage is a stage more advantageous for the player than the second stage.

According to feature G3 of the present invention group, the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means rolls on the rolling surface of the first stage without being hindered by subsequent game balls. Since the first stage is an advantageous stage for the player compared to the second stage, the player can safely control the movement of the game ball guided by the rolling surface of the first stage. You can enjoy it to your heart's content.

Feature G4.
In the gaming machine described in feature G2 or feature G3 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the switching means switches the stage guiding means to a first guiding state by cooperating with a game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means.

According to feature G4 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the stage guiding means to the first guiding state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. The player can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means.

Feature G5.
In the gaming machine described in feature G2 or feature G3 of the present invention group,
The switching means switches the stage guiding means to the first guiding state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature G5 of the present invention group, the switching means moves the stage guiding means to the first stage by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. Since the state is switched to the first stage, the player can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball that is different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means.

Feature G6.
In the gaming machine described in feature G5 of the present invention group,
The switching means is
Contact means (second plate-shaped portion 786 ),
The contact means is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with some of the game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. A gaming machine.

According to feature G6 of the present invention group, the switching means brings the stage guiding means into the first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. The contact means is provided at a position where it contacts some of the subsequent game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the first stage by the stage guide means. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guide means comes into contact with the contact means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature G7.
In the gaming machine described in feature G5 of the present invention group,
The switching means is
contact means (fourth plate 789G) for switching the stage guiding means to a first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means; Prepare,
A gaming machine characterized in that the contact means is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with all game balls among subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the first stage by the guiding means. .

According to feature G7 of the present invention group, the switching means brings the stage guiding means into the first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first stage by the stage guiding means. The contact means is provided at a position where it contacts all the game balls among the subsequent game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the first stage by the stage guide means. , the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided by the rolling surface of the first stage with peace of mind.

According to the characteristic group G of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play the game comfortably, and therefore the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known that are equipped with variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols. This gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts displaying a changing pattern when a game ball enters an operating port (starting ball entry means). For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, it finally stops displaying a specific combination of symbols, etc. on the variable display means, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.
Further, the game machine includes a stage that temporarily rolls and drops game balls flowing down the game area, and the starting ball entry means allows the game balls that have fallen from this stage to enter the stage.

However, if a subsequent game ball comes into contact with a game ball rolling on the stage, the game ball rolling on the stage may move unfavorably to the player, so the game machine There is a problem in that players cannot play games comfortably.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1.
A firing means (launch handle 16) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, and a channel (two stages 7, 7E) that allows the game ball to flow down the game area. A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising:
The flow path is
A first flow path (upper stage 71, 71E),
a second flow path (lower stage 72) different from the first flow path;
It has a first guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the first channel, and a second guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the second channel, and the first guiding state A flow path guiding means (a first plate 782 and a second plate 783) for guiding a game ball to either of the second flow paths,
The flow path guiding means is
comprising switching means (stage distribution mechanisms 73, 73E, 73H) for switching the flow path guiding means to either a first guiding state or a second guiding state;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the switching means switches to the first guiding state by cooperating with game balls guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means.

According to feature H1 of the present invention group, the switching means is configured to have a first guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the first channel, and a second guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the second channel. Since the channel guiding means is switched to one of the following, the player pays attention to the state of the channel guiding means. In addition, the switching means prevents the flow path guiding means from guiding subsequent game balls to the first flow path by switching to the second guiding state. The game ball guided into the channel can flow down the first channel without being obstructed by subsequent game balls. Further, since the switching means switches to the first guiding state by cooperating with the game ball guided to the first channel by the channel guiding means, the player can The player can further enjoy the movement of the game ball guided by the flow path 1. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature H2.
In the gaming machine described in feature H1 of the present invention group,
The switching device is characterized in that when the channel guiding device guides at least one game ball to the first channel, the switching device switches the channel guiding device to the second guiding state. Game machine.

According to feature H2 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the channel guiding means to the second guiding state when the channel guiding means guides at least one game ball to the first channel. Therefore, the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means can roll in the first flow path without being hindered by the following game balls. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play games comfortably.

Feature H3.
In the gaming machine described in feature H2 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first flow path is a flow path that is more advantageous for a player than the second flow path.

According to feature H3 of the present invention group, the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means can flow down the first flow path without being obstructed by subsequent game balls. Since the first flow path is more advantageous for the player than the second flow path, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided by the first flow path with peace of mind. be able to.

According to the feature H group of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that are equipped with variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols. This gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts displaying a changing pattern when a game ball enters an operating port (starting ball entry means). For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, it finally stops displaying a specific combination of symbols, etc. on the variable display means, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.
In addition, the game machine is equipped with a flow path such as a stage that temporarily rolls and drops the game balls flowing down the game area, and the starting ball entry means allows the game balls that have fallen from this stage to enter the ball. .

However, if a subsequent game ball comes into contact with a game ball rolling in a channel such as a stage, the game ball rolling on the stage may move disadvantageously for the player. Gaming machines have a problem in that they do not allow players to play games comfortably.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1.
A firing means (launching handle 16) that fires a game ball toward a game area formed on the front of the game board, and a channel (two-stage stage 7, 7E, 7F, 7G),
The flow path is
A first flow path (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F),
a second flow path (lower stage 72) different from the first flow path;
It has a first guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the first channel, and a second guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the second channel, and the first guiding state A flow path guiding means (a first plate 782 and a second plate 783) that guides a game ball to either of the second flow paths,
The flow path guiding means includes:
comprising switching means (stage distribution mechanisms 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) for switching the flow path guiding means to either a first guiding state or a second guiding state;
A game characterized in that the switching means switches to the first guiding state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. Machine.

According to feature I1 of the present invention group, the switching means has a first guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the first flow path, and a second guiding state in which the game ball is guided only to the second flow path. Since the channel guiding means is switched to one of the following, the player pays attention to the state of the channel guiding means. In addition, the switching means prevents the flow path guiding means from guiding subsequent game balls to the first flow path by switching to the second guiding state. The game ball guided into the channel can flow down the first channel without being obstructed by subsequent game balls. Furthermore, since the switching means switches to the first guiding state by cooperating with a subsequent game ball that is different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means, the player can You can further enjoy the movement of the subsequent game ball that is different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the path guiding means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature I2.
In the gaming machine described in feature I1 of the present invention group,
The switching means is characterized in that when the flow path guiding means guides at least one game ball to the first flow path, the switching means switches the flow path guiding means to the second guiding state. Game machine.

According to feature I2 of the present invention group, the switching means switches the channel guiding means to the second guiding state when the channel guiding means guides at least one game ball to the first channel. Therefore, the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means can roll in the first flow path without being hindered by the following game balls. Therefore, the gaming machine allows players to play games comfortably.

Feature I3.
In the gaming machine described in feature I2 of the present invention group,
The switching means is
Contact means (a second plate) for switching the flow path guiding means to the first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means shaped portion 786);
The contact means is disposed at a position where it comes into contact with some of the game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature I3 of the present invention group, the switching means moves the flow path guiding means to the first flow path by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. The contact means is provided with a contact means that switches to a guided state, and the contact means is placed in a position where it contacts some of the game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means. Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means comes into contact with the contact means. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature I4.
In the gaming machine described in feature I2 of the present invention group,
The switching means is
Contact means (a fourth plate) for switching the flow path guiding means to the first guiding state by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means 789G),
The contact means is characterized in that it is arranged at a position where it comes into contact with all game balls among subsequent game balls different from the game balls guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means. A gaming machine.

According to feature I4 of the present invention group, the switching means moves the flow path guiding means to the first flow path by contacting a subsequent game ball different from the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means. The contact means is provided at a position where it contacts all of the game balls that are different from the game balls guided to the first flow path by the flow path guide means. Therefore, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided to the first channel with peace of mind.

Feature I5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Features I2 to I4 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first flow path is a flow path that is more advantageous for a player than the second flow path.

According to feature I5 of the present invention group, the game ball guided to the first flow path by the flow path guiding means can flow down the first flow path without being obstructed by subsequent game balls. Since the first flow path is more advantageous for the player than the second flow path, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball guided by the first flow path with peace of mind. be able to.

According to feature group I of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known that are equipped with variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols. This gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts displaying a changing pattern when a game ball enters an operating port (starting ball entry means). For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, it finally stops displaying a specific combination of symbols on the variable display means and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.
In addition, the gaming machine includes a flow path such as a stage that temporarily rolls and drops game balls flowing down the gaming area, and the starting ball entry means allows the game balls that have fallen from this stage to enter the ball. .

However, if a subsequent game ball comes into contact with a game ball rolling in a channel such as a stage, the game ball rolling on the stage may move disadvantageously for the player. Gaming machines have a problem in that they do not allow players to play games comfortably.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising a firing means (launching handle 16) that fires a game ball toward a gaming area formed on the front of a gaming board,
a first gaming state;
Only game balls existing in a specific area (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F) in the game area can enter the first ball entry area (upper stage introduction section 751), and a second game state different from the first game state is allowed. The gaming state of
guiding means (guiding paths 75, 75E, 75F) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to a second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that provides a profit to the player;
A second game in which the second game state is generated based on a first game ball fired by the firing means passing through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the first game state. Condition generating means (first plates 782, 782G and second plate 783);
When the second game ball fired by the firing means after the first game ball satisfies a specific condition during the occurrence of the second game state, the first game state is changed. A first game state generating means (second plate portion 786 or fourth plate 789G),
Generating the second gaming state by the second gaming state generating means based on the second gaming ball passing through a predetermined area in the gaming area while the second gaming state is occurring. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a limiting means (second plate 783) for limiting.

According to feature J1 of the present invention group, while the second gaming state is occurring, only game balls existing in a specific area in the gaming area can enter the first ball entry area, and the guiding means Since the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area is guided to the second ball entry area that provides a profit, the player can enjoy a profit when the second game state occurs. Further, the limiting means causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on the second gaming ball passing through a predetermined area in the gaming area while the second gaming state is occurring. Therefore, the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Feature J2.
In the gaming machine described in feature J1 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the limiting means causes the second game ball to pass through another area different from a predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the second gaming state.

According to feature J2 of the present invention group, since the limiting means causes the second game ball to pass through another area different from the predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the second gaming state, the second gaming state generating means It is possible to reliably restrict the occurrence of the second gaming state.

Feature J3.
In the gaming machine described in feature J1 or feature J2 of the present invention group,
The second game state generating means generates a state executed based on the first game ball fired by the firing means passing through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the first game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the second game state is generated when a lottery is won, and the second game state is not generated when the state generation lottery is not won.

According to feature J3 of the present invention group, the second game state generation means generates the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and generates the second game state when the state generation lottery is not won. Since no gaming state is generated, the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature J4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Feature J1 to Feature J3 of the present invention group,
The limiting means is
a restriction state that restricts the second gaming state generating means from generating the second gaming state;
a non-limiting state that does not restrict generation of the second gaming state by the second gaming state generating means,
When the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state, switching to the limited state, and when the first gaming state generating means generates the first gaming state, switching to the non-limiting state. A gaming machine characterized by switching to a restricted state.

According to feature J4 of the present invention group, the restriction means switches to the restriction state when the second game state generation means generates the second game state, and the first game state generation means switches the first game state to the restriction state. Since the state is switched to the non-restricted state when the state is generated, the second game state can be played without being restricted from generating the second game state by the second game state generating means during the occurrence of the first game state. It is possible to reliably restrict generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means during the occurrence of the state.

Feature J5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Feature J1 to Feature J4 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming state generating means establishes the specific condition based only on some of the second gaming balls that satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to feature J5 of the present invention group, the first gaming state generating means establishes a specific condition based only on some of the second gaming balls that satisfy a predetermined condition. The player will pay attention to whether or not the second game ball satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature J6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Feature J1 to Feature J5 of the present invention group,
The first gaming state is
a first probability state (high-frequency nuisance mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a first probability;
and a second probability state (low-frequency nuisance mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a second probability higher than the first probability. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature J6 of the present invention group, the first gaming state includes a first probability state that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on the first probability; The second probability state causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on the second probability that is higher than the probability state of the second gaming state generating means. The player pays attention to this and plays the game in the hope that the second probability state will occur. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature J7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Feature J1 to Feature J6 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state by displacing the second gaming state generating means with the first game ball.

According to feature J7 of the present invention group, the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state by displacing the second gaming state generating means with the first gaming ball, so that the second gaming state is generated. The structure of the means can be simplified.

Feature J8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of Feature J1 to Feature J7 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming state generating means causes the second gaming ball to displace the second gaming state generating means to generate the first gaming state.

According to feature J8 of the present invention group, the first gaming state generating means generates the first gaming state by displacing the second gaming state generating means with the second gaming ball, so that the first gaming state is generated. The structure of the means can be simplified.

According to the feature group J of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that are equipped with variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols. This gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts displaying a changing pattern when a game ball enters an operating port (starting ball entry means). For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, it finally stops displaying a specific combination of symbols on the variable display means and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine improves the player's game by switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state that provides a profit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. is increasing the attention to it.

However, if the gaming machine switches to the first gaming state without being awarded a profit during the second gaming state, there is a problem in that the gaming machine cannot allow the player to play the game comfortably. .

<Feature K group>
Feature K1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising a firing means (launching handle 16) that fires a game ball toward a gaming area formed on the front of a gaming board,
a first gaming state;
Only game balls existing in a specific area (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F) in the game area can enter the first ball entry area (upper stage introduction section 751), and a second game state different from the first game state The gaming state of
Guide means (guide paths 75, 75E, 75F) for guiding the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to a second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that provides a profit to the player;
A second game in which the second game state is generated based on a first game ball fired by the firing means passing through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the first game state. Condition generating means (first plates 782, 782G and second plate 783);
When the second game ball fired by the firing means after the first game ball satisfies a specific condition during the occurrence of the second game state, the first game state is changed. A first game state generating means (second plate portion 786 or fourth plate 789G),
A game characterized by comprising a game ball guiding means (second plate 783) that guides the second game ball to another area different from a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the second game state. Machine.

According to feature K1 of the present invention group, while the second gaming state is occurring, only game balls existing in a specific area in the gaming area can enter the first ball entry area, and the guiding means Since the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area is guided to the second ball entry area that provides a profit, the player can enjoy a profit when the second game state occurs. Furthermore, since the game ball guiding means guides the game ball fired by the firing means during the occurrence of the second game state to another area different from the predetermined area in the game area, the player can You can enjoy the situation with peace of mind.

Feature K2.
In the gaming machine described in feature K1 of the present invention group,
The first game state generating means generates the first game state based on the fact that the second game ball passes through another area different from a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the second game state. A gaming machine characterized by generating a state.

According to feature K2 of the present invention group, the first gaming state generating means, based on passing through another region different from the predetermined region in the second game ball gaming region during the generation of the second gaming state, Since the first game state is generated, the first game state can be generated using the second game ball.

Feature K3.
In the gaming machine described in feature K1 or feature K2 of the present invention group,
The second game state generating means generates a state executed based on the first game ball fired by the firing means passing through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the first game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the second game state is generated when a lottery is won, and the second game state is not generated when the state generation lottery is not won.

According to feature K3 of the present invention group, the second game state generation means generates the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and generates the second game state when the state generation lottery is not won. Since no gaming state is generated, the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature K4.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K3 of the present invention group,
The game ball guiding means is
a gaming ball guiding state in which the second gaming ball is guided to another area different from a predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the second gaming state;
a game ball non-guidance state in which the first game ball is guided to a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the first game state;
When the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state, switching to the game ball guiding state, and when the first gaming state generating means generates the first gaming state. A game machine characterized in that the game ball is switched to the non-guidance state.

According to feature K4 of the present invention group, the game ball guiding means switches to the game ball guiding state when the second game state generating means generates the second game state, and the game ball guiding means switches to the game ball guiding state when the second game state generating means generates the second game state. Since the game ball non-guidance state is switched when the first game state is generated, the generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means is restricted while the first game state is occurring. Therefore, it is possible to reliably restrict the second gaming state generating means from generating the second gaming state while the second gaming state is occurring.

Feature K5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K4 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming state generating means establishes the specific condition based only on some of the second gaming balls that satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to feature K5 of the present invention group, the first gaming state generating means establishes a specific condition based only on some of the second gaming balls that satisfy a predetermined condition. The player will pay attention to whether or not the second game ball satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature K6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K5 of the present invention group,
The first gaming state is
a first probability state (high-frequency nuisance mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a first probability;
and a second probability state (low-frequency nuisance mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature K6 of the present invention group, the first gaming state includes a first probability state that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on the first probability; The second probability state causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on the second probability that is higher than the probability state of the second gaming state generating means. The player pays attention to this and plays the game in the hope that the second probability state will occur. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature K7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K6 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state by displacing the second gaming state generating means with the first game ball.

According to feature K7 of the present invention group, the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state by displacing the second gaming state generating means with the first gaming ball, so that the second gaming state is generated. The structure of the means can be simplified.

Feature K8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features K1 to K7 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming state generating means causes the second gaming ball to displace the second gaming state generating means to generate the first gaming state.

According to feature K8 of the present invention group, the first gaming state generating means generates the first gaming state by displacing the second gaming state generating means with the second gaming ball, so that the first gaming state is generated. The structure of the means can be simplified.

According to the K group of features of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known that are equipped with variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols. This gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts displaying a changing pattern when a game ball enters an operating port (starting ball entry means). For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, it finally stops displaying a specific combination of symbols, etc. on the variable display means, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine improves the player's game by switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state that provides a profit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. is increasing the attention to it.

However, if the gaming machine switches to the first gaming state without being awarded a profit during the second gaming state, there is a problem in that the gaming machine cannot allow the player to play the game comfortably. .

<Feature L group>
Feature L1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising a firing means (launching handle 16) that fires a game ball toward a gaming area formed on the front of a gaming board,
a first gaming state;
Only game balls existing in a specific area (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F) in the game area can enter the first ball entry area (upper stage introduction section 751), and a second game state different from the first game state The gaming state of
a guide means (guide path 75) that guides the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area to a second ball entry area (upper operating port 25) that provides a profit to the player;
A second game in which the second game state is generated based on a first game ball fired by the firing means passing through a predetermined area in the game area during the generation of the first game state. state generating means (first plate 782 and second plate 783);
When the second game ball fired by the firing means after the first game ball satisfies a specific condition during the occurrence of the second game state, the first game state is changed. a first game state generating means (second plate-shaped portion 786) for generating the first gaming state;
The first gaming state is
a first probability state (high-frequency nuisance mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a first probability;
and a second probability state (low-frequency nuisance mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a second probability that is higher than the first probability. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature L1 of the present invention group, while the second gaming state is occurring, only game balls existing in a specific area in the gaming area can enter the first ball entry area, and the guiding means Since the game ball that has entered the first ball entry area is guided to the second ball entry area that provides a profit, the player can enjoy a profit when the second game state occurs. Further, the first gaming state includes a first probability state in which the second gaming state generating means generates a second gaming state based on a first probability, and a second probability state having a higher probability than the first probability. Since the second probability state causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on the probability, the player pays attention to the probability state of the second gaming state generating means and generates the second probability state. You will play the game in the hope that this will happen. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature L2.
In the gaming machine described in feature L1 of the present invention group,
Generating the second gaming state by the second gaming state generating means based on the second gaming ball passing through a predetermined area in the gaming area while the second gaming state is occurring. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a limiting means for limiting.

According to feature L2 of the present invention group, the limiting means is configured to control the second gaming state generating means based on the fact that the second gaming ball passes through a predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the second gaming state. Since generation of the second gaming state is restricted, the player can enjoy the second gaming state with peace of mind.

Feature L3.
In the gaming machine described in feature L2 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the limiting means causes the second game ball to pass through another area different from a predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the second gaming state.

According to feature L3 of the present invention group, the limiting means causes the second game ball to pass through another area different from the predetermined area in the gaming area during the occurrence of the second gaming state, so the second gaming state generating means It is possible to reliably restrict the occurrence of the second gaming state.

Feature L4.
In the gaming machine described in feature L2 or feature L3 of the present invention group,
The limiting means is
a restriction state that restricts the second gaming state generating means from generating the second gaming state;
a non-limiting state that does not restrict generation of the second gaming state by the second gaming state generating means,
When the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state, switching to the limited state, and when the first gaming state generating means generates the first gaming state, switching to the non-limiting state. A gaming machine characterized by switching to a restricted state.

According to feature L4 of the present invention group, the restriction means switches to the restriction state when the second game state generation means generates the second game state, and the first game state generation means switches the first game state to the restriction state. Since the state is switched to the non-restricted state when the state is generated, the second game state can be played without being restricted from generating the second game state by the second game state generating means during the occurrence of the first game state. It is possible to reliably restrict generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means during the occurrence of the state.

Feature L5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L4 of the present invention group,
The second game state generating means generates a state executed based on the first game ball fired by the firing means passing through a predetermined area in the game area during the occurrence of the first game state. A gaming machine characterized in that the second game state is generated when a lottery is won, and the second game state is not generated when the state generation lottery is not won.

According to characteristic L5 of the present invention group, the second game state generation means generates the second game state when the state generation lottery is won, and generates the second game state when the state generation lottery is not won. Since no gaming state is generated, the player pays attention to the result of the state generation lottery. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature L6.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L5 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming state generating means establishes the specific condition based only on some of the second gaming balls that satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to feature L6 of the present invention group, the first gaming state generating means establishes a specific condition based only on some of the second gaming balls that satisfy a predetermined condition. The player will pay attention to whether or not the second game ball satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

Feature L7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L6 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state by displacing the second gaming state generating means with the first game ball.

According to feature L7 of the present invention group, the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state by displacing the second gaming state generating means with the first gaming ball, so that the second gaming state is generated. The structure of the means can be simplified.

Feature L8.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features L1 to L7 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first gaming state generating means causes the second gaming ball to displace the second gaming state generating means to generate the first gaming state.

According to feature L8 of the present invention group, the first gaming state generating means generates the first gaming state by displacing the second gaming state generating means with the second gaming ball, so that the first gaming state is generated. The structure of the means can be simplified.

According to the feature L group of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known that are equipped with variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols. This gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts displaying a changing pattern when a game ball enters an operating port (starting ball entry means). For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, it finally stops displaying a specific combination of symbols, etc. on the variable display means, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine improves the player's game by switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state that provides a profit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. is increasing the attention to it.

However, if the gaming machine switches to the first gaming state without being awarded a profit during the second gaming state, there is a problem in that the gaming machine cannot allow the player to play the game comfortably. .

<Feature M group>
Feature M1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) comprising a firing means (launching handle 16) that fires a game ball toward a gaming area formed on the front of a gaming board,
a first gaming state;
a second gaming state different from the first gaming state;
Based on the fact that during the occurrence of the first gaming state, the first game ball fired by the firing means passes through a predetermined area in the game area, comes into contact with the first game ball, and is displaced. , second gaming state generating means (first plates 782, 782G and second plate 783) that generates the second gaming state;
During the occurrence of the second game state, a second game ball that is fired by the firing means after the first game ball passes through a predetermined area in the game area and hits the second game ball. a first game state generating means (stage distribution mechanism 73, 73E, 73F, 73G, 73H) that generates the first game state based on contact and displacement;
Generating the second gaming state by the second gaming state generating means based on the second gaming ball passing through a predetermined area in the gaming area while the second gaming state is occurring. and a limiting means (second plate 783) for limiting the
The second gaming state generating means is configured to operate the first gaming ball that has generated the second gaming state in a first benefit giving area (upper stage 71, 71E, 71F) that gives a first profit to the player. ), and the first gaming state generating means is configured to use the second gaming ball that has generated the first gaming state to give the player a second profit that is different from the first profit. A gaming machine characterized by guiding players to a profit giving area (lower stage 72).

According to feature M1 of the present invention group, the second gaming state generating means moves the first gaming ball that has generated the second gaming state to the first benefit giving area that gives the first profit to the player. and the first gaming state generating means guides the second gaming ball that has generated the first gaming state to a second benefit giving area that gives the player a second profit different from the first profit. Therefore, the player pays attention to where the game ball is guided. Further, the limiting means causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on the second gaming ball passing through a predetermined area in the gaming area while the second gaming state is occurring. Therefore, the player can enjoy the second game state with peace of mind.

Feature M2.
In the gaming machine described in feature M1 of the present invention group,
The first game ball guided to the first profit giving area by the second gaming state generating means generates a first profit giving area that gives the first profit when a first condition is satisfied. The second game ball that enters the ball area (upper introduction part 751) and is guided to the second profit-giving area by the first game state generating means is under a second condition different from the first condition. A gaming machine characterized in that, when the condition 2 is satisfied, a ball enters a second profit entry area (lower introduction section 771) that provides the second profit.

According to feature M2 of the present invention group, the first game ball guided to the first profit giving area by the second gaming state generating means receives the first profit when the first condition is satisfied. The second game ball that enters the first profit-giving area and is guided to the second profit-giving area by the first game state generating means meets a second condition different from the first condition. If the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the ball enters the second profit entry area that provides the second profit, so the player pays attention to whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied.

Feature M3.
In the gaming machine described in feature M2 of the present invention group,
The first game ball that did not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that did not meet the second condition are located in the first profit ball area and the second profit ball area. A gaming machine characterized in that the game machine is ejected to another area different from both areas.

According to the feature M3 of the present invention group, the first game ball that does not satisfy the first condition and the second game ball that does not satisfy the second condition have a first profit ball area and a second profit ball area. Since the ball is ejected to another area that is different from both areas of the ball entering area, the player pays attention to whether or not the first game ball and the second game ball are ejected to the other area. .

Feature M4.
In the gaming machine described in features M1 to M3 of the present invention group,
The limiting means is
a restriction state that restricts the second gaming state generating means from generating the second gaming state;
a non-limiting state that does not restrict the second gaming state generating means from generating the second gaming state;
When the second gaming state generating means generates the second gaming state, the state is switched to the limited state, and when the first gaming state generating means generates the first gaming state, the non-limiting state is activated. A gaming machine characterized by switching to a restricted state.

According to feature M4 of the present invention group, the restriction means switches to the restriction state when the second game state generation means generates the second game state, and the first game state generation means switches the first game state to the restriction state. Since the state is switched to the non-restricted state when the state is generated, the second game state can be played without being restricted from generating the second game state by the second game state generating means during the occurrence of the first game state. It is possible to reliably restrict generation of the second game state by the second game state generating means during the occurrence of the state.

Feature M5.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features M1 to M4 of the present invention group,
The first gaming state is
a first probability state (high-frequency nuisance mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a first probability;
and a second probability state (low-frequency nuisance mode) that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on a second probability higher than the first probability. A gaming machine with special features.

According to feature M5 of the present invention group, the first gaming state includes a first probability state that causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on the first probability; The second probability state causes the second gaming state generating means to generate the second gaming state based on the second probability that is higher than the probability state of the second gaming state generating means. The player pays attention to this and plays the game in the hope that the second probability state will occur. Therefore, the gaming machine can increase the attention of players to the game.

According to the feature group M of the present invention, the gaming machine allows the player to play the game comfortably, so that the following problems can be solved.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known that are equipped with variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols. This gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery and starts displaying a changing pattern when a game ball enters an operating port (starting ball entry means). For example, when the gaming machine wins a jackpot lottery, it finally stops displaying a specific combination of symbols, etc. on the variable display means, and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state that is advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state where game balls can enter.
In this way, the gaming machine improves the player's game by switching between the first gaming state and the second gaming state that provides a profit to the player and is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. is increasing the attention to it.

However, if the gaming machine switches to the first gaming state without being awarded a profit during the second gaming state, there is a problem in that the gaming machine cannot allow the player to play the game comfortably. .

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used in gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

1...Pachinko machine, 24...General winning opening, 25...Upper operating opening, 26...Lower operating opening, 27...Variable winning device, 271...Big winning opening, 272...Opening/closing door, 273...Variable winning driving unit, 28...Out Mouth, 35...Picture display device, 4...Main control device, 42...MPU, 5...Audio light emission control device, 52...MPU, 6...Display control device, 62...MPU.

Claims (1)

a firing means for firing a game ball toward a game area formed in front of the game board;
A starting ball entry means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter, and which is a trigger for executing a predetermined lottery based on the entry of the game ball;
A variable display means that displays a plurality of symbols in a variable manner based on the execution of the predetermined lottery;
A gaming machine comprising: performance execution means for performing a performance including a reach display performance in which the variable display is performed in a state where a predetermined number of the symbols are displayed in a predetermined combination on the fluctuation display means,
The starting ball entry means is
a first starting ball entry means;
a second starting ball entering means different from the first starting ball entering means, capable of switching between a permissible state in which entry of game balls is permitted and a restricted state in which entry of game balls is restricted; ,
This gaming machine is
comprising a hold display means for displaying a number of performance hold images corresponding to the hold number of the variable display rights held up to a predetermined upper limit when a game ball enters the starting ball enter means;
The fluctuation display is
a first variable display that is executed when a game ball enters the first starting ball entry means;
a second variable display executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means;
The performance execution means is
Suggestion information display means capable of displaying a predetermined suggestion information image in at least a plurality of consecutive first variable displays;
In a situation where the predetermined suggestion information image is displayed in a predetermined display content on the variable display means based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry means, the predetermined suggestion information image overlaps with the predetermined suggestion information image. A specific effect display means capable of displaying a specific effect image corresponding to the second variable display,
The specific effect display means includes a termination means for terminating the display of the specific effect image executed by the variable display means in a situation where the predetermined suggestion information image is displayed with the predetermined display content by the variable display means. Prepare,
The predetermined suggestion information image is configured such that the display content of the predetermined suggestion information image can change until the display of the specific effect image is finished,
This gaming machine is
the predetermined suggestion information image and the specific effect image can be viewed simultaneously;
The predetermined suggestion information image and the specific effect image are respectively drawn and displayed with different priorities displayed on the variable display means,
The suggested information display means includes:
A plurality of types of suggestion information images can be displayed as the display content of the predetermined suggestion information image,
means for maintaining the display content of the predetermined suggestion information image without change for a predetermined period when displaying the predetermined suggestion information image overlappingly with the specific effect image;
means for continuously displaying the predetermined suggestion information image at the position where it was displayed at the start of displaying the specific effect image,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect image can be continuously displayed over a plurality of game rounds based on execution of the permissible state.

Images